Dewetron D3PC, D310, DEWE -3210, -3040-RM, -3050 Data Acquisition Instrument Owner's Guide

Dewetron USA

Owner’s Guide

Energy test Flight test Vehicle test Industrial

D3PC, D310,

DEWE-3210

DEWE-3040-RM

DEWE-3050 data acquisition instruments

Important notices

Contents © 2007-2013 Dewetron, Inc.

The contents of this manual are protected by copyright law, and may be reproduced only with the express written permission of Dewetron, Inc. All rights are reserved.

Contact the company at our address here:

Dewetron, Inc.

10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA

Telephone: +1 401-284-3750

Fax: +1 401-284-3755 email: [email protected] web: www.dewamerica.com

SideHAND is a registered trademark of Dewetron, Inc.

Dewetron is a trademark of Dewetron GesmbH

Microsoft, Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation

Matlab® is a trademark of The Mathworks, Inc.

Flexpro® is a trademark of Weisang GMBH nCode is copyrighted by HBM, Inc.

Dewesoft is a trademark of Dewesoft d.o.o.

Met/CAL® is a trademark of Fluke Corporation

Vector and DBC are the properties of Vector Informatik GmbH

All copyrights and trademarks acknowledged to be the properties of their owners.

Printed in USA

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Contents

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs | iii

1

Introduction 1-11

Training 1-11

Support 1-11

Calibration 1-12

Certificate included 1-12

Models Covered 1-12

What’s in this Guide 1-12

And what is not in this guide: 1-12

2

Safety precautions 2-13

BIOS notification: 2-14

Windows updates and antivirus/security software 2-15

Problematic network stacks 2-15

System and Components Recycling 2-15

Restriction of Hazardous Substances 2-15

3

D310 Series 3-17

System Dimensions 3-18

Top-level call-outs 3-19

Top-level call-outs (continued) 3-20

D310 Left Side Panel 3-20

Accessing the Batteries 3-21

Signal conditioning 3-22

A/D card(s) 3-22

Interface(s) 3-23

Video Cameras 3-23

Installing the 310-UPS option 3-24

Configuration guide, D310 with MDAQ panel 3-26

iv | Table of Contents

Configuration guide, D310 model 3-27

Connecting EPAD2 modules to your D310 (DAQ or MDAQ version) 3-27

System Connectors 3-28

System/PC connectors 3-28

Computer Connectors 3-30

Signal Input Connectors 3-36

Channel Expansion 3-40

Connecting the MOB-DISP-17 to your D310 3-43

Operation Guidelines 3-44

System Startup Protocol 3-44

HDD Usage 3-46

Basic Specifcations 3-47

Additional Specifications 3-48

Digital and clock line specs 3-48

Standard Counter/Encoders 3-49

Advanced Counter/Encoders (UP-ORION-CTR8 option) 3-49

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option) 3-49

4

D3PC-8 Model 4-51

System Dimensions 4-52

Top-level call-outs 4-53

Signal conditioning 4-54

A/D card 4-54

Interface(s) 4-55

Video Cameras 4-55

Connecting EPAD2 modules to your D3PC-8 4-56

Connecting a Standard VGA/XGA Monitor to your D3PC-8 4-57

Connecting the MOB-DISP-17 to your D3PC-8 4-58

Using the New iPAD as a Wireless Display with your D3PC-8 4-59

System Connectors 4-60

Computer Connectors 4-61

Signal Input Connectors 4-68

Synchronizing Multiple D3PC-8 Systems 4-71

| v

Operation Guidelines 4-72

System Startup Protocol 4-72

Hardware Protocols 4-73

Basic Specifcations 4-74

Digital and clock line specs 4-75

Standard Counter/Encoders 4-75

Advanced Counter/Encoders (UP-ORION-CTR8 option) 4-76

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option) 4-76

5

DEWE-3210 Series 5-77

System Dimensions 5-78

Top-level call-outs 5-79

Signal conditioning 5-80

A/D card(s) 5-80

Interface(s) 5-81

Video Cameras 5-81

Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model 5-82

Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model 5-82

System Connectors 5-83

System/PC connectors 5-83

Computer Connectors 5-85

Signal Input Connectors 5-91

Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model) 5-93

Operation Guidelines 5-95

System Startup Protocol 5-95

Hardware Protocols 5-97

Analog Specifications 5-99

Counter/Encoder Specifications 5-100

CAN BUS Specifications 5-100

Interfaces 5-101

Accessories Included 5-101

Computer System Specifications 5-102

Data Acquisition Software Specifications 5-103

vi |

6

DEWE-3050 Series 6-105

System Dimensions 6-106

Top-level call-outs 6-107

Top-level call-outs (continued) 6-108

DEWE-3050, rear view, TWO 2 5U-PANEL-16s installed (32 slots) 6-108

DEWE-3050 Rear Panel Configurations 6-109

DEWE-3050, front view, display removed - keyboard revealed 6-110

Additional Function Panels 6-110

Signal conditioning 6-112

A/D card(s) 6-112

Interface(s) 6-113

Video Cameras 6-113

System Connectors 6-114

System/PC connectors 6-114

PC Connector Call-Outs 6-115

Signal Input Connectors 6-119

Operation Guidelines 6-122

System Startup Protocol 6-122

Hardware Protocols 6-124

Additional Specifications 6-127

7

DEWE-3040-RM Series 7-129

System Dimensions 7-130

Top Level Call-outs 7-131

Top-level call-outs (continued) 7-132

DEWE-3040-RM, front view, Control Panel Close-up 7-132

DEWE-3040-RM Rear Panel Configurations 7-133

DEWE-3050, front view, display removed - keyboard revealed 7-134

Signal conditioning 7-136

A/D card(s) 7-136

Interface(s) 7-137

Video Cameras 7-137

System Connectors 7-138

System/PC connectors 7-138

Top Rear Panel Connectors 7-139

Right Side Panel 7-139

Signal Input Connectors 7-143

Operation Guidelines 7-145

System Startup Protocol 7-145

Hardware Protocols 7-145

Additional Specifications 7-147

8

Signal Connections / Counters 8-149

Analog input connections 8-149

Counter/Encoder input connections 8-150

Counter Applications 8-151

9

Software Overview 9-167

LabVIEW Drivers for ORION and DAQ Modules 9-168

DEWESoft Turn-key Application (DS-7) 9-171

DS-7 Software Specifications 9-172

DS-7 Operation Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis 9-175

Projects and Global settings 9-211

Matlab - Exporting Data from DS-7 9-237

10 Important Accessories

10-243

DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply 10-243

Neutrino-4 10-247

BAT-CHARGER-1 10-251

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO 10-255

MOB-DISP-17 Mobile Display 10-256

11 Signal/Sensor Adapters

11-261

MSI series interfaces 11-261

Adapters 11-263

| vii

viii |

12 HSI Series Signal Conditioners

273

HSI Series Modules 273

HSI-HV Isolated High Voltage module 280

HSI-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module 282

HSI-STG Isolated Universal Input Module 286

13 DAQ Series Signal Conditioners

13-293

DAQ Series Modules 13-293

DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz) 13-303

DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz) 13-305

DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz) 13-307

DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz) 13-311

DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module 13-313

DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module 13-315

DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module 13-323

DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module 13-327

DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module 13-331

DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module 13-335

DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module 13-337

DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module 13-339

DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module 13-341

DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module 13-343

DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module 13-349

DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module 13-351

14 PAD series Signal Conditioners

14-353

PAD Series Common Information 14-353

Calibration information 14-353

General PAD module specifications 14-353

PAD Module Connectors 14-354

PAD Modules Table 14-355

Adding PAD modules to your Dewtetron system: 14-356

Typical hook-ups 14-356

Addressing PAD modules 14-357

PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module 14-361

PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module 14-363

PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module 14-365

PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module 14-367

15 MDAQ Series Conditioners

15-369

MDAQ Series Common Information 15-369

General MDAQ module specifications 15-369

MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board 15-370

MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module 15-372

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module 15-377

MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module 15-381

MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module 15-385

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module 15-387

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card 15-389

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card 15-390

16 EPAD2 and CPAD2 Series

16-391

EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview 16-391

General EPAD2/CPAD2 Module Specifications 16-392 xPAD2 Series Calibration Information 16-395

EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X 16-396

EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X 16-398

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8 16-400

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8 16-402

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8 16-404

17 ORION Series A/D Cards

17-407

ORION series Cross-Reference 17-407

ORION Overview 17-408

A/D Technologies within the ORION series 17-408

Combining ORION cards 17-409

| ix

x |

ORION-0424-200 17-412

ORION-0824-200 17-413

ORION-1624-200 17-414

ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100 17-415

18 DEWETRON Interfaces

18-417

DEWE-CLOCK time code interface card 18-417

VIDEO-FG-4 interface card 18-433

ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces 18-437

CAN BUS interfaces 18-442

19 DEWETRON Sensors

19-451

DEWE-CAMS 19-452

DEWE-CAM-USB 19-452

DEWE-CAM-FW-70 19-456

GPS Sensors 19-461

DEWE-VGPS-200C 19-461

DEWE-VGPS-HS High Speed GPS Sensor 19-462

20 Using the iPad as a Wireless Display

20-463

System Requirements 20-463

1 Create a Passworded USER account 20-464

2 Allow Remote Desktop in Windows 20-466

3 Connect your USER account to RDP 20-468

4 Set the DEWE Computer’s WIFI adapter to a fixed IP Address 20-468

5 Allowing Remote Desktop through the DEWE Computer’s Firewall 20-472

6 Create a Private WIFI network with your Wireless Router 20-474

7 Connect the DEWE computer to your private network 20-475

8 Connect the new iPad to your private network 20-476

9 Gestures 20-480

Appendix

A-485

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 1, INTRODUCTION | 1-11

1

Introduction

The products covered in this manual are the data acquisition instruments within the DEWETRON line manufactured by Dewetron, Inc in the United States of America.

D300 and DEWE-3000 series instruments are a unqiue combination of a state-of-the-art computer which has been ruggedized for field applications in industrial applications, plus a signal conditioning front-end system for interfacing with sensors and interfaces, an A/D card for digitizing the conditioned signals, and powerful data acquisition software that allows you to set up and initiate data acquisition, as well as to analyze data that has been replayed.

There are several models, because there are so many applications for our products, in different industries, and with different requirements for size, form factor, and capabilities.

Training

DEWETRON offers training at various offices around the world several times each year. DEWETRON headquaters in Austria have a very large and professional conference and seminar center, where training classes are conducted on a regular basis starting with sensors and signal conditioning, A/D technology and software operation.

Dewetron Inc. in the USA also has a dedicated training facility connected to its headquarters, located in

Rhode Island. For more information about training services in the US, please visit: http://www.dewamerica.com/support/training

Support

DEWETRON has a team of people ready to assist you if you have any questions or any technical difficulties regarding the system. For any support please contact your local distributor first or DEWETRON directly.

For North and south America, please contact:

Dewetron, Inc.

10 High Street, Suite K Wakefield, RI 02879 U.S.A.

Tel: +1 401-284-3750 Fax: +1 401-284-3755 [email protected]

www.dewamerica.com

For Asia and Europe, please contact:

Dewetron Ges.m.b.H.

Parkring 4 A-8074 Graz-Grambach AUSTRIA

Tel.: +43 316 3070

Fax: +43 316 307090 [email protected] www.dewetron.com

1-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Calibration

Every measuring instrument should be calibrated at regular intervals. The norm across nearly every industry is annual calibration, although this can vary according to the industry, environment, government regulations, and other regulations.

Before your Dewetron data acquisition system is delivered, it is calibrated at our factory in the USA.

Dewetron utilizes a NIST traceable metrology system based on the Fluke 5500 series calibrator and other industry leading instruments. We have created numerous Met/CAL® procedures and specialized calibration hardware and software to allow the automation of calibration check and adjustment of nearly every signal conditioner and A/D card that we manufacture. These procedures are proprietary to

Dewetron, although they are available for purchase.

Customers who have the same Fluke hardware can use them to similarly automate their calibration of

Dewetron instruments.

Calibration services are available directly from

Dewetron, on whatever frequency you require. We do not subcontract calibration services, and perform it ourselves in house.

Contact Dewetron for further information about calibration services and calibration equipment that is available for purchase.

Certificate included

Each system is delivered with a certificate of compliance with our published specifications.

Models Covered

„

„

„

„

„

This owner’s guide covers the following model(s):

D3PC

D310

DEWE-3210

DEWE-3040-RM

DEWE-3050

What’s in this Guide

This guide is intended to serve as the top level reference document for the models listed above. As such, it contains the following key information:

„

„

„

„

„

„

Support and calibration contact info

Safety precautions

System overview and block diagram

Overview of all models

Detailed specs for each model

Quick start guide operation

And what is not in this guide:

As a top-level reference, This manual is not meant to replace the comprehence reference manuals related to Dewetron sensors, signal conditioners, A/D cards, interfaces, and software.

Please see those manuals for complete details.

However, if you require a traceable calibration certification with data, calibration reports are available for purchase with each order. We retain them for at least one year, so calibration reports can be purchased after your system was delivered.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 2, sAFETy PRECAUTIONs | 2-13

2

safety precautions

♦ Use this system under the terms of the specifications only to avoid any possible danger. Maintenance should be performed by qualified personnel only.

Your safety is our primary concern! Please be safe at all times.

General safety and hazard warnings for all Dewetron systems:

symbols used in this manual:

Indicates hazardous voltages

WARNiNG

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could cause bodily injury or death.

CAUTiON

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could possibly cause damage to equipment or permanent loss of data.

⇒ These notices are sometimes indicated in this graphical motif.

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. DEWETRON Elektronische Messgeraete

Ges.m.b.H. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

♦ During the use of the system, it might be possible to interact with non-Dewetron systems. Please read and follow the safety instructions provided in the manuals of all other components regarding warning and security advices for using the system.

♦ With this product, only use the power cable delivered or defined for the host country.

♦ Do not connect or disconnect sensors, probes or test leads, as these parts are connected to a voltage supply unit.

♦ The system is grounded via a protective conductor in the power supply cord. To avoid electric shocks, the protective conductor must be connected with the ground of the power network. Before connecting the input or output connectors of the system, make sure that there is a proper grounding to guarantee potential free usage. For countries, in which there is no proper grounding, please refere to your local legally safety regulations for safety use.

♦ DC systems: Every DC system has a grounding connected to the chassis (yellow/green safety banana plug).

♦ Please note the characteristics and indicators on the system to avoid fire or electric shocks. Before connecting the system, please carefully read the corresponding specifications in the product manual.

♦ The inputs are not, unless otherwise noted (CATx identification), for connecting to the main circuit of category II, III and IV.

♦ The power cord separates the system from the power supply.

Do not block the power cord, since it has to be accessible for the users.

♦ Do not use the system if equipment covers or shields are removed.

♦ If you assume the system is damaged, get it examined by authorized personnel only.

♦ Any use in wet rooms, outdoors or in adverse environmental condition is not allowed! Adverse environmental conditions are: moisture or high humidity, dust, flammable gases, fumes or storms. et al.

2-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE

♦ The measurement category can be adjusted depending on module configuration.

♦ Any direct voltage output is protected with a fuse against short cut and reverse-polarity, but is not galvanically isolated (except when explicitly marked on the system).

♦ The system must be connected and operated to a properly grounded wall socket at the AC mains power supply only

(except for DC systems).

♦ Any other use than described above may damage your system and is attended with dangers like shortcut, fire or electric shocks.

♦ The whole system must not be changed, rebuilt or opened

(except for changing DAQP, HSI, PAD, CPAD2, and EPAD2 modules).

♦ If you believe for any reason that the system cannot be used without risk, the system must be rendered inoperative and should be protected against inadvertant operation. You should assume that riskless operation is not possible if the system is: visibly damaged; emits unusual noises, smoke, or flames; if it does not function anymore; if the system has been exposed to long storage in adverse environmental conditions; if the system has been exposed to heavy stresses.

♦ Do not touch any exposed connectors or components if they are carrying voltage and/or current. The use of non-insulated wires with the system is never allowed. There is a risk of short circuit and fire hazard.

♦ Warranty void if damages caused by disregarding this manual.

For consequential damages NO liability will be assumed!

♦ Warranty void if damages to property or persons caused by improper use or disregarding the safety instructions.

♦ Unauthorized changing or rebuilding the system is prohibited due to safety and permission reasons (CE). Exception: changing modules like DAQ, DAQP or PAD.

♦ The assembly of the system is equivalent to protection class I.

For power supply, only the correct power socket of the public power supply must be used, except the system is DC powered.

♦ Be careful with voltages >25 VAC or >35 VDC! These voltages are already high enough in order to get a dangerous electric shock by touching the wiring.

♦ The system heats up during operation. Make sure there is adequate ventilation. Ventilation slots must not covered!

♦ Only fuses of the specified type and nominal current may be used. The use of patched fuses is prohibited.

♦ Prevent using metal bare wires! Risk of short cut and fire hazard!

♦ DO NOT use the system before, during or shortly after a thunderstorm (risk of lightning and high energy overvoltage).

An advanced range of application under certain conditions is allowed with therefore designed products only. For details please refer to the specifications.

♦ Make sure that your hands, shoes, clothes, the floor, the system or measuring leads, integrated curcuits and so on, are dry.

♦ DO NOT use the system in rooms with flammable gases, fumes or dust or in adverse environmental conditions.

♦ Avoid operation in the immediate vicinity of high magnetic or electromagnetic fields transmitting antennas or high-frequency generators

♦ For exact values please refere to enclosed specifications.

♦ Use measurement leads or measurement accessories aligned to the specification of the system only. Fire hazard in case of overload!

♦ Do not switch on the system after transporting it from a cold into a warm room and vice versa. The thereby created condensation may damage your system. Acclimate the unpowered system to room temperature.

♦ Do not disassemble the system! There is a high risk of getting a perilous electric shock. Capacitors may still be charged, even the system has been disconnected from the power supply.

♦ The electrical installations and equipments in industrial facilities must be observed by the security regulations and insurance institutions.

♦ The use of the measuring system in schools and other training facilities must be observerd by skilled personnel.

♦ The measuring systems are not designed for use on human beings or animals.

♦ Please contact a professional if you have doubts about the method of operation, safety or the connection of the system.

♦ Please be careful with the product. Shocks, hits and dropping it from even low levels may damage the batteries, or the whole system. For exact values please refere to enclosed specifications.

♦ Please also consider the detailed technical reference manual as well as the security advices of the connected systems.

♦ This product has left the factory in safety-related proper condition. In order to maintain this condition and guarantee safety use, the user must observe the security advice, protocols, and warnings in this manual.

BIOS notification:

The system BIOS is protected by password. Any change in the BIOS may cause a system crash.

When the system is booting, do not press ESC-button on keyboard. This may clear the BIOS settings

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 2, sAFETy PRECAUTIONs | 2-15

and cause system faults.

Any change in the file structure as deleting or adding files or directories might cause a system crash.

Before installing software updates contact Dewetron or your local distributor. Use only software packages which are released by DEWETRON. Further informations are also available in the internet (http:// www.dewetron.com).

After power off the system wait at least 10 seconds before switching the system on again. Otherwise the system may not boot correct. This prolongs also the life of all system components.

Windows updates and antivirus/ security software

♦ Before installing Windows software updates consult with Dewetron for compatibility guidance. Please also keep in mind that the use of any antivirus or other security software may slow down your system and may cause data loss.

Problematic network stacks

♦ Often intrusive IT software or network processes can interfere with the primary function of the Dewetron system: to record data. Therefore we recommend strongly against the installation of IT/MIS software and running their processes on any

Dewetron data acquisition system, and cannot guarantee the performance of our systems if they are so configured.

This symbol indicates that this system complies with the European Union’s requirements according to Directive

2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). Please find further informations about recycling on the DEWETRON web site www.dewetron.com

Restriction of Hazardous Substances

This product has been classified as Monitoring and

Control equipment, and is outside the scope of the

2002/95/EC RoHS Directive. This product is known to contain lead.

Product End-of-Life Handling

Observe the following guidelines when recycling a

Dewetron system:

System and Components Recycling

Production of these components required the extraction and use of natural resources. The substances contained in the system could be harmful to your health and to the environment if the system is improperly handled at it’s end of life!

Please recycle this product in an appropriate way to avoid an unnecessary pollution of the environment and to keep natural resources.

2-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-17

3

D310 series

The D310 is an economical and portable data acquisition instrument. In this model the 15” touchscreen display and battery capabilities are options that must be ordered with the machine is built. It is capable of housing any 8 Dewetron plug-in isolation modules (DAQ/PAD/HsI series) or

16 MDAQ differential conditioner channels.

This model is manufactured at the company’s facilities in the UsA. It has all of the capabilties of the

DEWE-3210, except in a more affordable package.

This section will review the hardware characteristics and specifications of the D310 series, including its properties as a computer instrument, and all data acquisition components, including the A/D cards, signal conditioners, and interfaces with which it is compatible.

Please refer to the SOFTWARE section of this manual to learn how to operate the turn-key data acquisition software installed on the system.

Please refer to the separate sections for the SIGNAL CONDITIONERS, A/D CARDS, INTERFACES and

SENSORS for complete details about those components that may be installed within your system.

3-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Dimensions

D310 with battery and display option installed

128

(without battery option)

381

165

(with battery option)

312

(Left Side) (Top, with screen option)

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

(Right Side)

Add 10 mm all around for BNC connectors, knobs, and other protrusions.

Allow plenty of room for cooling fans to function properly. Never block air exchange.

Top-level call-outs

D310, Left/Front Angle, with optional display and batteries

Optional 15” XGA display with resistive TOUCHSCREEN

2 Counter LEMOs

EPAD LEMO

DAQ/PAD/HSI slots or MDAQ conditioners

12VDC output

CHs 8-15*

Rubber side shock absorbers

Accessory / digital

I/O connector

Optional ORION-

SYNC I/O and LEDs

Optional CAN BUS

DB9 connectors

Chassis tie-down hard points

Battery door release button

Optional 310-UPS battery compartment

D310 without the display and battery options

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-19

Rubber side shock absorbers

Computer connections

(see next page)

Chassis tie-down hard points

Filtered air intakes

(2 fans)

3-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Top-level call-outs (continued)

D310 Right Side Panel

Removable hard drive bay

Power Switch

Computer I/O

RS232, 3 x ethernet,

4 x USB 2.0, Audio I/O,

VGA output, 2 x PS/2,

1 x IEEE-1394

Battery option

Battery compartment release button

D310 Left Side Panel

DAQ/PAD/HSI slots (or

MDAQ positions)

Rubberized side bumpers

Battery option

9~29 VDC Power Input

3 x PCI slot card edges

Chassis tie-down hard point

DC output from battery option

DC input to battery option

EPAD LEMO 2 x Counter LEMOs 12VDC convenience outlet

Not used (Reserved)

Accessory/Digital I/O

DSUB-37

Sync In/Out and

LEDs (option)

CAN BUS (2 x DB9)

(option)

Analog chs 8~15 (when

DAQ slots are installed only)

Battery compartment release button

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-21

Accessing the Batteries

When the battery option (310-UPS) is installed, an additional battery compartment is fixed to the underside of the D310 chassis. This is done at the factory. The batteries are installed on the large flat surface at the bottom of the battery compartment.

First, turn the D310 upright as shown below, so that you have access to the underside of the battery compartment.

Second, press in the two battery door release buttons, located on opposite sides of the battery compartment. These are labeled in the preceding top-level chassis call-outs, as well as in the picture below.

This will cause the battery door to open. This reveals the edges of the batteries. Grab the plastic pull tab on any battery to remove it from the system. Similarly you may insert new or recharged batteries into this compartment, making sure that they are aligned properly and fit all the way into the slot.

Simply close the battery door when finished. Batteries can be swapped even when the system is powered up and running from the batteries. The only caveat is that the batteries should have enough charge to continue running the system; generally 25% is sufficient. You can look at the batteries while they are installed and see their LCD power gauges, to estimate their remaining power.

Four battery slots for

SideHAND2 batteries

Push-buttons on each side, to release the battery door

DC output (14-24 VDC)

DC input (18-24 VDC)

(connects to the DPS-2410, included with the 310-UPS option)

You can pull on the plastic tab at the end of any battery in order to remove it from the system.

3-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Signal conditioning

The D310 can be equipped with either:

„

„

8 x DAQ / PAD / HSI series plug-in signal conditioners, or

2 x 8-channel MDAQ-SUB conditioners (16 channels total)

It is not possible to install both DAQ/PAD/HSI slots and MDAQ conditioners into the body of the D310. However, mixed systems can be created by connecting external conditioners of any kind to the system. Therefore it is common that the D310 is configured with 8 internal DAQ modules, plus connected to 16 ot more external MDAQ conditioners. Or the other way around, with 16 built-in MDAQ conditioners, and 16 or more

DAQ/PAD/HSI modules connected externally. There are many possibilities.

Model D310 with 8 DAQ modules Model D310 with 16 MDAQ channels

„

„

„

„

„

A/D card(s)

The D310 has three half length PCI slots inside. As a standard, the ORION-1616-100 A/D card is installed when you buy the D310 data acquisition system. This card provides the following basic specifications (further details are shown in the specification tables in the next pages):

16 simultaneously sampled analog input channels

16-bit resolution, separate ADC per channels

100 kS/s/ch maximum sample rate

2 synchronous counter/encoder inputs

8 each digital input and output lines

At the time of ordering, this card can be upgraded, using any of the options available for increasing the channel count, the bit resolution to 22 or 24-bit, or increasing the sample rate up to 1 MS/s/ch, and many combinations of the preceding. See the UP-ORION options for all of the possibilities.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-23

In addition, many options can be factory installed onto the ORION cards, including adding two high speed

CAN BUS interfaces, or expanding the number and capabilities of the digital counters that are installed.

Interface(s)

The D310 is compatible with ORION, PCI card, and USB connected interfaces These include the CAN BUS interfaces added to the ORION A/D card, as well as separate PCI cards available for adding multiple ARINC

429, MIL-STD-1553 interfaces to the system. If all three PCI slots were used up, ARINC and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces can also be added as USB devices. There are numerous interfaces available for your DEWE system.

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

PCI format

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

USB format

Video Cameras

The D310 is compatible with several kinds of video cameras, including:

DEWE-CAM-USB

USB camera

DEWE-CAM-FW

Hard sync Firewire camera

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E

Gigabit ethernet camera

3-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Installing the 310-UPS option

The standard D310 chassis has three tapped holes on the side opposite the display (the side with the large

DEWETRON logo on it). These holes are used to mount the 310-UPS option.

Tapped mounting holes for the 310-UPS option

STEP 1

Line up the 310-UPS stanchions with the three tapped holes.

STEP 2

Insert a standard blade screw driver into each of the round holes in the back of the 310-UPS and tighten the screw clockwise until it seats firmly. Repeat until all three screws are secure. Do not overtighten.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-25

STEP 3

Connect the 310-CBL-UPS between the battery box and the D310 mainframe, as shown below:

310-CBL-UPS cable connects the DC power output from the battery option, to the main

DC power input on the D310

STEP 4

To charge the 310-UPS, connect the DPS-2410 to the DC input of the battery box, as shown below.

Plug into 120 VAC mains

DC power cable: connects the output of the DPS-2410 to the input of the battery box

3-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE

2 U

Configuration guide, D310 with MDAQ panel

The D310 has a 2U height space on its left side panel, which can accept either a 2U high MDAQ panel, such as either the DSUB connector panel or half BNC/half DSUB9 panel ... or a 1.5U panel plus any of the 0.5U accessory panels, as shown below:

MDAQ panels Accessory panels

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-4

0.5 U

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-8

0.5 U

Power supply for PNA-A100 current clamps

0.5U-AOUT-BNC-2

0.5 U

1U-AOUT-BNC-4

2 U

1.5 U

MDAQ panel with BNC connectors is only 1.5U, leaving 0.5U above for any accessory panel

2 U 2.0 U

When a combo MDAQ panel is used (half BNC and half DSUB), this takes 2.0U panel height.

When a BNC only MDAQ panel is used, this occupies 1.5U of height, and 0.5U remains available for any

0.5U accessory panel to be installed. If you don’t order any of the available 0.5U panels we will install a blank panel in the space.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-27

Configuration guide, D310 model

The D310 has a fixed configuration: there is a RACK-8 built into the side panel, so all you need to do is choose any any of our DAQ, PAD, or HSI series plug-in modules to fill the slots.

Connecting EPAD2 modules to your D310 (DAQ or MDAQ version)

Both D310 versions accept optional EPAD2 series external PAD modules for adding many channels of slower temperature signals, voltage, current, and RTD inputs. Simply connect the first EPAD2 module to the standard EPAD connector. Further EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained from one to the next. The last

EPAD2 module must have the terminator installed in the open connector (even if there is only one EPAD2 module the terminator must be installed). Up to 16 EPADs in any combination can be connected.

EPAD-TERM-L terminator at the last module in the chain

EPAD2 cable xPAD-CBL-LL-??

(where ?? is the length in meters)

3-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Connectors

System/PC connectors

DC power input

Connector: LEMO power connector, as shown in the picture above. The connector is this LEMO model:

EGJ-2B-302-CLA. The appropriate mating connector is LEMO FGJ.302.CLLD-XX (where XX is the cable size).

The mating cable called 310-CBL-DC is provided to connect the D310 to the included external AC/DC power supply. This cable is 2 meters long. It has FGJ.302.CLLD-XX on the side that plugs into the D310, and

FGG.2B.302-CLAD-XX on the side that plugs into the external AD/DC power supply.

Permissable power inputs are 9-29 VDC.

⇒ Important note - power input must not exceed 29 VDC! system damage may occur.

DC Power Input

KEY PIN: (+)

LOW PIN: (–)

LEMO connector

EGJ-2B-302-CLA

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-29

RS232C interface

(com1)

PS/2 mouse (green) IEEE-1394 firewire Ethernet ports (3)

XGA video output PS/2 keyboard (violet) USB 2.0 ports (4) Audio stack

(see description for color codes)

3-30 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Computer Connectors

The door on the right side of the chassis opens to allow access to a collection of computer interface connections, as follows:

RS232C interface connector (com1)

Connector: 9-pin DSUB (male)

Mating connector: 9-pin DSUB (female)

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the RS232C serial interface.

The typical interpretation of the signals in the COM ports is as fol

The connector pin-out is defined here:

PS/2 mouse (green) and PS/2 keyboard (violet)

Connectors: Standard PS/2 green (mouse) and violet (keyboard)

Mating connectors: Standard PS/2 keyboard and mouse plugs or USB-PS/2 adapters

Function: Attachment of a keyboard or PS/2 mouse adapter via the stacked PS/2 mouse and keyboard connector (MSE & KBD).

Description: Both interfaces utilize open-drain signaling with on-board pull-up. The PS/2 mouse and keyboard is supplied from 5V_STB when in standby mode in order to enable keyboard or mouse activity to bring

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-31

the system out from power saving states. The supply is provided through a 1.1A resetable fuse.

Above left: Stacked PS/2 connector pinning and call-outs

Above right: view of a typical PS/2 connector, showing the pin numbering schema.

Note: Ps/2 devices should be connected before the system is powered on. Ps/2 mice in particular will typically not be recognized by Windows if connected after Windows has loaded.

IEEE-1394 Firewire interface

Connector: Standard 6-pin full size IEEE-1394b female connector

Mating connector: Standard 6-pin IEEE-1394b male plug

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the IEEE-1394 firewire interface.

Description: This port is an IEEE Std 1394a-2000 fully compliant cable port which provides interfacing at

100M bits/s, 200M bits/s, and 400M bits/s.

Note: The DEWE-CAM-FW high speed video camera from Dewetron connects via firewire. However, it is highly recommended to add a dedicated firewire card to your system to get the best performance from the DEWE-

3-32 | OWNER’s GUIDE

CAM-FW sensor. The full speed may not be achievable using the on-board interface shown above.

Ethernet interfaces (3)

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals (printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: Three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers. In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and

Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the DEWE system.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-33

CRT/VGA video output

Connector: three-row 15-pin DE-15 (female) connector

Mating connector: 15-pin DE-15 video (male) plug

Function: For connecting an additional display to the DEWE-321x, which will show an exact duplicate of the built-in display.

Description: There are has two basic types of interfaces to a display: Analog CRT interface and a digital interface typically used with flat panels. The digital interface to flat panels is connected internally to the built-in flatpanel display. The CRT interface is available externally to the user.

⇒ Note: The 5V supply in the CRT connector is fused by a 1.1A resetable fuse.

-

Left: typical mating cable for connecting an external VGA/XGA monitor

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system. This is possible to do, using a PCI video card (PCIe slots are not available in this model).

Note: D310’s 15” display has a max resolution of 1024x768; the CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

3-34 | OWNER’s GUIDE

USB 2.0 interfaces (4)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface. (USB 1.1 devices may work, but will be limited in speed.)

Description: The mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are four user-accessible Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all four USB ports is supported.

USB ports 0 and 2 are supplied on the combined ETHER1, USB0, USB2 connector. USB ports 4 and 5 are supplied on the combined IEEE1394_0, USB4, USB5 connector.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

Note: UsB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XsENs MTI series of sensors.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-35

Audio stack connectors (6)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the DEWE system.

3-36 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (8 or 16)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211.

Above: typical DEWE-3210 showing 8 DAQ modules plugged in

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-37

CAN BUS interface connector (installed when you order CAN BUS option)

Connectors: DSUB 9 connectors (option UP-ORION-CAN2)

Mating connector: DSUB 9

Mating cable: Standard CAN cable

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

The typical DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Expansion connector (DAQ module version only)

Connector: DSUB HD-44 pin female connector

Mating cable: DSUB HD-44 pin male connector

Function: The D310 is configured with a 16 channel A/D card inside (ORION-1616-100) as a standard. The first eight channels are wired to the DAQ modules on the left side panel. Therefore, the other eight channels are brought to this ANALOG INPUT connector on the left side panel, whereby you may connect an expansion rack such as the DEWE-30-8, in order to address these eight channels. This is an HD44 connector, which looks like a DSUB25, but it actually has three rows of pins (44 connections).

3-38 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Pin

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

15

Signal Pin

28

29

30

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

AI 8

GND

AI 11

GND

AI 14

GND

AI 17

GND

--

--

AI 20

GND

AI 23

RS-485 A

--

Signal

GND

AI 10

GND

AI 13

GND

AI 16

GND

AI 19

--

--

--

GND

AI 22

GND

RS-485 B

Pin

39

40

41

42

43

44

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

HDD-44 ANALOG INPUT connector

Signal

AI 19

GND

AI 12

GND

AI 15

GND

AI 18

GND

--

--

AI 21

GND

AI SENSE 2

RS-485 GND

Above are the pin-outs of the HD-44 connector for the input of the additional 8 analog channels, when the

DAQ version of the D310 is ordered. The pins colored in GREEN apply to the standard configuration, where a 16 channel ORION card is installed. However, if you have upgraded this card to a 32-channel ORION, then the pins in white will apply for channels 16 to 31.

The DEWE-30-8 expansion rack is connected via a cable plugged into the DSUB-25 expansion connector, which also includes the RS485 for module control.

DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional)

Signal and power cable

A cable connects the DEWE-30-8 expansion rack to the D310 mainframe. It provides signal connection and

RS485 module control. The DEWE-30-8 should be powered separately.

This expansion/connector does not apply to the model that already has 16 MDAQ channels on its left side panel

Digital I/O connector (AKA “Accessory connector”)

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-39

Connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Mating connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Function: Provides access to the digital input/output lines on the installed A/D card, as well as additional signals such as clock input, trigger input, and more (see A/D card table related to the installed card).

The exact pin-out of this connector can vary according to the system configuration, but here is the typical pin-out diagram when an ORION-1616-100 card is installed:

3-40 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Channel Expansion

As shown previously, expanding your D310 to contain a large number of slow (non-dynamic) analog inputs is easy via the addition of external EPAD2 series modules. But what about expanding the number of fast (dynamic) channels? Of course this is possible, and this section will show the various methods that are available to achieve more fast analog channels.

Using Analog Cables to External Signal Conditioning

In this approach, the ORION series A/D cards are installed within the D310 mainframe, and the signal conditioners to support them are connected externally. Since the D310 has three PCI slots, and there are

32-channel ORION cards available, the maximum channel count of this approach is 96.

To the ORION card inside the D310

A

NA

LOG

SIGNALS

P

OW

ER S

UPPLY AC (optional DC) power supply

DEWE-31-12

Specifications

DAQ/PAD/HSI slots

MDAQ channels

Power supply

Optional power supply

Dimensions W x D x H

Weight

DEWE-30-8

8

--

DEWE-30-16

16

--

95 ~ 260VAC

50/60 Hz

DEWE-30-32

Wide range DC power (11 to 32 VDC)

32

--

230 x 181 x 104 mm

9.1 x 7.1 x 4.1 in.

3 kg (7 lbs)

435 x 133 x 245 mm

17.1 x 5.2 x 9.6 in.

4 kg (9 lbs)

435 x 223 x 245 mm

17.1 x 8.8 x 9.6 in.

7 kg (15 lbs)

DEWE-31-16

--

16

From the ORION

(10-36 VDC)

N/A

208 x 95 x 108 mm

8.2 x 3.7 x 4.3 in.

1.6 kg (3.5 lbs)

DEWE-31-32

--

32

95 ~ 260VAC

50/60 Hz

Wide range DC power

(11 to 32 VDC)

435 x 133 x 245 mm

17.1 x 5.2 x 9.6 in.

4 kg (9 lbs)

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-41

Using PCI bridge Connection to External Signal Conditioning

In this approach, the ORION A/D cards are installed within external DEWE-5X-PCI chassis, and are connected back to the D310 via a single high-speed PCI expansion cable.

PCI expansion is an alternative especially if high channel count is needed. When using an expansion only one PCI slot is occupied in the D310 instrument by a PCI-HOST-CARD. The DEWE-50-PCI, DEWE-51-PCI and DEWE-52 ADC racks can be connected by a 1m PCI cable (optionally 1.5m).

Important notice: The D310 and the DEWE-5x must be equipped with ORION-syNC option.

DEWE-52-PCI-3216

PCI HOST

SYNC

D310

Specifications

DAQ/PAD/HSI slots

MDAQ channels

Power supply

Optional power supply

Dimensions W x D x H

Weight

DEWE-50-PCI-32

32

--

435 x 287 x 223 mm

17.1 x 11.3 x 8.8 in.

10 kg (22 lbs)

DEWE-50-PCI-64 DEWE-51-PCI-64 DEWE-51-PCI-128

64

--

408 x 287 x 410 mm

16.1 x 11.3 x 16.1 in

15 kg (33 lbs)

--

64

95 ~ 260VAC

50/60 Hz

Wide range DC power (11 to 32 VDC)

435 x 287 x 178 mm

17.1 x 11.3 x 7.0 in.

6 kg (13 lbs)

--

128

408 x 287 x 267 mm

16 x 11.3 x 10.5 in.

9 kg (20 lbs)

DEWE-52-PCI-3216

16

32

435 x 287 x 223mm

17.1 x 11.3 x 8.8 in.

9 kg (20 lbs)

3-42 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Using External Time Sources (NETWORK Configuration)

In this approach, multiple DEWE systems are synchronized using either IRIG or GPS time code.

Each still records their own data, but the data files are perfectly synchronized for analysis in third party software (such as Flexpro or Matlab). In addition, because the software option DS-OPT-NET is installed on each acquistion unit, a master controller can view channels from ALL of the connected measuring units in real time.

In the NETWORK configuration, each instrument must have the hardware option UP-ORION-SYNC and the software option DS-OPT-NET. Synchronization of all units is required, via either

(1) a simple SYNC cable connection, for distances up to 200 m, or

(2) DEWE-CLOCK (internal or external), for long distances when a SYNC cable connection is not possible.

The DS-OPT-NET software offers full remote setup, online data transfer up to the limit of the network connection and offline data transfer between the instruments.

User tip: The NET expansion allows multiple usages of the PC power and fast storing capability. Multiple decentralized hard disks offer almost no limit for fast data storing.

D310

D310

SYNC

ETHERNET

Above - direct SYNC of two or more DEWE systems using the ORION-SYNC option installed onto the chassis, and DS-OPT-NET software.

One measuring unit can be set as the master controller of both, or you can use a separate Windows computer as a master client to remotely control all synchronized units. The master controller is connected via ethernet to each measuring unit (typically a dedicated ethernet switch is used).

Right - when the systems are too far apart for the

ORION-SYNC to be connected, the DEWE-CLOCK is used to sync the units via either IRIG or GPS time code signals.

The rest of the system is the same, as described above.

D310

0.000 ms

D310

GPS-CLOCK

SYNC

DEWE-CLOCK

SYNC

ETHERN

ET

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-43

Connecting the MOB-DISP-17 to your D310

Whether your D310 has a built-in display or not, you can still connect an external monitor to it. This could be either a standard office type computer monitor, or the DEWETRON MOB-DISP-17.

The MOB-DISP-17 is a ruggedized mobile display that is designed to be installed inside vehicles. It has suction cup mounting positions, as well as VESA 75 mounting holes for this purpose. The MOB-DISP-17 accepts a standard VGA or DVI interface, therefore it can be connected directly to the VGA output of the

D3PC. In addition, the MOB-DISP-17 can be POWERED by the 12VDC output on the rear panel of the

D3PC.

Finally, a USB 2.0 cable should be connected between the D310 and the MOB-DISP-17, to enable the display’s TOUCHSCREEN capabilities, and to activate the USB 2.0 convenience jacks that are located on the mobile display.

The MOB-DISP-17 is the perfect addition to your DEWETRON system, especially when it will be used in a mobile or challenging physical environment. For complete technical details about the MOB-DISP-17, please refer to the section of this document, “MOB-DISP-17 Mobile Display” on page 10-266.

(To the 12VDC output on the opposite side of the D310 chassis)

Red - 12 VDC power cable

Blue - USB 2.0 cable (A/B)

Green - VGA cable

3-44 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

DC powered systems (STANDARD)

The standard D310 runs from wide-ranging DC power: 9-29 VDC. An AC/DC adapter is included with your system.

To run the system from AC, connect the AC power cord to AC mains and to the AC/DC adapter. Connect the DC output cable that has a round LEMO connector on it to the DC power input on the right side of the D310.

Press then release the soft power switch on the

D310, and the system will boot up.

If your D310 does not have a display, please connect a standard VGA or XGA monitor to the VGA connector on the right side of the system.

VGA output for connecting external monitor

Soft power switch

DC power input

(9~29 VDC)

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-45

Installing the Smart Batteries (310-UPS option) systems are shipped with the hot-swappable batteries removed. you should install them, connect power, and charge up the batteries. Please follow these guidelines shown in the previous section,

Accessing the Batteries.

⇒ Never use any battery which appears to be damaged, or which is cracked, broken, hot to the touch, or unusual in any way. Lithium batteries can be dangerous if mistreated or improperly charged.

Please locate your DPs-2410 external power supply. This is included with the battery option.

♦ Connect the included AC power cord to the DPS-

2410, and then to a 120VAC power receptable.

♦

♦

Connect the included DC power cord to the DPS-

2410 and then to the D310’s DC power input jack.

Turn on the DPS-2410 power switch. A power

LED will confirm that that it is receiving AC power and operating properly.

⇒ Do not block the cooling fan of the DPs-2410! Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.

For faster recharging, do NOT power up the D310 mainframe, but make certain that the DPS-2410 is powered on and all power connections are made as shown below.

Using the smart batteries

The SideHAND2 “smart batteries” supplied with your

Dewetron battery powered system are equipped with an integrated circuit which stores information such as manufacturer, serial number, production date, etc., and monitors the current battery status in terms of discharge rate, predicted remaining capacity, temperature, voltage etc.

SideHAND2 “smart batteries” are capable of displaying their charge state even when not plugged into anything.

1) Connect the AC power plug to a valid

AC mains source

4) Connect the short DC cable between the 310-UPS output and the D310 DC power input.

2) Connect the other end of the AC cord to the DPS-2410

3) Connect the DC power cord between the DC output of the DPS-2410 and the input of the 301-UPS option

3-46 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Refer to the LCD display on the end of the Side-

HAND2 battery near the plastic pull tab.

Turning on the System with Batteries installed

Locate the power switch on the right side panel.

This is a momentary rocker type switch, where the white dot indicates the ON direction.

♦

♦

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

♦

♦

Green POWER LED: lit when the system is powered on

The removable HDD(s) have activity LEDS inside them, which indicate that the hard disk drive is being accessed.

You may notice that the main screen’s backlight will come on when power is applied. After a few moments the BIOS and Windows operating system messages and graphics will appear.

⇒ If the system does not power on, ensure that you have batteries with at least 30% charge, or that the

DPs-2410 is properly connected and TURNED ON.

HDD Usage

Using the removable hard disk drives

The right side of the D310 has a 2.5” removable drive bay. This bay has two separate hard drives inside it. The drive marked (1) is the C drive, and the drive marked (2) is the D drive.

⇒ NEVER REMOVE OR INsTALL HARD DRIVEs WHEN

THE sysTEM Is POWERED ON. Interfering with the

C drive in particular when the software is trying to access it can cause catastrophic system failures via corrupting the file system.

To remove either hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the button on either drive to eject it. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

Refer to the four segment LCD indicator on the end of the battery near the pull-tab. It will indicate the relative charge remaining in the battery in 25% steps.

The 2.5” drive carrier actually has TWO separate removable

HDDs inside! Drive 1 is the OS drive letter ‘C,’ while Drive 2 is the data drive letter ‘D.’

Using external optical read/write drives

Because the D310 does not include an optical drive, you are free to purchase one from any computer retailer, and connect it to your D310 via one of the

USB 2.0 ports.

The D310 is compatible with external optical drives which are Windows7 compatible.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-47

Basic Specifcations

Input specifications

Slots for DAQ or PAD modules

MDAQ-SUB positions

Main system

Total PCI slots

Hard disk

Data throughput to disk

Power supply

Battery power (option 310-UPS)

Display (option 310-DISP)

Processor

RAM

Ethernet

USB

RS232

Operating system

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Free PCI slots

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

Humdity

Vibration

Shock

Required to complete this model

Conditioners:

A/D card(s)

D310 with DAQ conditioners

8

N/A

D310 with MDAQ conditioners

--

2 (16 channels)

3 x half-length PCI slots

500 GB standard removable drive (optional solid state drive)

80 MB/s typical; faster rates available with the additional of an internal RAID controller and/or additional drives

9~29 VDC. Includes external AC/DC power adapter.

Adds a battery compartment with 4 SideHAND2 series hot-swappable batteries, and connecting cable.

15” XGA display, 1024 x 768 px, with resistive touchscreen

Intel Core2Duo 2.0 GHz CPU, on a standard industrial grade MiniITX mainboard

4 GB standard

3 x ethernet interfaces standard (1 Gb)

Four x USB 2.0 interfaces available

One serial interface on a DB9 connector available

Microsoft Windows7 32-bit included (upgrades to 64-bit will be available Summer 2013)

14W x 10.5D x 4.25H (inches) / 355 x 267 x 108 (mm)

8 kg typical (17.6 lbs)

2 (the standard ORION-1616-100 A/D card uses one of the three PCI slots)

-20 to 50C (0 to 45C with batteries installed) (storage temp -20 to 60C)

10 to 80% non-condensing, 5 to 95% relative humidity

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-27

Software

Any 8 DAQ series plugin modules Any two MDAQ-SUB modules

UP-ORION-16-22 kS/s/ch

The ORION-1616-100 is included as standard. You may upgrade this card as follows: upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add antialiasing filters (AAF), max. SR remains at 100

UP-ORION-16-24

UP-ORION-16-22-32

UP-ORION-100-1000

UP-ORION-100-200-8

8 channels

UP-ORION-100-1000-8 upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max. SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add AAF, increase from 16 to 32 analog channels upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max.SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch, decrease to upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch, decrease to 8 channels

DS-7-SE data acquisition software is included as standard*

32 analog channels, or multiple video cameras, or DEWE-CAM-FW-70, or DEWE-CLOCK use requires upgrade to

PROF edition.

64 analog channels requires upgrade to DSA edition.

LabVIEW VIs are available for Dewetron ORION series A/D cards and DAQ series signal conditioners.

Popular upgrades

Counter expansion (UP-ORION-CTR8)

Synchronization interface (UP-ORION-SYNC)

Upgrades the A/D card from 8 TTL digital I/Os and 2 TTL counter / encoders to:

8 synchronous TTL digital inputs protected up to 25 VDC

8 synchronous counter / encoder or 24 digital inputs with programmable threshold levels (0-40 V), input voltage range

-35 to 60 V, AC/DC coupling

Includes DB37 pin connectors installed

Installs the SYNC hardware input/output ports and LED indicators onto the mainframe. Allows systems with the same base ORION card to be synced. Additionally Requires DS-OPT-NET software option for synchronization under DS-7 software.

3-48 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Input specifications

Digital Isolation (ORION-BASE-DI-ISO)

HDD upgrade to solid state disks

D310 with DAQ conditioners D310 with MDAQ conditioners

Isolation for the 16 digital inputs of ORION base cards.

Input low: 0 - 2 V, Input high: 3 - 50 V bandwidth: DC up to 1MHz

Isolation voltage between channels: 150 VDC

Isolation voltage between Input and Output: 250 VDC

Connector: DSUB-37 connector (replaces standard digital I/O connector)

HDD-UP-SSD-120 Upgrade to 120 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-240 Upgrade to 240 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-480 Upgrade to 480 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 100 MB/s

Adds an internal IRIG or GPS time code interface (does not require a PCI slot) Time code interface

Popular interface add-ons

CAN expansion (UP-ORION-CAN2)

IRIG / GPS time code (DEWE-CLOCK-INT)

VIDEO-FG-4

ARINC-429 / 1553 interfaces

Adds 2 synchronous high speed CAN bus interfaces to the ORION card inside the system. Includes two DB9 factory installed connectors for these counters on the side panel of the D310, and rear panel of the DEWE-3040 and DEWE-

3050. Includes DS-OPT-CAN software option supporting CAN BUS interface.

IRIG or GPS synchronized clock source for DEWETRON systems, installed inside a new DEWETRON base unit

Input: IRIG signal code A or B, AM or DC, or GPS signal

Output: TTL clock from 10 Hz to 10 MHz, PPS and ORION-DSA-SYNC, IRIG-B DC (requires DS-PROF or higher)

Please order GPS antenna GPS-ANT-1 separately (if GPS is needed)

Adds a four channel VIDEO INPUT PCI card to the system. Four BNCs for analog NTSC video input on the right side panel, allowing four video streams to be recorded in sync with the data

Adds a multi-channel ARINC-429 or MIL-STD-1553 interface to the system. Available as a single PCI card with either or both interfaces on it, or as separate external USB interfaces. See the INTERFACES section for a comprehensive list.

External channel expansion

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series modules Add one or more EPAD2 series external signal conditioners to your system. Each one provides 8 thermocouple,

RTD, low voltage, or low current inputs. EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained up to 8 modules per system. CPAD2 modules are the same except with CAN BUS interface.

Additional Specifications

ORION-1616-100 analog input specifications

Number of analog channels

Bit-resolution

Maximum sample rate

8 channels

16-bit ADC converters (one per channel)

14.7 effective number of bits

100 kS/s/ch simultaneous

Input configuration

ADC type

Channel separation (cross-talk)

DC accuracy

Signal to noise

Interchannel gain mismatch

Interchannel phase mismatch

Single-ended (note that the DAQ, HSI, or MDAQ conditioners are in front of the

ORION card, and serve as the differential front-end for your signals.

Successive approximation (SAR)

> 90 dB @ fin 1 kHz

±0.02 % of reading ±0.013 % of range

89 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) 0 dBFS input < -86 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) -20 dBFS input < -93 dB

±0.015 %

0.02° * fin (kHz) + 0.08°

Digital and clock line specs

Digital input lines

Digital input characteristics

Digital output lines

Digital output characteristics

Clock divider output line

16

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level -0.7 V to 0.8 V

High voltage level 2 V to 5 V

Pull-up with 100 kΩ resistor

Input capacitance < 5pF

Input protection -1 V to 6 V

8

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level < 0.4 V @ 4 mA load

High voltage level > 3 V @ 4 mA load

Output current

Sink (low level) -20 mA Source (high level)

20 mA

Output impedance 50 Ω

1, same characteristics as digital output lines

OWNER’s GUIDE - D310 | 3-49

Standard Counter/Encoders

Standard counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Time base accuracy

Measurement modes

Standard counter/encoder signal levels

Overvoltage input protection

2 x 32-bit (LEMO connectors for each)

Note - used as pair counters when advanced features are used. If you need two or more full-featured counters, please order the

UP-ORION-CTR8

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

25 ppm

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

TTL/CMOS, pull-up with 100 kΩ

Input low level: -0.7 V to 0.8 V

Input high level: +2 to +5V

(DI 0 to DI 7): ±25 V continuous

(DI 8 to DI 15): -1 to 6 V

Advanced Counter/Encoders (UP-

ORION-CTR8 option)

Advanced counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Measurement modes

Signal levels

Trigger adjustment range

Trigger level accuracy

Common voltage range

Overvoltage input protection

Max. DC level @ AC coupling:

8 advanced 32-bit counters

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

Symmetrical, differential

AC/DC coupling selectable

0 to 40 VDC with 40 mV resolution

±100 mV ±1% of trigger level

-35 to 50V

±100 V continuous

±50 V continuous

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

High-speed CAN interfaces

Bus pin fault protection

ESD protection

Physical layer

Compatibility

2 CAN 2.0B high speed interfaces

±36 V

12kV

High speed

2.0B standard, J1939 protocol support

OBD II via software option

RPM-Measurement

Encoder

Tacho

Gearthooth, CDM

Gearthooth, TRG, CDM and TRG

Gearthooth with missing teeth

Gearthooth with double teeth

Length-measurement

Linear encoder

Linear pulse sensor

Event Counting

Basic counting

Gated counting

Up/down counting

Waveform Timing

Period frequency

Two pulse edge separation

Period, pulse width, frequency, duty cycle

3-50 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-51

4

D3PC-8 Model

The D3PC-8 is our most economical and portable data acquisition instrument. This model is preconfigured with an ORION-0824-200 card inside, which means that it has eight IEPE (ICP) analog inputs with very high dynamic range, perfect for accelerometers and microphones. Each channel can also be used as a voltage input up to ±10V.

This model is manufactured at the company’s facilities in the UsA.

This section will review the hardware characteristics and specifications of the D3PC-8 model, including its properties as a computer instrument, and all data acquisition components, including the A/D card, signal conditioners, and interfaces with which it is compatible.

Please refer to the SOFTWARE section of this manual to learn how to operate the turn-key data acquisition software installed on the system.

Please refer to the separate sections for the SIGNAL CONDITIONERS, A/D CARDS, INTERFACES and

SENSORS for complete details about those components that may be installed within your system.

Model D3PC-8

Standard Configuration

4-52 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Dimensions

267

(Left Side)

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

113

212

204

274

127

12 18

(Right Side)

Add 10 mm all around for BNC connectors, knobs, and other protrusions.

Allow plenty of room for cooling fans to function properly. Never block air exchange.

Top-level call-outs

D3PC-8, Left/Front Angle

EPAD LEMO

Power Switch

Filtered air intakes

USB 2.0 ports (2)

Chassis ground point

D3PC-8, Left/Rear Angle

Removable HDD

PCI card door

Computer subsectionand door

Spring loaded captive hardware (both doors)

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-53

Rubberized corner shock absorbers

Accessory / digital

I/O connector

2 Counter LEMOs

8 x ANALOG input

BNC connectors

Optional CAN BUS interfaces (DB9s)

Rubberized corner shock absorbers

12VDC power outlet LEMO

Automotive type fuse

Master power switch

9-29 VDC power input LEMO

4-54 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Signal conditioning

The D3PC is equipped with eight built-in analog inputs, with these signal input capabilities:

Selectable voltage / IEPE mode

Selectable constant current excitation (IEPE mode), 4 or 8 mA

Constant current excitation compliance up to 24 VDC

Differential or single-ended input mode (software selectable)

Voltage input mode with ranges ±10, ±2, ±0.5 or ±0.1 V

Selectable DC or AC coupling, high-pass 0.16 or 3.4 Hz

High-pass filter selectable between 0.16 or 3.4 Hz (when AC coupling is engaged)

30V over-voltage input protection

All channels can be set completely independently`

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

A/D card

The D3PC includes the ORION-0824-200 A/D card as standard. This card provides these digitization capabilities:

8 simultaneously sampled analog input channels

24-bit resolution, separate ADC per channels

Sigma-delta ADC converter for each channel

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum sample rate (all channels simultaneously)

Powerful anti-aliasing filtering is standard and automatically adjusts to the selected sample rate

Crosstalk 114 dB

2 synchronous counter/encoder inputs

8 each digital input and output lines

The A/D card can be upgraded to have several options installed on it, including

„

„

UP-ORION-CAN2 Adds two high-speed synchronous CAN BUS interfaces to the system, including mounting the connectors on the front panel, and installing the DS-OPT-CAN software support for CAN

UP-ORION-CTR8 Adds 8 additional counters, which have adjustable threshold levels, and higher input voltage capabilities. In addition, each counter can handle any measurement type without needing a second counter in a “pair.” Thus, 8 separate quadrature encoders could be input. Due to space limitations on the D3PC chassis, it is recommended to also purchase the external break-out box when the counter expansion is ordered.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-55

Interface(s)

The D3PC is compatible with USB connected interfaces, including ARINC 419 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces, and more. There is a wide assortment of interfaces available for your DEWE system.

MIL-STD-1553, interface, USB format ARINC 429, interface, USB format

Video Cameras

The D3PC is compatible with several kinds of video cameras, including:

DEWE-CAM-USB

USB camera

DEWE-CAM-FW

Hard sync Firewire camera

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E

Gigabit ethernet camera

USB cameras are the most convenient and least expensive. But they also provide the lowest performance, and place the highest load on the CPU, therefore we recommend only one be used.

The DEWE-CAM-FW can be used to a limited extent in the D3PC because a dedicated Firewire interface cannot be installed for it. For best results we recommend the D310, or any other DEWE platform that has a

PCI slot available to install a dedicated separate Firewire interface card.

The DEWE-CAM-GIG-E will work fine with the D3PC. Gigabit ethernet cameras place a load on the computer CPU similar to USB cameras, so we recommend not over-taxing the system.

4-56 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connecting EPAD2 modules to your D3PC-8

The D3PC-8 accepts optional EPAD2 series external PAD modules for adding many channels of slower temperature signals, voltage, current, and RTD inputs. Simply connect the first EPAD2 module to the standard EPAD connector. Further EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained from one to the next. The last EPAD2 module must have the terminator installed in the open connector (even if there is only one EPAD2 module the terminator must be installed). Up to 16 EPADs in any combination can be connected.

EPAD-TERM-L terminator at the last module in the chain

EPAD2 cable xPAD-CBL-LL-??

(where ?? is the length in meters)

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-57

Connecting a Standard VGA/XGA Monitor to your D3PC-8

The D3PC-8 accepts any standard computer monitor that can be plugged into the standard VGA connector on the rear of the system. Open the computer door by turning the captive spring-loaded thumbscrew hardware counter-clockwise, until the door opens.

The VGA connector is the ‘D’ connector with three rows of pin holes. This connector is normally located in the bottom left corner of the computer area.

Connect your monitor and turn on the D3PC-8. The Windows operating system should recognize that a monitor has been connected and utilize it. After the system is booted up into Windows you can use the standard commands to configure the monitor the way that you prefer. We recommend setting the resolution to

1024 x 768 pixels for best performance within the software. However, you can also set it higher, for example, to 1280 x 1024 pixels. This should also provide excellent performance.

D3PC with a standard computer monitor connected to it. Use a standard VGA cable to make the connection. The monitor must be powered separately from VAC mains.

4-58 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connecting the MOB-DISP-17 to your D3PC-8

The D3PC-8 has been made specifically to support the MOB-DISP-17 (Mobile Display, 17 inches) from

DEWETRON. This is a ruggedized mobile display that is designed to be installed inside vehicles. It has suction cup mounting positions, as well as VESA 75 mounting holes for this purpose. The MOB-DISP-17 accepts a standard VGA or DVI interface, therefore it can be connected directly to the VGA output of the

D3PC. In addition, the MOB-DISP-17 can be POWERED by the 12VDC output on the rear panel of the

D3PC.

Finally, a USB 2.0 cable should be connected between the D3PC and the MOB-DISP-17, to enable the display’s TOUCHSCREEN capabilities, and to activate the USB 2.0 convenience jacks that are located on the mobile display.

The MOB-DISP-17 is the perfect addition to your DEWETRON system, especially when it will be used in a mobile or challenging physical environment. For complete technical details about the MOB-DISP-17, please refer to the section of this document, “MOB-DISP-17 Mobile Display” on page 10-266.

Red - 12 VDC power cable

Blue - USB 2.0 cable (A/B)

Green - VGA cable

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-59

Using the New iPAD as a Wireless Display with your D3PC-8

The D3PC-8 can also be controlled wirelessly using the new iPad from Apple computer, because it has sufficient resolution to be used as a wireless display. Other tablet devices can also be used, of course. The more resolution the device has, the more convenient and comfortable it will be to operate the software.

See Section “19 Using the iPad as a Wireless Display” on page 20-473 of this document to learn how the new iPad is installed and operated. But it is worth pointing out that a WIFI interface must be installed on the

D3PC. If one was not factory installed, then you can add one in the form of a USB WIFI interface, which can be installed any time.

4-60 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Connectors

Ground (earth) Connector

Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe

Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe

Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC power input.

DC Power Input

KEY PIN: (+)

LOW PIN: (–)

LEMO connector

EGJ-2B-302-CLA

DC power input

Connector: LEMO power connector, as shown in the picture above. The connector is this LEMO model:

EGJ-2B-302-CLA. The appropriate mating connector is LEMO FGJ.302.CLLD-XX (where XX is the cable size).

The mating cable called 310-CBL-DC is provided to connect the D310 to the included external AC/DC power supply. This cable is 2 meters long. It has FGJ.302.CLLD-XX on the side that plugs into the D310, and

FGG.2B.302-CLAD-XX on the side that plugs into the external AD/DC power supply. Note: some external power supplies have a built-in DC output cable, and there is no separate cable needed.

Permissable power inputs are 9-29 VDC.

⇒ Important note - power input must not exceed 29 VDC! system damage may occur.

Fuse

The system DC power is fused using a REGULAR ATO 15A fast-acting blade fuse. Blue is the

ATO standard color code for a15 amperes fuse rating. ISO 8820-3:2002 standard.

⇒ Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even death can result.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-61

Computer Connectors

The door on the right side of the chassis opens to allow access to a collection of computer interface connections, as follows:

RS232C interface

(com1)

PS/2 mouse (green) IEEE-1394 firewire Ethernet ports (3)

V/XGA video output PS/2 keyboard (violet) USB 2.0 ports (4) Audio stack

(see description for color codes)

4-62 | OWNER’s GUIDE

RS232C interface connector (com1)

Connector: 9-pin DSUB (male)

Mating connector: 9-pin DSUB (female)

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the RS232C serial interface.

The typical interpretation of the signals in the COM ports is as follows:

The connector pin-out is defined here:

PS/2 mouse (green) and PS/2 keyboard (violet)

Connectors: Standard PS/2 green (mouse) and violet (keyboard)

Mating connectors: Standard PS/2 keyboard and mouse plugs or USB-PS/2 adapters

Function: Attachment of a keyboard or PS/2 mouse adapter via the stacked PS/2 mouse and keyboard connector (MSE & KBD).

Description: Both interfaces utilize open-drain signaling with on-board pull-up. The PS/2 mouse and keyboard is supplied from 5V_STB when in standby mode in order to enable keyboard or mouse activity to bring the system out from power saving states. The supply is provided through a 1.1A resetable fuse.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-63

Above left: Stacked PS/2 connector pinning and call-outs

Above right: view of a typical PS/2 connector, showing the pin numbering schema.

Note: Ps/2 devices should be connected before the system is powered on. Ps/2 mice in particular will typically not be recognized by Windows if connected after Windows has loaded.

IEEE-1394 Firewire interface

Connector: Standard 6-pin full size IEEE-1394b female connector

Mating connector: Standard 6-pin IEEE-1394b male plug

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the IEEE-1394 firewire interface.

Description: This port is an IEEE Std 1394a-2000 fully compliant cable port which provides interfacing at

100M bits/s, 200M bits/s, and 400M bits/s.

Note: The DEWE-CAM-FW high speed video camera from Dewetron connects via firewire. However, it is highly recommended to add a dedicated firewire card to your system to get the best performance from the DEWE-

CAM-FW sensor. The full speed may not be achievable using the on-board interface shown above.

4-64 |

Ethernet interfaces (3)

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals (printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: Three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers. In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and

Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the DEWE system.

CRT/VGA video output

Connector: three-row 15-pin DE-15 (female) connector

Mating connector: 15-pin DE-15 video (male) plug

Function: For connecting a display to the system.

Description: There are has two basic types of interfaces to a display: Analog CRT interface and a digital interface typically used with flat panels. The digital interface to flat panels is connected internally to the built-in flatpanel display. The CRT interface is available externally to the user.

⇒ Note: The 5V supply in the CRT connector is fused by a 1.1A resetable fuse.

-

Left: typical mating cable for connecting an external VGA/XGA monitor

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system. This is possible to do, using a PCI video card (PCIe slots are not available in this model).

Note: D310’s 15” display has a max resolution of 1024x768; the CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

4-66 |

USB 2.0 interfaces (4)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface. (USB 1.1 devices may work, but will be limited in speed.)

Description: The mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are four user-accessible Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all four USB ports is supported.

USB ports 0 and 2 are supplied on the combined ETHER1, USB0, USB2 connector. USB ports 4 and 5 are supplied on the combined IEEE1394_0, USB4, USB5 connector.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

Note: UsB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XsENs MTI series of sensors.

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-67

Audio stack connectors (6)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

4-68 | OWNER’s GUIDE

⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the DEWE system.

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (8 or 16)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211.

Above: typical D3PC with BNC input connectors for the ANALOG INPUTS

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-69

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

CAN BUS interface connector (installed when you order CAN BUS option)

Connectors: DSUB 9 connectors (option UP-ORION-CAN2)

Mating connector: DSUB 9

Mating cable: Standard CAN cable

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

The typical DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

4-70 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Digital I/O connector (AKA “Accessory connector”)

Connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Mating connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Function: Provides access to the digital input/output lines on the installed A/D card, as well as additional signals such as clock input, trigger input, and more (see A/D card table related to the installed card).

The exact pin-out of this connector can vary according to the system configuration, but here is the typical pin-out diagram when an ORION-0824-200 card is installed:

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-71

Synchronizing Multiple D3PC-8 Systems

Using Direct SYNC or External Time Sources (NETWORK Configuration)

In this approach, multiple DEWE systems are synchronized using either IRIG or GPS time code.

Each still records their own data, but the data files are perfectly synchronized for analysis in third party software (such as Flexpro or Matlab). In addition, because the software option DS-OPT-NET is installed on each acquistion unit, a master controller can view channels from ALL of the connected measuring units in real time.

In the NETWORK configuration, each instrument must have the hardware option UP-ORION-SYNC and the software option DS-OPT-NET. Synchronization of all units is required, via either

(1) a simple SYNC cable connection, for distances up to 200 m, or

(2) DEWE-CLOCK (internal or external), for long distances when a SYNC cable connection is not possible.

The DS-OPT-NET software offers full remote setup, online data transfer up to the limit of the network connection and offline data transfer between the instruments.

User tip: The NET expansion allows multiple usages of the PC power and fast storing capability. Multiple decentralized hard disks offer almost no limit for fast data storing.

D3PC

D3PC

SYNC

ETHERN

ET

Above - direct SYNC of two or more DEWE systems using the ORION-SYNC option installed onto the chassis, and DS-OPT-NET software.

One measuring unit can be set as the master controller of both, or you can use a separate Windows computer as a master client to remotely control all synchronized units. The master controller is connected via ethernet to each measuring unit (typically a dedicated ethernet switch is used).

Right - when the systems are too far apart for the

ORION-SYNC to be connected, the DEWE-CLOCK is used to sync the units via either IRIG or GPS time code signals.

The rest of the system is the same, as described above.

D3PC

0.000 ms

D3PC

GPS-CLOCK

SYNC

DEWE-CLOCK

SYNC

ETHERN

ET

4-72 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

DC powered systems (STANDARD)

The standard D3PC runs from wide-ranging DC power: 9-29 VDC. An AC/DC adapter is included with your system.

To run the system from AC, connect the AC power cord to AC mains and to the AC/DC adapter. Connect the DC output cable that has a round LEMO connector on it to the DC power input on the rear panel of the D3PC.

Connect a display

Please connect a standard VGA or XGA monitor to the VGA connector on the rear of the system, behind the computer protection door.

Turning on the System

Ensure that the master power switch on the REAR panel is in the ON position, then press and quickly release the soft power switch on the FRONT of the

D3PC, and the system will boot up.

♦

♦

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

Front Panel LED indicators

♦

♦

Green POWER LED: Indicates that power is on, when lit

Red HDD LED: indicates hard disk activity, when lit / flashing

The D3PC MASTER power switch is located on the REAR panel, directly above the 9-29 VDC power input connector.

The D3PC SOFT power switch is located on the FRONT panel. Adjacent are LEDs for system power (green) and HDD activity (red).

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-73

Hardware Protocols

Using the removable hard disk drive

The rear panel of the D3PC has a 2.5” removable drive bay. This single bay has at least one hard drives inside it. Some systems are configured with two separate drives inside this single carrier (a C drive for Windows and applications, and a D drive for data.)

⇒ If this is the only hard drive in the system, do NOT remove it when the system is powered on! This will cause Windows to crash very badly. If you have an internal hard drive which has the Windows operating system, then removing the external drive is permitted when power is on, because you are not writing to it at that time.

To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

The removable HDD is located on the rear panel. Two keys are provided with your system, so that you may remove the

HDD and replace it with a different one.

Using external optical read/write drives

Because the D3PC does not include an optical drive, you are free to purchase one from any computer retailer, and connect it to your D3PC via one of the

USB 2.0 ports.

The D3PC is compatible with external optical drives which are Windows7 compatible.

4-74 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Basic Specifcations

Input specifications

Analog inputs

Optional slow analog input channels (EPAD2)

Digital I/O lines and Counters

Number of analog channels

Bit-resolution

Maximum sample rate

Input configuration

ADC type

Input ranges

Voltage mode coupling

IEPE mode and coupling

Over-voltage protection

Bandwidth

Signal to noise ratio

Crosstalk

Analog input connectors

D3PC-8 model

8 IEPE / Voltage input channels

Up to 128 channels (16 EPAD2 series modules, each with 8 channels)

8 x DIO, 2 counters

8 channels

24-bit ADC converters (one per channel)

204.8 kS/s/ch simultaneous

Differential or single-ended (software selectable)

Sigma-delta

±10, ±2, ±0.5 or ±0.1 V

DC or AC, high-pass 0.16 or 3.4 Hz

4 or 8 mA, high-pass 0.16 or 3.4 Hz

±30 V

Sample rates up to 102.4 kS/s: 49 kHz -3dB

Sample rates up to 204.8 kS/s: 76 kHz -3dB

1 kS/s ≤ fS ≤ 51.2 kS/s: 108 dB

51.2 kS/s < fS ≤ 102.4 kS/s: 105 dB

102.4 kS/s < fS ≤ 204.8 kS/s: 80 dB

114 dB

Insulated BNC (female) (8)

Main system

Total PCI slots

Hard disk

Data throughput to disk

Power supply

Processor

RAM

Ethernet

USB

RS232

Operating system

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

Humdity

Vibration

Shock

Software

LabVIEW drivers

Popular upgrades

Counter expansion (UP-ORION-CTR8)

1 half length PCI slot, occupied by the ORION-0824-200 card (standard)

500 GB standard removable drive (optional solid state drive)

80 MB/s typical; faster rates available by changing to SSD drives

9~29 VDC. Includes external AC/DC power adapter.

Intel Core2Duo 2.0 GHz CPU, on a standard industrial grade MiniITX mainboard

4 GB standard

3 x ethernet interfaces standard (1 Gb)

Four x USB 2.0 interfaces available

One serial interface on a DB9 connector available

Microsoft Windows7 32-bit included (upgrades to 64-bit will be available Summer 2013)

8W x 10.5D x 4.25H (inches) / 203 x 267 x 108 (mm)

3 kg typical (7 lbs)

-20 to 50C (0 to 45C with batteries installed) (storage temp -20 to 60C)

10 to 80% non-condensing, 5 to 95% relative humidity

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-27

DS-7-SE data acquisition software is included as standard*

Multiple video cameras, or DEWE-CAM-FW-70, or DEWE-CLOCK use requires upgrade to PROF edition.

LabVIEW VIs are available for Dewetron ORION series A/D cards and DAQ series signal conditioners.

Upgrades the A/D card from 8 TTL digital I/Os and 2 TTL counter / encoders to:

8 synchronous TTL digital inputs protected up to 25 VDC

8 synchronous counter / encoder or 24 digital inputs with programmable threshold levels (0-40 V), input voltage range

-35 to 60 V, AC/DC coupling

Includes DB37 pin connectors installed

OWNER’s GUIDE - D3PC-8 | 4-75

Input specifications

Synchronization interface (UP-ORION-SYNC)

Digital Isolation (ORION-BASE-DI-ISO)

HDD upgrade to solid state disks

Time code interface

D3PC-8 model

Installs the SYNC hardware input/output ports and LED indicators onto the mainframe. Allows systems with the same base ORION card to be synced. Additionally Requires DS-OPT-NET software option for synchronization under DS-7 software.

Isolation for the 16 digital inputs of ORION base cards.

Input low: 0 - 2 V, Input high: 3 - 50 V bandwidth: DC up to 1MHz

Isolation voltage between channels: 150 VDC

Isolation voltage between Input and Output: 250 VDC

Connector: DSUB-37 connector (replaces standard digital I/O connector)

HDD-UP-SSD-120 Upgrade to 120 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-240 Upgrade to 240 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-480 Upgrade to 480 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), no moving parts, max. data throughput 100 MB/s

DEWE-CLOCK (internal or external) Adds an internal IRIG or GPS time code interface (does not require a PCI slot)

Popular interface add-ons

CAN expansion (UP-ORION-CAN2)

IRIG / GPS time code (DEWE-CLOCK-INT)

VIDEO-FG-4

ARINC-429 / 1553 interfaces

Adds 2 synchronous high speed CAN bus interfaces to the ORION card inside the system. Includes two DB9 factory installed connectors for these counters on the side panel of the D310, and rear panel of the DEWE-3040 and DEWE-

3050. Includes DS-OPT-CAN software option supporting CAN BUS interface.

IRIG or GPS synchronized clock source for DEWETRON systems, installed inside a new DEWETRON base unit

Input: IRIG signal code A or B, AM or DC, or GPS signal

Output: TTL clock from 10 Hz to 10 MHz, PPS and ORION-DSA-SYNC, IRIG-B DC (requires DS-PROF or higher)

Please order GPS antenna GPS-ANT-1 separately (if GPS is needed)

Adds a four channel VIDEO INPUT PCI card to the system. Four BNCs for analog NTSC video input on the right side panel, allowing four video streams to be recorded in sync with the data

Adds a multi-channel ARINC-429 or MIL-STD-1553 interface to the system. Available as a single PCI card with either or both interfaces on it, or as separate external USB interfaces. See the INTERFACES section for a comprehensive list.

External channel expansion

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series modules Add one or more EPAD2 series external signal conditioners to your system. Each one provides 8 thermocouple,

RTD, low voltage, or low current inputs. EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained up to 8 modules per system. CPAD2 modules are the same except with CAN BUS interface.

Digital and clock line specs

Digital input lines

Digital input characteristics

Digital output lines

Digital output characteristics

Clock divider output line

8

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level -0.7 V to 0.8 V

High voltage level 2 V to 5 V

Pull-up with 100 kΩ resistor

Input capacitance < 5pF

Input protection -1 V to 6 V

8

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level < 0.4 V @ 4 mA load

High voltage level > 3 V @ 4 mA load

Output current

Sink (low level) -20 mA Source (high level)

20 mA

Output impedance 50 Ω

1, same characteristics as digital output lines

Standard Counter/Encoders

Standard counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Time base accuracy

Measurement modes

Standard counter/encoder signal levels

Overvoltage input protection

2 x 32-bit (LEMO connectors for each)

Note - used as pair counters when advanced features are used. If you need two or more full-featured counters, please order the

UP-ORION-CTR8

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

25 ppm

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

TTL/CMOS, pull-up with 100 kΩ

Input low level: -0.7 V to 0.8 V

Input high level: +2 to +5V

(DI 0 to DI 7): ±25 V continuous

(DI 8 to DI 15): -1 to 6 V

4-76 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Advanced Counter/Encoders (UP-

ORION-CTR8 option)

Advanced counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Measurement modes

Signal levels

Trigger adjustment range

Trigger level accuracy

Common voltage range

Overvoltage input protection

Max. DC level @ AC coupling:

8 advanced 32-bit counters

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

Symmetrical, differential

AC/DC coupling selectable

0 to 40 VDC with 40 mV resolution

±100 mV ±1% of trigger level

-35 to 50V

±100 V continuous

±50 V continuous

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

High-speed CAN interfaces

Bus pin fault protection

ESD protection

Physical layer

Compatibility

2 CAN 2.0B high speed interfaces

±36 V

12kV

High speed

2.0B standard, J1939 protocol support

OBD II via software option

RPM-Measurement

Encoder

Tacho

Gearthooth, CDM

Gearthooth, TRG, CDM and TRG

Gearthooth with missing teeth

Gearthooth with double teeth

Length-measurement

Linear encoder

Linear pulse sensor

Event Counting

Basic counting

Gated counting

Up/down counting

Waveform Timing

Period frequency

Two pulse edge separation

Period, pulse width, frequency, duty cycle

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-77

5

DEWE-3210 series

The DEWE-3210 is a powerful and portable “all in one” data acquisition instrument. It features a flipup screen that resembles a notebook computer’s.

And like a notebook computer, it has lithium ion batteries that keep the system running for hours when external power is not available.

This model is designed and manufactured at the company’s facilities in the UsA. This is where the sideHAND battery power system was invented, hence why this model is made at that factory.

This section will review the hardware characteristics and specifications of the DEWE-3210 series, including its properties as a computer instrument, and all data acquisition components, including the A/D cards, signal conditioners, and interfaces with which it is compatible.

Please refer to the SOFTWARE section of this manual to learn how to operate the turn-key data acquisition software installed on the system.

Please refer to the separate sections for the SIGNAL CONDITIONERS, A/D CARDS, INTERFACES and

SENSORS for complete details about those components that may be installed within your DEWE-3210.

Model DEWE-3210

Rear view, screen closed

5-78 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Dimensions

350

6

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

334 340

408

164

6

8

420

Add 10 mm all around for BNC connectors, knobs, and other protrusions.

Allow room for the display to be opened - approximately 350mm H.

Allow plenty of room for cooling fans to function properly. Never block air exchange.

Top-level call-outs

DEWE-321x, head on view, with the screen open

17” XGA display and resistive TOUCHSCREEN

Left speaker grille

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-79

Right speaker grille

Power and

STORE/STOP buttons

QWERTY keyboard

Screen release buttons (slide inward to release)

Rubber corners on all sides

Touchpad and mouse buttons

Screen release buttons (slide inward to release)

Filtered air intakes

(2 fans)

Carrying handle

POWER switch and LED

HDD busy LED

Battery status LCD

Storing indicator LED

STORE / STOP buttons *

QWERTY keyboard * STORE/STOP buttons may not be

present in all models

5-80 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Signal conditioning

The DEWE-3210 can be equipped with either:

„

„

8 x DAQ / PAD / HSI series plug-in signal conditioners, or

2 x 8-channel MDAQ-SUB conditioners (16 channels total)

It is not possible to install both DAQ/PAD/HSI slots and MDAQ conditioners into the body of the DEWE-

3210. However, mixed systems can be created by connecting external conditioners of any kind to the system. Therefore it is common that the DEWE-3210 is configured with 8 internal DAQ modules, plus connected to 16 ot more external MDAQ conditioners. Or the other way around, with 16 built-in MDAQ conditioners, and 16 or more DAQ/PAD/HSI modules connected externally. There are many possibilities.

Model DEWE-3210 with 8 DAQ modules

Left side, screen open

Model DEWE-3211 with 16 MDAQ channels

Left side, screen open

„

„

„

„

„

A/D card(s)

The DEWE-3210 has three half length PCI slots inside. As a standard, the ORION-1616-100 A/D card is installed when you buy the DEWE-3210 data acquisition system. This card provides the following basic specifications (further details are shown in the specification tables in the next pages):

16 simultaneously sampled analog input channels

16-bit resolution, separate ADC per channels

100 kS/s/ch maximum sample rate

2 synchronous counter/encoder inputs

8 each digital input and output lines

At the time of ordering, this card can be upgraded, using any of the options available for increasing the channel count, the bit resolution to 22 or 24-bit, or increasing the sample rate up to 1 MS/s/ch, and many combinations of the preceding. See the UP-ORION options for all of the possibilities.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-81

In addition, many options can be factory installed onto the ORION cards, including adding two high speed

CAN BUS interfaces, or expanding the number and capabilities of the digital counters that are installed.

Interface(s)

The DEWE-3210 is compatible with ORION, PCI card, and USB connected interfaces These include the

CAN BUS interfaces added to the ORION A/D card, as well as separate PCI cards available for adding multiple ARINC 429, MIL-STD-1553 interfaces to the system. If all three PCI slots were used up, ARINC and

MIL-STD-1553 interfaces can also be added as USB devices. There are numerous interfaces available for your DEWE system.

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

PCI format

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

USB format

Video Cameras

The DEWE-3210 is compatible with several kinds of video cameras, including:

DEWE-CAM-USB

USB camera

DEWE-CAM-FW

Hard sync Firewire camera

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E

Gigabit ethernet camera

5-82 | OWNER’s GUIDE

2 U

Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model

The DEWE-3211 has a 2U height space on its left side panel, which can accept either a 2U high MDAQ panel, such as either the DSUB connector panel or half BNC/half DSUB9 panel ... or a 1.5U panel plus any of the 0.5U accessory panels, as shown below:

MDAQ panels Accessory panels

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-4

0.5 U

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-8

0.5 U

Power supply for PNA-A100 current clamps

0.5U-AOUT-BNC-2

0.5 U

1U-AOUT-BNC-4

2 U

1.5 U

MDAQ panel with BNC connectors is only 1.5U, leaving 0.5U above for any accessory panel

2 U

Note - if your system is ordered with any 1.5U MDAQ panel (MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC or MDAQ-SUB-ACC-

BNC are perfect examples), and you do not order a 0.5U accessory panel, we will install a blank panel in the

0.5U space.

Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model

The DEWE-3210 has a fixed configuration: there is a RACK-8 built into the side panel, so all you need to do is choose any any of our DAQ, PAD, or HSI series plug-in modules to fill the slots.

Both models accept optional EPAD2 series external PAD modules for adding many channels of slower temperature signals, voltage, current, and RTD inputs.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-83

System Connectors

System/PC connectors

Ground (earth) Connector

Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe

Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe

Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC power input.

DC Power Input

KEY PIN: (+)

LOW PIN: (–)

LEMO connector

EGJ-2B-302-CLA

DC power input

Connector: LEMO power connector, as shown in the picture above. The connector is this LEMO model:

EGJ-2B-302-CLA. The appropriate mating connector is LEMO FGJ.302.CLLD-XX (where XX is the cable size).

The mating cable called CBL-DPS-2410 is provided to connect the DEWE-3210 to the DPS-2410 power supply. This cable is 2 meters long. It has FGJ.302.CLLD-XX on the side that plugs into the DEWE-3210, and FGG.2B.302-CLAD-XX on the side that plugs into the DPS-2410 AD/DC power supply.

Permissable power inputs are 18-24VDC.

⇒ Important note - power input must not exceed 24VDC! system damage will occur.

Fuse

The system DC power is fused using a REGULAR ATO 15A fast-acting blade fuse. Blue is the ATO standard color code for a15 amperes fuse rating. ISO 8820-3:2002 standard.

⇒ Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even death can result.

5-84 | OWNER’s GUIDE

RS232C interface

(com1)

PS/2 mouse (green) IEEE-1394 firewire Ethernet ports (3)

XGA video output PS/2 keyboard (violet) USB 2.0 ports (4) Audio stack

(see description for color codes)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-85

Computer Connectors

The door on the right side of the chassis opens to allow access to a collection of computer interface connections, as follows:

RS232C interface connector (com1)

Connector: 9-pin DSUB (male)

Mating connector: 9-pin DSUB (female)

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the RS232C serial interface.

The typical interpretation of the signals in the COM ports is as follows:

The connector pin-out is defined here:

PS/2 mouse (green) and PS/2 keyboard (violet)

Connectors: Standard PS/2 green (mouse) and violet (keyboard)

Mating connectors: Standard PS/2 keyboard and mouse plugs or USB-PS/2 adapters

Function: Attachment of a keyboard or PS/2 mouse adapter via the stacked PS/2 mouse and keyboard connector (MSE & KBD).

Description: Both interfaces utilize open-drain signaling with on-board pull-up. The PS/2 mouse and keyboard is supplied from 5V_STB when in standby mode in order to enable keyboard or mouse activity to bring the system out from power saving states. The supply is provided through a 1.1A resetable fuse.

5-86 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Above left: Stacked PS/2 connector pinning and call-outs

Above right: view of a typical PS/2 connector, showing the pin numbering schema

Note: Ps/2 devices should be connected before the system is powered on. Ps/2 mice in particular will typically not be recognized by Windows if connected after Windows has loaded.

IEEE-1394 Firewire interface

Connector: Standard 6-pin full size IEEE-1394b female connector

Mating connector: Standard 6-pin IEEE-1394b male plug

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the IEEE-1394 firewire interface.

Description: This port is an IEEE Std 1394a-2000 fully compliant cable port which provides interfacing at

100M bits/s, 200M bits/s, and 400M bits/s.

Note: The DEWE-CAM-01 high speed video camera from Dewetron connects via firewire. However, it is highly recommended to add a dedicated firewire card to your system to get the best performance from the DEWE-

CAM-01 sensor. The full speed may not be achievable using the on-board interface shown above.

Ethernet interfaces (3)

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals (printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: The DEWE-321x provides three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers. In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the DEWE-321x.

CRT/VGA video output

5-88 |

Connector: three-row 15-pin DE-15 (female) connector

Mating connector: 15-pin DE-15 video (male) plug

Function: For connecting an additional display to the DEWE-321x, which will show an exact duplicate of the built-in display.

Description: The DEWE-321x has two basic types of interfaces to a display: Analog CRT interface and a digital interface typically used with flat panels. The digital interface to flat panels is connected internally to the built-in flatpanel display. The CRT interface is available externally to the user.

⇒ Note: The 5V supply in the CRT connector is fused by a 1.1A resetable fuse.

-

Left: typical mating cable for connecting an external VGA/XGA monitor

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system.

Note: DEWE-321x’s with 15” displays (made in 2010) have a max resolution of 1024x768; DEWE-321x (made in

2011 or later) with 17” displays have a max resolution of 1280x1024 . The CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

USB 2.0 interfaces (4)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface.

Description: The DEWE-321x’s mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are four user-accessible Universal

Host Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all four USB ports is supported.

USB ports 0 and 2 are supplied on the combined ETHER1, USB0, USB2 connector. USB ports 4 and 5 are supplied on the combined IEEE1394_0, USB4, USB5 connector.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

Note: UsB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XsENs MTI series of sensors.

Audio stack connectors (6)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

5-90 | OWNER’s GUIDE

⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the DEWE-321x

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-91

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (8 or 16)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211.

Above: typical DEWE-3210 showing 8 DAQ modules plugged in

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

5-92 | OWNER’s GUIDE

CAN BUS interface connector (installed when you order CAN BUS option)

Connectors: LEMO EGG.1B.306.CLL

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.306.CLL

Mating cable: CAN-CBL-Y

PIN Function Comment

3

4

1

2

5

6

CAN0 Lo

CAN0 Hi

D GND

CAN1 Lo

CAN1 Hi

GND

First CAN port

First CAN port

Second CAN port

Second CAN port

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

When the CAN option is installed, this single LEMO connector will contain two CAN BUS interfaces. The

CAN-CBL-Y mating cable is optionally available to split the single LEMO connector to two standard CAN

DB-9 (female) connectors. Both DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-93

ANALOG INPUT connector

Connector: LEMO 19-pin LEMO EGG.2B.319.CLL, marked ANALOG INPUT

Mating cable: 3210-EXP8-L

Function: The DEWE-3210 can be configured with a 16 channel A/D card inside. The first eight channels are wired to the DAQ modules on the left side panel. Therefore, the other eight channels are brought to this

ANALOG INPUT connector on the left side panel, whereby you may connect an expansion rack such as the

DEWE-30-8, in order to address these eight channels.

Pin

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

Signal

AI 8+

AI 9+

AI 10+

AI 11+

AI 12+

AI 13+

AI 14+

AI 15+

N.C.

N.C.

Pin

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Signal

AI 8 GND

AI 9 GND

AI 10 GND

AI 11 GND

AI 12 GND

AI 13 GND

AI 14 GND

AI 15 GND

N.C.

The DEWE-30-8 expansion rack needs two connections to the DEWE-3210 mainframe:

1. The analog connection as shown above via the 3210-EXP8-L cable as shown above, and

2. POWER and MODULE CONTROL are carried to the DEWE-30-8 expansion rack via the EPAD connector. Therefore, the additional modules in the expansion rack will be controllable within the software just as if the inputs were physically installed within the DEWE-3210 mainframe.

DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional)

5-94 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DC Power & control cable

3210-EXP8-L analog cable

The 3210-EXP8-L cable connects the DEWE-30-8-EXP expansion rack to the DEWE-3210 model. It provides signal connection. Power and RS485 module control are via a separate cable.

This expansion/connector does not apply to the DEWE-3211 model, which already has 16 MDAQ channels on its left side panel

Digital I/O connector (AKA “Accessory connector”)

Connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Mating connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Function: Provides access to the digital input/output lines on the installed A/D card, as well as additional signals such as clock input, trigger input, and more (see A/D card table related to the installed card).

The exact pin-out of this connector can vary according to the system configuration, but here is the typical pin-out diagram when an ORION-1616-100 card is installed:

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-95

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

Installing the Smart Batteries systems are shipped with the hot-swappable batteries removed. you should install them, connect power, and charge up the batteries. Please follow these guidelines:

♦ Open the battery door on side of DEWE-321x and insert one battery into the top slot, and the other into the bottom slot. Leave the center slot open unless you have a third battery!

♦ When inserting the first battery you may notice that the system LEDs and fans will turn on for a second, this is normal when the battery module

“wakes up.”

⇒ Never use any battery which appears to be damaged, or which is cracked, broken, hot to the touch, or unusual in any way. Lithium batteries can be dangerous if mistreated or improperly charged.

Please locate the BATTERy sTATUs LCD, located on the panel just above the keyboard.

♦ With batteries in place, the LCD screen will display the charge level, charge/discharge state, power consumption and total current.

♦ The LCD (and battery module circuit) will always be ON, unless the batteries are removed

Please locate your DPs-2410 external power supply. This is included with each DEWE-321x system.

♦ Connect the included AC power cord to the DPS-

2410, and then to a 120VAC power receptable.

♦

♦

Connect the included DC power cord to the DPS-

2410 and then to the DEWE-3031’s DC power input jack.

Turn on the DPS-2410 power switch. A power

LED will confirm that that it is receiving AC power and operating properly.

The battery door on the side of the DEWE-321x is hinged, allowing you to access the battery compartment. Batteries can be removed by pulling on their flexible tabs.

The battery status LCD keeps you informed of how many batteries are installed (2 above), the charge level (100% above), and whether the system is charging or discharging.

The DPS-2410 AC/DC converter/power supply is fused with an automotive type power fuse. Please replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

5-96 | OWNER’s GUIDE

⇒ Do not block the cooling fan of the DPs-2410! Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.

NOTE: The DEWE-321x can be operated without batteries simply by connecting the DPs-2410.

This can also help you refresh batteries which have become 100% discharged, which can happen over time. If the mainframe will not start up, simply remove all of your batteries, then power up the system using the DPs-2410. When the system is up and running, insert only one battery into the top slot.

Wait 30 minutes and then insert a second battery into the second slot.

For faster recharging, do NOT power up the DEWE-

3xxx mainframe, but make certain that the DPS-

2410 is powered on.

There are also one, two, and four slot external battery chargers optionally available. For an easy to use desktop charger for a single battery, please order the BAT-CHARGER-1. For a more robust four battery charger which can also be used as a DC power source, choose the Neutrino-4.

The DPS-2410 has a POWER SWITCH - be sure to turn it on, otherwise, DC power will not flow from it.

Optional BAT-CHARGER-1 is ideal for desktop usage.

Using the smart batteries

The “smart batteries” supplied with your Dewetron battery powered system are equipped with an integrated circuit which stores information such as manufacturer, serial number, production date, etc., and monitors the current battery status in terms of discharge rate, predicted remaining capacity, temperature, voltage etc.

BATT-95WH “smart batteries” are capable of displaying their charge state even when not plugged into anything.

With the push of a button, an LED display on the battery pack shows the current charge state in 25% steps. An intelligent battery controller, integrated in our DEWETRON systems, takes care of the charging and discharging process in order to ensure maximum battery performance and lifetime.

Optional NEUTRINO-4 is a ruggedized four battery charger that also serves as a

DC power supply

Press the white dot on the battery and the charge percentage indicator will show the approximate remaining charge, in

25% steps.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-97

Turning on the System

Locate the power switch on the front panel above the main screen. This is a momentary rocker type switch, where the white dot indicates the ON direction.

♦

♦

♦

-

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

Green POWER LED: lit when the system is powered on

The LCD battery display is ALWAys on when any batteries are installed. This does not indicate that the system is powered on! Only the green POWER LED indicates system power on/off status.

♦ Red HDD LED: lit when there is hard disk activity.

You will notice that the main screen’s backlight will come on when power is applied. After a few moments the BIOS and Windows operating system messages and graphics will appear.

⇒ If the system does not power on, ensure that you have batteries with at least 30% charge, or that the

DPs-2410 is properly connected and TURNED ON.

Hardware Protocols

Using the removable hard disk drive

The right side of the DEWE-321x has a 2.5” removable drive bay. This single bay has two separate hard drives inside it: a C drive for Windows and applications, and a D drive for data.

⇒ If this is the only hard drive in the system, do NOT remove it when the system is powered on! This will cause Windows to crash very badly. If you have an internal hard drive which has the Windows operating system, then removing the external drive is permitted when power is on, because you are not writing to it at that time.

To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then

The DEWE-321x power switch is a momentary type, located on the front panel near the LED battery status display. To its right are LEDs for system power (green) and HDD activity

(red).

The DEWE-321x right side panel contains the removable

HDD and the optical media drive as standard.

5-98 | OWNER’s GUIDE press the large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

Using the Optical read/write drive

Note - systems built after August 2012 do NOT have an optical drive. This option was removed. Therefore this section applies only to those models which have the optical drive installed.

Directly above the removable HDD is an optical drive which can read and write many formats of DVD and CD media. Note that DVD and CD authoring tools which are standard within the installed Windows operating system are available. No additional authorizing tools are included as standard.

A standard slimline optical drive, you open it by pressing the single button on the drive door beside the LED. Gently press-fit a compatible disk onto the spindle and then close the door.

If your system has Windows 7 operating system installed, authoring capability for both CD and DVD media are included with the operating system (Windows XP did not have authoring software for DVD media included as standard).

Of course, in all cases, you are free to install whatever authoring software you prefer. There are some very nice third party utilities which are superior to the ones built into Windows.

Windows 7 Professional, 32-bit mode, was installed on these models starting in December 2010.

The optical drive is located above the computer access door.

Press the EJECT button to open the optical drive. This optical drive is no longer included with the DEWE-3210. Please purchase an external USB optical drive if you require one.

Any Windows7 compatible optical drive with a USB 2.0 interface will work.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-99

Analog Specifications

On-board DAQ /PAD/HSI module slots

On-board MDAQ channels

Compatible modules

DEWE-3210 (DAQ)

8

--

All DAQ, PAD, and HSI series plug-in signal conditioning modules

Any combination of 8 DAQ, PAD, and HSI modules can be plugged in at any time. (See DAQ, PAD, and HSI tables)

DEWE-3211 (MDAQ)

--

16

All MDAQ-SUB series conditioners

Module configuration One MDAQ-BASE-5 holds any two MDAQ-SUB modules

(See MDAQ table)

Modularity

Input configuration

Signal/sensor compatibility

Plug-in modules can be removed with 2 screws, even when power is applied to the system.

Differential, isolated (See DAQ, PAD, and HSI section for complete details)

Voltages, currents, strain, pressure, acceleration, sound pressure, temperature, force, displacement, and more. DAQ,

PAD and HSI modules are available which are compatible with virtually all sensors in common use today.

MDAQ conditioners are factory installed and are not fieldmodular.

Differential, non-isolated (See MDAQ section for complete details)

Voltages, currents, strain, pressure, acceleration, sound pressure, temperature, force, displacement, and more.

MDAQ modules (when combined with MSI adapters) are available which are compatible with virtually all sensors in common use today.

Detailed input specifications

Max A/D card quantity

According to the installed signal conditioners and installed A/D cards

(see tables for DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, HSI, EPAD2, CPAD2 conditioners, and ORION and AD series A/D cards)

3 (using all three PCI slots for A/D cards)

Channel expansion - DYNAMIC input channels

Max channel expansion with analog connection

Max channel expansion with PCI-bridge connection

96 dynamic channels (3 x 32 channel A/D cards inside, plus one or more expansion signal conditioning chassis (external)

200 dynamic channels (8 internal plus external DEWE-51-PCI-192 chassis with PCI bridge interface to the mainframe)

Channel expansion - SLOW input Channels

Max EPAD2 series conditioners 16 (128 channels). EPAD2 modules provide 8 channels each. They are plugged into the standard EPAD connector, and one is daisy-chained to the next one. The last EPAD2 module in the chain must have the small terminator plugged into it to ensure that the communication bus works properly.

5-100 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Counter/Encoder Specifications

Parameter

Number of counter channels

Counter modes

Counter input signal level

Counter input connectors

Number of Digital input/outputs

Digital input signal level

Digital input connector

DEWE-3210 series

According to the A/D card installed (see tables) 8

ORION cards: Event counting, waveform timing, encoder, tacho, geartooth sensor

AD series cards: Event counting, waveform timing, tacho

Standard: TTL level Standard: TTL level

Optional: user adjustable trigger level (when ORION cards whose model names end in 4 or 5 are ordered.

See A/D card tables) one for each counter input

DEWE-3211 series

Standard: Two LEMO connectors on the left side panel,

Optional: More LEMO connectors, or alternative connectors, for the counters

According to the A/D card installed (see tables)

DEWE-3213 series

Standard: Eight LEMO connectors

24 digital inputs

TTL level, non-isolated Standard: TTL, non-isolated

Optional: Wider range, isolated digital input

According to the A/D card installed (see tables)

DSUB37 connector on the left side panel, which has the digital I/O lines, counter, and trigger line from the first installed A/D card.

Each of the 8 LEMOs has three digital inputs

CAN BUS Specifications

Parameter

Number of CAN bus interfaces

Interface type

Special protocols supported

Isolation

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

According to the A/D card installed (see tables below)

CAN 2.0B, up to 1 MBit/sec

J1939 (standard)

OBDII PLUGIN-OBDII option)

CAN output (DEWESoft-OPT-CAN option)

DEWE-3213 series

2 x high speed CAN ports not isolated, however, CAN-OPT-ISO adapters are available optionally, which will isolated the CAN BUS interfaces.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-101

Interfaces

Parameter

EPAD2 interface

Video camera interfaces

GPS interfaces

ARINC 429 / MIL-STD-1553

PCM data

CAN BUS

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

Standard, via LEMO connector. See signal conditioner tables below for EPAD2 details.

USB 2.0, Firewire (IEEE-1394), and ethernet may be used for optional DEWE-CAM

VIDEO cameras. The optional FG-VIDEO-4 can be installed to provide four NTSC video inputs in addition (requires one PCI slot).

RS232C and USB 2.0 may be used for optional GPS interfaces/sensors

Optional ARINC 429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces may be added either as PCI cards or as external USB 2.0 or ethernet-connected boxes.

PCM bit sync/decom interface optionally available. This is a full length card and thus cannot fit within the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211. However, it can be connected via a PCI bridge expansion chassis. Or it can be installed into the DEWE-3218 computer version of the DEWE-3210, which does not have analog signal conditioning.

Two high speed CAN bus interfaces can be installed on each ORION card as an option.

(factory installed). Up to 6 CAN BUS interfaces therefore can be installed within the

DEWE-3210 mainframe.

Accessories Included

Carrying bag

System restore DVD

Printed manuals

Documentation

Calibration report

3200-BAG, soft sided carrying bag made from ballistic nylon, black.

Pouches for accessories, cords, DPS-2410, straps and adjustable shoulder strap

DVD allows the system to be reloaded to factory conditions, including Windows configuration and Dewetron software configuration

DEWE-3210/3211 Owner’s Guide

Certificate of conformance with manufacturer’s specifications

(optional) Complete NIST traceable calibration report from Met/CAL®

5-102 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Computer System Specifications

Parameter

CPU

RAM

Hard disk drive

Optical drive

Operating System

Keyboard and pointing device

Display

Interfaces

PCI slots

Power system

Battery running time

AC running time

Dimensions:

Weight:

Temperature & humidity

Shock and vibration

DEWE-3210 series

Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU

2 GB RAM standard (up to 4 GB optionally)

DEWE-3211 series

500 GB removable S-ATA spinning drive standard, plus internal 160 GB fixed drive for Windows OS and applications

Optional drives:

32, 64, or 128 GB removable flash drive (no moving parts)

Internal spinning or flash drive added in addition to the removable drive

Larger removable drive (up to 1 TB)

None (this was removed in 2012). External optical drives can be purchased at any computer retailer and connected via USB 2.0 interface.

Microsoft® Windows 7 Professional® (32-bit)

Built-in Cherry brand QWERTY keyboard with touchpad

Built-in 17” XGA display 1280x1024 pixels, with resistive touchscreen as stanard

2 x Ethernet interfaces (1 Gb/s max. transfer speed)

4 x USB 2.0 interfaces

1 x IEEE-1394 Firewire interface

1 x RS232C serial interface

1 x VGA interface

Audio and video I/O connectors

Three half-length 32-bit PCI slots. The first slot always used by an A/D card. The other slots may be used for additional A/D cards, or additional interfaces.

SideHAND® battery power system installed

2 x Lithium Ion smart batteries are included

Three battery slots are built into the left side panel

DPS-2410 external AC/DC adapter/charger is included

Built-in 2 line LCD display shows the battery status at all times

Approximately 2 hours of battery operation (depends on workload of the system)

Unlimited. With the DPS-2410 connected, the system will run indefinitely. Batteries are recharged automatically when power is connected.

425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.) (with screen closed)

Without batteries: 10 kg (22 lb.)

Battery weight: approx. 1.5 lbs each

0 to +50 °C (-20 when pre-warmed) (10 to 80 % non cond., 5 to 95 % rel. humidity)

Shock: EN 60068-2-27, MIL-STD-810F

Vibration: EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 | 5-103

Data Acquisition Software Specifications

DEWESoft software specifications

General

Compatibility

Computer requirements

Licensing requirements

Software name and edition

Hardware compatibility

TEDS

Input scaling

Counter setup

Microsoft® Windows XP® and Windows 7® (32-bit operating systems)

Recommended: Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU with 2 GB RAM and S-ATA HDD with 100 GB of free space

Minimum: Intel® Atom® 1.2 GHz CPU with 1 GB RAM and IDE HDD with 50 GB of free space

A valid license is required for data acquisition operation

No license is required to use the software in analysis mode

DEWESoft 7 SE (standard edition) is included with the DEWE-321x system.

Upgrades from SE to PROF or DSA or EE editions are available for purchase at any time.

Controls all programmable aspects of the integrated DEWE-43 acquisition module

Supports TEDS sensors, and includes TEDS compatible sensor database

Channel setup screen: supports linear scaling of analog channels via 2-point method and funtional method (y=mx+b)

Math formula and sensor database: support both linear and non-linear (polynomial) scaling, via multi-sectional coefficients or look-up table scaling

Counter/encoder channel setup screen supports graphical configuration of all counter and encoder decoding modes.

Recording setup

Recording modes

Pre-trigger time

Post-trigger time

File naming

File protection

Multi-file naming

Always fast (continuous recording to disk at the dynamic sample rate)

Fast on trigger (dynamic sample rate recording when one or more trigger conditions are true)

Always slow (reduced rate storage of min/max/ave/rms values at a user-selectable decimation of the dynamic sample rate

Fast on trigger, slow otherwise (combination of fast triggering and slow recording in between triggers)

Pre-trigger time can be entered when using any triggered recording mode. Pretrigger time limited to the amount of physical RAM available divided by the number of samples per second being streamed across the PCI bus

Post-trigger time may be selected without limit

When one or more channels are being used to stop recording, any selected posttrigger time will be added to the end of the acquisition

Data files may be named freely within Windows file naming constraints

Files canno be over-written accidentally due to a warning screen, which provides a way to cancel recording, continue and overwrite the existing file, or rename the new file (preserving the existing file)

Selectable automatic numbering of files. Software will append an underscore and four digits to the end of the user-entered filename. Subsequent recordings are increased one digit at a time. Alternatively the date and/or time (hh:mm:ss) can be added to the filename.

5-104 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-105

6

DEWE-3050 series

The DEWE-3050 is a powerful yet portable data acquisition instrument. It features a removable touchscreen display that can be placed on facing when for protection when the system is not being used. In addition, the keyboard and cables are stored in a compartment behind the display when not in use.

The rear panel of this model is the most capable and flexible that we have ever made, capable of holding up to 32 plugin-modules, or up to 128

MDAQ channels, and many combinations.

The DEWE-3050 runs from AC power, but has a built-in battery UPs system that will keep it running for hours in the event that the power is lost.

This model is designed and built at our Wakefield,

RI manufacturing facility in the UsA.

Model DEWE-3050

Front view, display installed facing outward for normal use

This section will review the hardware characteristics and specifications of the DEWE-3050 series, including its properties as a PC-based instrument, and all data acquisition components, including the A/D cards, signal conditioners, and interfaces with which it is compatible.

Please refer to the SOFTWARE section of this manual to learn how to operate the turn-key data acquisition software installed on the system.

Please refer to the separate sections for the SIGNAL CONDITIONERS, A/D CARDS, INTERFACES and

SENSORS for complete details about those components that may be installed within your DEWE-3050.

6-106 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Dimensions

419 5

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

394

384

10

340

343

Add 10 mm all around for BNC connectors, knobs, and other protrusions.

Allow plenty of room for cooling fans to function properly. Never block air exchange.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-107

Top-level call-outs

DEWE-3050, front view, display facing out and mounted

High-impact rubberized side / corner protectors

PCI card edge access (for ARINC,

1553, PCM, D/A cards)

(INSIDE) ORION-1616-100 A/D card included as standard

Computer interfaces

(ethernet, USB, RS232, audio, and more)

Two removable 2.5” HDDs (C and D)

Video cameras like:

DEWE-CAM-FW-70

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-120

DEWE-CAM-USB, etc.

Convenient large handle

LCD battery status display

17” removable TOUCHSCREEN display

Air cooling (filtered intakes)

120 / 240 VAC mains power input

Door for 4 x SideHAND2 series hot-swappable batteries

6-108 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Top-level call-outs (continued)

DEWE-3050, rear view, 2.5U-PANEL-16 installed

Accessory / DIO connector (DSUB 37)

ORION-SYNC (option)

EPAD connector (LEMO)

12 VDC output (LEMO

Counters (2) (LEMO)

16 slots for DAQ / PAD / HSI modules

Modular spaces for the installation of additional function panels

Rubberized corner protectors

DEWE-3050, rear view, TWO 2.5U-PANEL-16s installed (32 slots)

5 x PCI slots (full length)

Filtered air intakes for colling

Two removable HDDs (C and D)

Computer interfaces

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-109

DEWE-3050 Rear Panel Configurations

With DAQ / PAD / HSI and MDAQ

The rear panel can be configured with one 16 slot racks for DAQ / PAD / HSI modules

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16 - compatible with all DAQ and

PAD modules, and HSI modules (up to 300 kHz bandwidth) - or -

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16-HSI - compatible with all HSI modules up to 2 MHz bandwidth, all PAD modules, and most DAQ modules

When one 16-slot rack is installed, two 2.5U and two

2.0U panel spaces remain available for additional panel options to be added. For example: 32 channels of MDAQ conditioners with DSUB connectors could be added, plus 32 channels of MDAQ with BNC connectors. Or 64 channels of MDAQ with BNC connectors.

There are many possibilities.

With MDAQ conditioners only

The rear panel can be configured with up to:

SIX 2.0U MDAQ conditioner panels with DSUB connectors could be added (96 channels) - or -

EIGHT 1.5U MDAQ conditioner panels with BNC connectors would be added (128 channels) - or -

Many other comibinations of MDAQ panels and other function panels

(ALL MODELS)

EPAD2 signal conditioners for adding slow thermocouple inputs, RTDs, voltages, and currents (daisy-chain)

6-110 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-3050, front view, display removed - keyboard revealed

Additional Function Panels

Inside compartment for cable storage

(remove the display to access it)

Removable kayboard with touchpad located behind the display. Held in by spring-loaded clips. You can stow the keyboard and your cables inside here when the system is not being used.

Note that the screen can be put on backwards to protect it when the system is not in use.

0.5U-DA2-BNC

0.5 U panel with 2 BNC connectors connected to the 2 analog outputs of an AD16-1000-16-OUT2 card

0.5U-DA4-BNC

0.5 U panel with 4 BNC connectors connected to the 4 analog outputs of a DA4-1000-16 card

0.5U-DA8-BNC

0.5 U panel with 4 BNC connectors connected to the 8 analog outputs of a DA8-1000-16 card

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-4

0.5U panel with BINDER 712 connectors, 9VDC power supply for up to four PNA-100 current sensors.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-111

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-8

0.5U panel with BINDER 712 connectors, 9VDC power supply for up to four PNA-100 current sensors.

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-4

0.5U panel with LEMO connectors, 15VDC power supply and digital status lines for up to four PNA-CLAMP-150-DC current sensors.

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-8

0.5U panel with LEMO connectors, 15VDC power supply and digital status lines for up to eight PNA-CLAMP-150-DC current sensors.

1U-DA8-BNC

1U panel with 8 BNC connectors supporting up to 8 analog outputs

1U-DA16-BNC

1U panel with 8 BNC connectors supporting up to 16 analog outputs

1.5U-ORION-DIO-PANEL-1

1.5U panel with 8 LEMO connectors (EGG.1B.307) for up to 8 counters, plus one DSUB37 connector for up to 16 digital input lines, including mating connectors (included with UP-ORION-

CTR8 upgrade)

1.5U-TC-PANEL-32

1.5U panel prepared for up to 32 thermocouple input channels.

Up to four MPAD-TH8-X modules can be factory installed into this panel. Each MPAD block provides 8 channels.

6-112 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

„

Signal conditioning

The DEWE-3050 can be equipped in countless ways. Here are the most popular configurations:

16 x DAQ / PAD / HSI series plug-in signal conditioners, or

32 x DAQ / PAD / HSI series plug-in signal conditioners, or

16 x 8-channel MDAQ-SUB-BNC conditioners (128 channels total), or

12 x 8-channel MDAQ-SUB-DSUB conditioners (96 channels total), or

16 x DAQ / PAD / HSI modules PLUS up to 64 channels of MDAQ conditioners

When every possible panel space is not filled, other function panels can additionally be added. Please see the previous page for a listing of these panels.

„

„

„

„

„

A/D card(s)

The DEWE-3050 has five full length PCI slots inside. As a standard, the ORION-1616-100 A/D card is installed when you buy the data acquisition system. This card provides the following basic specifications (further details are shown in the specification tables in the next pages):

16 simultaneously sampled analog input channels

16-bit resolution, separate ADC per channels

100 kS/s/ch maximum sample rate

2 synchronous counter/encoder inputs

8 each digital input and output lines

„

„

„

At the time of ordering, this card can be upgraded, using any of the options available for increasing the channel count, the bit resolution to 22 or 24-bit, or increasing the sample rate up to 1 MS/s/ch, and many combinations of the preceding. See the UP-ORION options for all of the possibilities.

In addition, many options can be factory installed onto the ORION cards, including adding two high speed

CAN BUS interfaces, or expanding the number and capabilities of the digital counters that are installed.

Furthermore, multiple ORION series cards may be installed. A few examples:

5 x ORION-1624-200 cards for a 40 channel noise and vibration analyzer

3 x ORION-3216-100 cards for a 96 channel general purpose system

4 x ORION-1616-1000 cards for a 64 channel HIGH SPEED acquisition system (1 MS/s/ch)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-113

Interface(s)

The DEWE-3050 is compatible with ORION, PCI card, and USB connected interfaces These include the

CAN BUS interfaces added to the ORION A/D card, as well as separate PCI cards available for adding multiple ARINC 429, MIL-STD-1553 interfaces to the system. If all three PCI slots were used up, ARINC and

MIL-STD-1553 interfaces can also be added as USB devices. There are numerous interfaces available for your DEWE system.

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

PCI format

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

USB format

Video Cameras

The DEWE-3050 is compatible with several kinds of video cameras, including:

DEWE-CAM-USB

USB camera

DEWE-CAM-FW

Hard sync Firewire camera

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E

Gigabit ethernet camera

6-114 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Connectors

System/PC connectors

Ground (earth) Connector

Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe

Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe

Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC power input.

AC power input

Connector: Standard AC receptacle, compatible with 120/240 VAC (the receptacle has to be reversed to switch it between 120 VAC/60 Hz and 240 VAC/50 Hz.

⇒ Important note - applied power must fall within the posted ranges.

Fuse

The AC power is fused within the AC receptacle, using a REGULAR ATO 15A fast-acting blade fuse. Blue is the ATO standard color code for a15 amperes fuse rating. ISO 8820-3:2002 standard.

⇒ Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even death can result.

PC Connector Call-Outs

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-115

Audio I/O stack

DVI video output

USB 2.0 ports

DisplayPorts (2)

Ethernet (3)

6-116 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Ethernet interfaces (3)

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals (printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: The DEWE-321x provides three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers. In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the DEWE-321x.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-117

DVI Video Output

Connector: Standard DVI connector

Mating connector: Standard DVI-to-DVI or DVI-to-VGA cable

Function: For connecting the standard display.

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system.

Note: DEWE-321x’s with 15” displays (made in 2010) have a max resolution of 1024x768; DEWE-321x (made in

2011 or later) with 17” displays have a max resolution of 1280x1024 . The CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

USB 2.0 interfaces (6)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface.

Description: The DEWE-3050 mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are typically six user-accessible Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all USB ports is supported.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

6-118 |

Note: UsB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XsENs MTI series of sensors.

Audio stack connectors (3)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded BLUE, GREEN and PINK

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the system.

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (up to 128)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed.

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3050.

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

CAN BUS interface connector (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

Connectors: DSUB-9 standard CAN wiring

Mating connector: DSUB-9 male mate

1

4

5

2

3

6

PIN Function

CAN0 Lo

CAN0 Hi

D GND

CAN1 Lo

CAN1 Hi

GND

Comment

First CAN port

First CAN port

Second CAN port

Second CAN port

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

6-120 |

When the CAN option is installed, this single LEMO connector will contain two CAN BUS interfaces. The

CAN-CBL-Y mating cable is optionally available to split the single LEMO connector to two standard CAN

DB-9 (female) connectors. Both DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Digital I/O connector (AKA “Accessory connector”)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-121

Connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Mating connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Function: Provides access to the digital input/output lines on the installed A/D card, as well as additional signals such as clock input, trigger input, and more (see A/D card table related to the installed card).

The exact pin-out of this connector can vary according to the system configuration, but here is the typical pin-out diagram when an ORION-1616-100 card is installed:

6-122 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

Installing the Smart Batteries systems are shipped with the hot-swappable batteries removed. you should install them, connect power, and charge up the batteries. Please follow these guidelines:

♦ Open the battery door on the side of the DEWE-

3050 and insert four SideHAND2 series smart batteries into the four slots.

♦ When inserting the first battery you may notice that the system LEDs and fans will turn on for a second, this is normal when the battery module

“wakes up.”

⇒ Never use any battery which appears to be damaged, or which is cracked, broken, hot to the touch, or unusual in any way. Lithium batteries can be dangerous if mistreated or improperly charged.

Please locate the BATTERy sTATUs LCD, located on the left side panel.

♦ With batteries in place, the LCD screen will display the charge level, charge/discharge state, power consumption and total current.

♦ The LCD (and battery module circuit) will always be ON, unless the batteries are removed

Plug the standard AC power cord into a valid mains power source.

„

„

Turn on the master power switch on the left side panel.

Press and release the smaller soft power switch adjacent to the larger master power switch. The system, will boot up.

The battery door on the side of the DEWE-3050 is hinged, allowing you to access the battery compartment. Batteries can be removed by pulling on their flexible tabs.

The battery status LCD keeps you informed of how many batteries are installed (2 above), the charge level (100% above), and whether the system is charging or discharging.

⇒ Do not block the cooling fan of the DEWE-3050.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-123

-

Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.

NOTE: The DEWE-3050 can be operated without batteries simply by connecting the DPs-2410.

This can also help you refresh batteries which have become 100% discharged, which can happen over time. If the mainframe will not start up, simply remove all of your batteries, then power up the system using external AC power. When the system is up and running, insert only one battery. Wait 30 minutes and then insert a second battery into the second slot, and so on.

For faster recharging, do NOT power up the DEWE-

3050 mainframe, but make certain that the AC power is connected.

There is a one-slot desktop style battery charger available (BAT-CHARGER-1).

Using the smart batteries

The “smart batteries” supplied with your Dewetron battery powered system are equipped with an integrated circuit which stores information such as manufacturer, serial number, production date, etc., and monitors the current battery status in terms of discharge rate, predicted remaining capacity, temperature, voltage etc.

SideHAND2 series “smart batteries” are capable of displaying their charge state even when not plugged into anything.

A small LCD display on the battery pack shows the current charge state in 25% steps. An intelligent battery controller, integrated in our DEWETRON systems, takes care of the charging and discharging process in order to ensure maximum battery performance and lifetime.

Optional BAT-CHARGER-1 is ideal for desktop usage.

SideHAND2 series batteries have a small LCD display on their end near the plastic pull tab. This LCD will indicate the approximate level of charge in 25% steps.

6-124 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Turning on the System

The MASTER power switch must be set to the on position. Now locate the smaller soft power switch nearby on the left side panel. This is a momentary rocker type switch, where the white dot indicates the

ON direction.

♦

♦

♦

-

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

Green POWER LED: lit when the system is powered on

The LCD battery display is ALWAys on when any batteries are installed. This does not indicate that the system is powered on! Only the green POWER LED indicates system power on/off status.

You may notice that the main screen’s backlight will come on when power is applied. After a few moments the BIOS and Windows operating system messages and graphics will appear.

⇒ If the system does not power on, ensure that you have batteries with at least 30% charge, or that the

DPs-2410 is properly connected and TURNED ON.

Hardware Protocols

Using the removable hard disk drives

The left side of the DEWE-3050 has two 2.5” removable drive bays. One is marked as the C drive for

Windows and applications, and the other as the D drive for data.

⇒ Never remove the C drive when the system is powered on or plugged in! The operating system can become corrupted and the system will fail if you do this. Also take care with the D drive, that no application is trying to access it. It’s always safer to completely turn off the system before removing or installing any hard drive.

To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

The larger power switch is the MASTER. The smaller one is a “soft,” or momentary type, located nearby, on the left side panel. In between is a green LED which lights up to indicate that system power is on.

The DEWE-3050 right side panel contains two removable

HDD s (hard disk drives).

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-125

Using external optical read/write drives

Because the DEWE-3050 does not include an optical drive, you are free to purchase one from any computer retailer, and connect it to your system via one of the available USB 2.0 ports.

The DEWE-3050 is compatible with external optical drives which are Windows7 compatible.

6-126 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-3050 SPECIFICATIONS

Input specifications

Slots for DAQ or PAD modules

MDAQ-SUB positions

DEWE-3050 - DAQ version

16 or 32

When 16 DAQ slots are installed, up to 64 more channels of MDAQ can be added to the system, for 80 channels total.

Consult Dewetron for configuration assistance.

DEWE-3050 - MDAQ version

--

Up to 6 x 2.0U MDAQ-DSUB (96 channels) or 8 x 1.5U

MDAQ-BNC (128 channels) can be installed. Also many combinations of MDAQ and other panels are possible.

Consult Dewetron for configuration.

Main system

Total PCI slots

Hard disk

Data throughput to disk

Power supply

Battery power

Display

Processor

RAM

Ethernet

USB

RS232

Operating system

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Free PCI slots

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

Humdity

Vibration

Shock

Required to complete this model

Conditioners:

A/D card(s)

5 x full-length PCI slots (one is used by the standard A/D card)

C: 100 GB removable C drive / 500 GB removable D drive (optional solid state drive)

80 MB/s typical; faster rates available with the additional of an internal RAID controller and/or additional drives

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz AC mains power.

Includes standard UPS with four hot-swappable SideHAND2 series batteries. Batteries are charged automatically when AC power is connected.

17” SXGA display, 1280 x 1024 px, with resistive touchscreen. Display is removable, and can be mounted backwards when not in use.

Intel 8-core i7 2.0 GHz CPU, on a standard ATX mainboard

4 GB standard

3 x ethernet interfaces standard (1 Gb)

Four x USB 2.0 interfaces available

One serial interface on a DB9 connector available

Microsoft Windows7 32-bit included (upgrades to 64-bit will be available Summer 2013)

425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.)

12 kg typical (26.4 lbs)

4 (the standard ORION-1616-100 A/D card uses one of the PCI slots)

-20 to 50C (0 to 45C with batteries installed) (storage temp -20 to 60C)

10 to 80% non-condensing, 5 to 95% relative humidity

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-27

Software

Any 16 or 32 DAQ series plugin modules Up to 128 MDAQ series channels

The ORION-1616-100 is included as standard. You may upgrade this card as follows:

UP-ORION-16-22 upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add antialiasing filters (AAF), max. SR remains at 100 kS/s/ch

UP-ORION-16-24

UP-ORION-16-22-32

UP-ORION-100-1000

UP-ORION-100-200-8

8 channels

UP-ORION-100-1000-8 upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max. SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add AAF, increase from 16 to 32 analog channels upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max.SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch, decrease to upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch, decrease to 8 channels

DS-7-SE data acquisition software is included as standard*

32 analog channels, or multiple video cameras, or DEWE-CAM-FW-70, or DEWE-CLOCK use requires upgrade to

PROF edition.

64+ analog channels requires upgrade to DSA edition.

LabVIEW VIs are available for Dewetron ORION series A/D cards and DAQ series signal conditioners.

Popular upgrades

Counter expansion (UP-ORION-CTR8)

Synchronization interface (UP-ORION-SYNC)

Upgrades the A/D card from 8 TTL digital I/Os and 2 TTL counter / encoders to:

8 synchronous TTL digital inputs protected up to 25 VDC

8 synchronous counter / encoder or 24 digital inputs with programmable threshold levels (0-40 V), input voltage range

-35 to 60 V, AC/DC coupling

Includes DB37 pin connectors installed

Installs the SYNC hardware input/output ports and LED indicators onto the mainframe. Allows systems with the same base ORION card to be synced. Additionally Requires DS-OPT-NET software option for synchronization under DS-7 software.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3050 | 6-127

Input specifications

Digital Isolation (ORION-BASE-DI-ISO)

HDD upgrade to solid state disks

DEWE-3050 - DAQ version DEWE-3050 - MDAQ version

Isolation for the 16 digital inputs of ORION base cards.

Input low: 0 - 2 V, Input high: 3 - 50 V bandwidth: DC up to 1MHz

Isolation voltage between channels: 150 VDC

Isolation voltage between Input and Output: 250 VDC

Connector: DSUB-37 connector (replaces standard digital I/O connector)

HDD-UP-SSD-120 Upgrade to 120 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-240 Upgrade to 240 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-480 Upgrade to 480 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 100 MB/s

Adds an internal IRIG or GPS time code interface (does not require a PCI slot) Time code interface

Popular interface add-ons

CAN expansion (UP-ORION-CAN2)

IRIG / GPS time code (DEWE-CLOCK-INT)

VIDEO-FG-4

ARINC-429 / 1553 interfaces

Adds 2 synchronous high speed CAN bus interfaces to the ORION card inside the system. Includes two DB9 factory installed connectors for these counters on the side panel of the DEWE-3050, and rear panel of the DEWE-3040 and

DEWE-3050. Includes DS-OPT-CAN software option supporting CAN BUS interface.

IRIG or GPS synchronized clock source for DEWETRON systems, installed inside a new DEWETRON base unit

Input: IRIG signal code A or B, AM or DC, or GPS signal

Output: TTL clock from 10 Hz to 10 MHz, PPS and ORION-DSA-SYNC, IRIG-B DC

Uses one USB interface (requires DS-PROF or higher)

Please order GPS antenna GPS-ANT-1 separately (if GPS is needed)

Adds a four channel VIDEO INPUT PCI card to the system. Four BNCs for analog NTSC video input on the right side panel, allowing four video streams to be recorded in sync with the data

Adds a multi-channel ARINC-429 or MIL-STD-1553 interface to the system. Available as a single PCI card with either or both interfaces on it, or as separate external USB interfaces. See the INTERFACES section for a comprehensive list.

External channel expansion

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series modules Add one or more EPAD2 series external signal conditioners to your system. Each one provides 8 thermocouple,

RTD, low voltage, or low current inputs. EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained up to 8 modules per system. CPAD2 modules are the same except with CAN BUS interface.

Additional Specifications

ORION-1616-100 A/D specifications

Number of analog channels

Bit-resolution

Maximum sample rate

Input configuration

ADC type

Channel separation (cross-talk)

DC accuracy

Signal to noise

Interchannel gain mismatch

Interchannel phase mismatch

8 channels

16-bit ADC converters (one per channel)

14.7 effective number of bits

100 kS/s/ch simultaneous

Single-ended (note that the DAQ, HSI, or MDAQ conditioners are in front of the ORION card, and serve as the differential front-end for your signals.

Successive approximation (SAR)

> 90 dB @ fin 1 kHz

±0.02 % of reading ±0.013 % of range

89 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) 0 dBFS input < -86 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) -20 dBFS input < -93 dB

±0.015 %

0.02° * fin (kHz) + 0.08°

6-128 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Digital I/O and Clock line specs

Digital input lines

Digital input characteristics

Digital output lines

Digital output characteristics

Clock divider output line

16

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level -0.7 V to 0.8 V

High voltage level 2 V to 5 V

Pull-up with 100 kΩ resistor

Input capacitance < 5pF

Input protection -1 V to 6 V

8

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level < 0.4 V @ 4 mA load

High voltage level > 3 V @ 4 mA load

Output current

Sink (low level) -20 mA Source (high level) 20 mA

Output impedance 50 Ω

1, same characteristics as digital output lines

Standard counter/encoder specs

Standard counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Time base accuracy

Measurement modes

Standard counter/encoder signal levels

Overvoltage input protection

2 x 32-bit (LEMO connectors for each)

Note - used as pair counters when advanced features are used. If you need two or more full-featured counters, please order the UP-ORION-CTR8

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

25 ppm

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

TTL/CMOS, pull-up with 100 kΩ

Input low level: -0.7 V to 0.8 V

Input high level: +2 to +5V

(DI 0 to DI 7): ±25 V continuous

(DI 8 to DI 15): -1 to 6 V

Advanced counter/encoders (UP-ORION-CTR8 option)

Advanced counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Measurement modes

Signal levels

Trigger adjustment range

Trigger level accuracy

Common voltage range

Overvoltage input protection

Max. DC level @ AC coupling:

8 advanced 32-bit counters

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

Symmetrical, differential

AC/DC coupling selectable

0 to 40 VDC with 40 mV resolution

±100 mV ±1% of trigger level

-35 to 50V

±100 V continuous

±50 V continuous

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

High-speed CAN interfaces

Bus pin fault protection

ESD protection

Physical layer

Compatibility

2 CAN 2.0B high speed interfaces

±36 V

12kV

High speed

2.0B standard, J1939 protocol support

OBD II via software option

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-129

7

DEWE-3040-RM series

The DEWE-3040-RM is our best “all in one” rack mounting data acquisition instrument. It features a huge 19” display, and a keyboard (with touchpad) that pulls out for easy access any time you need it, then hides away again when you don’t

The rear panel of this model is very flexible, capable of holding up to 16 plugin-modules, or up to 64 MDAQ channels, and many combinations.

The DEWE-3040-RM runs from AC power, and comes with slide rack hardware for easy installation in your standard 19” rack enclosure.

This model is designed and built at our Wakefield,

RI manufacturing facility in the UsA.

Model DEWE-3040-RM

Front view, keyboard not deployed

This section will review the hardware characteristics and specifications of the DEWE-3040-RM series, including its properties as a PC-based instrument, and all data acquisition components, including the A/D cards, signal conditioners, and interfaces with which it is compatible.

Please refer to the SOFTWARE section of this manual to learn how to operate the turn-key data acquisition software installed on the system.

Please refer to the separate sections for the SIGNAL CONDITIONERS, A/D CARDS, INTERFACES and

SENSORS for complete details about those components that may be installed within your DEWE-3040-RM.

7-130 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Dimensions

436

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

483 (19”)

352

276

317

Add 10 mm all around for BNC connectors, knobs, and other protrusions.

When the keyboard is pulled out, it protrudes ~140 mm (~5.5”)

Allow plenty of room for cooling fans to function properly. Never block air exchange.

Soft power switch

Pull-out keyboard drawer built-in

Captive spring-loaded thumbscrews keep it closed when you don’t need it

Top Level Call-outs

DEWE-3040-RM, front view, keyboard open

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-131

Standard 19” rack-mounting

(slides also included)

(INSIDE) ORION-1616-100 A/D card included as standard

Convenient pull-out handles

Big wide aspect display

Front-panel pushbuttons for start/ stop and REC indicator

Front-panel USB connectors

Removable 2.5” HDD

Pull-out keyboard drawer built-in

NOTE;

Computer interfaces (ethernet, USB,

RS232, are automatically brought out to the rear panel, space permitting.

DEWE-3040-RM, front view, keyboard open

Soft power switch

Pull-out keyboard drawer built-in

Captive spring-loaded thumbscrews keep it closed when you don’t need it

Video cameras like:

DEWE-CAM-FW-70

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-120

DEWE-CAM-USB, etc.

7-132 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Top-level call-outs (continued)

DEWE-3040-RM, right side/rear oblique view

PCI and PCIe card edge access door

Air cooling (filtered intakes)

Computer subsystem access door (all needed ports are brought to the rear panel already)

120 / 240 VAC mains power input

DEWE-3040-RM, front view, Control Panel Close-up

Soft Power Switch Store / Stop Pushbuttons

Power LED / HDD busy LED

USB 2.0 interfaces

Pull-out Keyboard drawer

Removable HDD

Optical Drive

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-133

DEWE-3040-RM Rear Panel Configurations

2.5U

2.0U

1.5U

With DAQ / PAD / HSI modules only

The rear panel can be configured with one 16 slot racks for DAQ / PAD / HSI modules

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16 - compatible with all DAQ and

PAD modules, and HSI modules (up to 300 kHz bandwidth)

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16-HSI - compatible with all HSI modules up to 2 MHz bandwidth, all PAD modules, and most DAQ modules

When a 16-slot rack is installed, two 2U and two

1.5U panel spaces remain available for additional panel options to be added.

2.5U

2.0U

1.5U

With DAQ / PAD / HSI and MDAQ

The rear panel can be configured with one 16 slot racks for DAQ / PAD / HSI modules - and still leave room for MDAQ conditioners!

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16 - compatible with all DAQ and

PAD modules, and HSI modules (up to 300 kHz bandwidth) - or -

2.5U-PANEL-DAQ-16-HSI - compatible with all HSI modules up to 2 MHz bandwidth, all PAD modules, and most DAQ modules

Thus, you could still add 32 more channels of

MDAQ signal conditioning, and a 1.5U panel for 32 channels of thermocouples, as one example.

Or you could add three blocks of 16 channels of

MDAQ signal conditioning, as long as one of them was using the 1.5U high BNC panel type. This means 48 MDAQ channels PLUS 16 isolated DAQ /

PAD / HSI conditioner channels.

7-134 | OWNER’s GUIDE

2.0U

0.5U

1.5U

DEWE-3050, front view, display removed - keyboard revealed

With MDAQ conditioners only

The rear panel can be configured with up to:

FIVE 2.0U MDAQ conditioner panels with DSUB connectors can be added (80 channels) - or -

FIVE 1.5U MDAQ conditioner panels with BNC connectors can be added (80 channels) - or -

Many other combinations of MDAQ panels and other function panels

(ALL MODELS)

EPAD2 signal conditioners for adding slow thermocouple inputs, RTDs, voltages, and currents (daisy-chain)

0.5U-DA2-BNC

0.5 U panel with 2 BNC connectors connected to the 2 analog outputs of an AD16-1000-16-OUT2 card

0.5U-DA4-BNC

0.5 U panel with 4 BNC connectors connected to the 4 analog outputs of a DA4-1000-16 card

0.5U-DA8-BNC

0.5 U panel with 4 BNC connectors connected to the 8 analog outputs of a DA8-1000-16 card

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-4

0.5U panel with BINDER 712 connectors, 9VDC power supply for up to four PNA-100 current sensors.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-135

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-8

0.5U panel with BINDER 712 connectors, 9VDC power supply for up to four PNA-100 current sensors.

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-4

0.5U panel with LEMO connectors, 15VDC power supply and digital status lines for up to four PNA-CLAMP-150-DC current sensors.

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-8

0.5U panel with LEMO connectors, 15VDC power supply and digital status lines for up to eight PNA-CLAMP-150-DC current sensors.

1U-DA8-BNC

1U panel with 8 BNC connectors supporting up to 8 analog outputs

1U-DA16-BNC

1U panel with 8 BNC connectors supporting up to 16 analog outputs

1.5U-ORION-DIO-PANEL-1

1.5U panel with 8 LEMO connectors (EGG.1B.307) for up to 8 counters, plus one DSUB37 connector for up to 16 digital input lines, including mating connectors (included with UP-ORION-

CTR8 upgrade)

1.5U-TC-PANEL-32

1.5U panel prepared for up to 32 thermocouple input channels.

Up to four MPAD-TH8-X modules can be factory installed into this panel. Each MPAD block provides 8 channels.

7-136 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

Signal conditioning

The DEWE-3040-RM can be equipped in countless ways. Here are the most popular configurations:

16 x DAQ / PAD / HSI series plug-in signal conditioners, or

10 x 8-channel MDAQ-SUB (any connector) conditioners (80 channels total), or

16 x DAQ / PAD / HSI modules PLUS up to 48 channels of MDAQ conditioners

When every possible panel space is not filled, other function panels can additionally be added. Please see the previous page for a listing of these panels.

„

„

„

„

„

A/D card(s)

The DEWE-3040-RM has two full length PCI slots and two full length PCIe slots inside. As a standard, the

ORION-1616-100 A/D card is installed when you buy the data acquisition system. This card provides the following basic specifications (further details are shown in the specification tables in the next pages):

16 simultaneously sampled analog input channels

16-bit resolution, separate ADC per channels

100 kS/s/ch maximum sample rate

2 synchronous counter/encoder inputs

8 each digital input and output lines

„

„

„

At the time of ordering, this card can be upgraded, using any of the options available for increasing the channel count, the bit resolution to 22 or 24-bit, or increasing the sample rate up to 1 MS/s/ch, and many combinations of the preceding. See the UP-ORION options for all of the possibilities.

In addition, many options can be factory installed onto the ORION cards, including adding two high speed

CAN BUS interfaces, or expanding the number and capabilities of the digital counters that are installed.

Furthermore, multiple ORION series cards may be installed. A few examples:

2 x ORION-1624-200 cards for a 32 channel noise and vibration analyzer

2 x ORION-3216-100 cards for a 64 channel general purpose system

2 x ORION-1616-1000 cards for a 64 channel HIGH SPEED acquisition system (1 MS/s/ch)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-137

Interface(s)

The DEWE-3040-RM is compatible with ORION, PCI / PCIe card, and USB connected interfaces These include the CAN BUS interfaces added to the ORION A/D card, as well as separate PCI and PCIe cards available for adding multiple ARINC 429, MIL-STD-1553 interfaces to the system. If all three PCI slots were used up, ARINC and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces can also be added as USB devices. There are numerous interfaces available for your DEWE system.

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

PCI or PCIe format

Typical ARINC or MIL-STD-1553 interface

USB format

Video Cameras

The DEWE-3040-RM is compatible with several kinds of video cameras, including:

DEWE-CAM-USB

USB camera

DEWE-CAM-FW

Hard sync Firewire camera

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E

Gigabit ethernet camera

7-138 | OWNER’s GUIDE

System Connectors

System/PC connectors

Ground (earth) Connector

Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe

Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe

Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC power input.

AC power input

Connector: Standard AC receptacle, compatible with 120/240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz.

⇒ Important note - applied power must fall within the posted ranges.

Fuse

The AC power is fused.

⇒ Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even death can result.

Ethernet interfaces (2 or 3)

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-139

Top Rear Panel Connectors

EPAD LEMO 12VDC output

Accessory / Digital I/O (DSUB-37) ORION-SYNC (option) Counters (2) LEMO Reserved

Right Side Panel

Both of the panels can be accessed by removing the four philips head screws.

UPPER PANEL

Remove this panel to access the

PCI and PCIe card edges.

LOWER PANEL

Remove this panel to access the computer inside the system.

7-140 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-3040-RM to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals (printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: The DEWE-321x provides three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers. In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the DEWE-321x.

DVI Video Output

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-141

Connector: Standard DVI connector

Mating connector: Standard DVI-to-DVI or DVI-to-VGA cable

Function: For connecting the standard display.

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system.

Note: DEWE-321x’s with 15” displays (made in 2010) have a max resolution of 1024x768; DEWE-321x (made in

2011 or later) with 17” displays have a max resolution of 1280x1024 . The CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

USB 2.0 interfaces (6)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface.

Description: The DEWE-3050 mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are typically six user-accessible Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all USB ports is supported.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

7-142 |

Note: UsB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XsENs MTI series of sensors.

Audio stack connectors (3 or 6)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded BLUE, GREEN and PINK

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the system.

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (up to 128)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed.

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3050.

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

CAN BUS interface connector (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

Connectors: DSUB-9 standard CAN wiring

Mating connector: DSUB-9 male mate

1

4

5

2

3

6

PIN Function

CAN0 Lo

CAN0 Hi

D GND

CAN1 Lo

CAN1 Hi

GND

Comment

First CAN port

First CAN port

Second CAN port

Second CAN port

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

7-144 |

When the CAN option is installed, this single LEMO connector will contain two CAN BUS interfaces. The

CAN-CBL-Y mating cable is optionally available to split the single LEMO connector to two standard CAN

DB-9 (female) connectors. Both DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

-

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Digital I/O connector (AKA “Accessory connector”)

Connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Mating connector: Standard DSUB 37-pin connector, female

Function: Provides access to the digital input/output lines on the installed A/D card, as well as additional signals such as clock input, trigger input, and more (see A/D card table related to the installed card).

The exact pin-out of this connector can vary according to the system configuration, but here is the typical pin-out diagram when an ORION-1616-100 card is installed:

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-145

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

Plug the standard AC power cord into a valid mains power source.

⇒ Do not block the cooling fans of the DEWE-3040-RM.

Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.

Turning on the System

The MASTER power switch must be set to the on position. Now locate the smaller soft power switch nearby on the front panel. This is a momentary rocker type switch, where the white dot indicates the

ON direction.

♦

♦

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

♦ Green POWER LED: lit when the system is powered on

The rear panel of the DEWE-3040-RM is where the

MASTER power switch is located.

Hardware Protocols

Using the removable hard disk drives

The front panel of the DEWE-3040-RM has a 2.5” removable drive bay.

⇒ Never remove the C drive when the system is powered on or plugged in! The operating system can become corrupted and the system will fail if you do this. It’s always safer to completely turn off the system before removing or installing any hard drive.

To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

The front panel of the DEWE-3040-RM is where the soft power switch is located.

The front panel of the DEWE-3040-RM is where the removable hard disk drive is located.

7-146 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-3040-RM Specifications

Input specifications

Slots for DAQ or PAD modules

MDAQ-SUB positions

DEWE-3040-RM - DAQ version

16

When 16 DAQ slots are installed, up to 48 more channels of MDAQ can be added to the system, for 64 channels total. Consult Dewetron for configuration assistance.

DEWE-3040-RM - MDAQ version

48 possible channels

Up to 8 x 2.0U MDAQ-DSUB (64 channels) plus two

1.5U MDAQ-SUB-BNC (16 channels) can be installed (80 channels maximum).

Main system

Total PCI slots

Hard disk

Data throughput to disk

Power supply

Display

Processor

RAM

Ethernet

USB

RS232

Operating system

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Free PCI slots

Free PCIe slots

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

Humdity

Vibration

Shock

Required to complete this model

Conditioners:

A/D card(s)

2 x full-length PCI slots (one is used by the standard A/D card) plus 2 x full-length PCIe slots are available

C: 100 GB removable C drive / 500 GB removable D drive (optional solid state drive)

80 MB/s typical; faster rates available with the additional of an internal RAID controller and/or additional drives

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz AC mains power.

19” SXGA display, 1280 x 1024 px, with resistive touchscreen. Display is removable, and can be mounted backwards when not in use.

Intel 8-core i7 2.0 GHz CPU, on a standard ATX mainboard

4 GB standard

3 x ethernet interfaces standard (1 Gb)

Four x USB 2.0 interfaces available

One serial interface on a DB9 connector available

Microsoft Windows7 32-bit included (upgrades to 64-bit will be available Summer 2013)

425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.)

10 kg typical (22 lbs)

One (the standard ORION-1616-100 A/D card uses one of the PCI slots)

Two

-20 to 50C (0 to 45C with batteries installed) (storage temp -20 to 60C)

10 to 80% non-condensing, 5 to 95% relative humidity

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-27

Software

Any 16 DAQ series plugin modules Up to 80 MDAQ series channels

The ORION-1616-100 is included as standard. You may upgrade this card as follows:

UP-ORION-16-22 upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add antialiasing filters (AAF), max. SR remains at 100 kS/s/ch

UP-ORION-16-24

UP-ORION-16-22-32

UP-ORION-100-1000

UP-ORION-100-200-8

8 channels

UP-ORION-100-1000-8 upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max. SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add AAF, increase from 16 to 32 analog channels upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max.SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch, decrease to upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch, decrease to 8 channels

DS-7-SE data acquisition software is included as standard*

32 analog channels, or multiple video cameras, or DEWE-CAM-FW-70, or DEWE-CLOCK use requires upgrade to

PROF edition.

64+ analog channels requires upgrade to DSA edition.

LabVIEW VIs are available for Dewetron ORION series A/D cards and DAQ series signal conditioners.

Popular upgrades

Counter expansion (UP-ORION-CTR8)

Synchronization interface (UP-ORION-SYNC)

Upgrades the A/D card from 8 TTL digital I/Os and 2 TTL counter / encoders to:

8 synchronous TTL digital inputs protected up to 25 VDC

8 synchronous counter / encoder or 24 digital inputs with programmable threshold levels (0-40 V), input voltage range

-35 to 60 V, AC/DC coupling

Includes DB37 pin connectors installed

Installs the SYNC hardware input/output ports and LED indicators onto the mainframe. Allows systems with the same base ORION card to be synced. Additionally Requires DS-OPT-NET software option for synchronization under DS-7 software.

DEWE-3040-RM Specifications

Input specifications

Slots for DAQ or PAD modules

MDAQ-SUB positions

DEWE-3040-RM - DAQ version

16

When 16 DAQ slots are installed, up to 48 more channels of MDAQ can be added to the system, for 64 channels total. Consult Dewetron for configuration assistance.

DEWE-3040-RM - MDAQ version

48 possible channels

Up to 8 x 2.0U MDAQ-DSUB (64 channels) plus two

1.5U MDAQ-SUB-BNC (16 channels) can be installed (80 channels maximum).

Main system

Total PCI slots

Hard disk

Data throughput to disk

Power supply

Display

Processor

RAM

Ethernet

USB

RS232

Operating system

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Free PCI slots

Free PCIe slots

Environmental specifications

Operating temperature

Humdity

Vibration

Shock

Required to complete this model

Conditioners:

A/D card(s)

2 x full-length PCI slots (one is used by the standard A/D card) plus 2 x full-length PCIe slots are available

C: 100 GB removable C drive / 500 GB removable D drive (optional solid state drive)

80 MB/s typical; faster rates available with the additional of an internal RAID controller and/or additional drives

120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz AC mains power.

19” SXGA display, 1280 x 1024 px, with resistive touchscreen. Display is removable, and can be mounted backwards when not in use.

Intel 8-core i7 2.0 GHz CPU, on a standard ATX mainboard

4 GB standard

3 x ethernet interfaces standard (1 Gb)

Four x USB 2.0 interfaces available

One serial interface on a DB9 connector available

Microsoft Windows7 32-bit included (upgrades to 64-bit will be available Summer 2013)

425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.)

10 kg typical (22 lbs)

One (the standard ORION-1616-100 A/D card uses one of the PCI slots)

Two

-20 to 50C (0 to 45C with batteries installed) (storage temp -20 to 60C)

10 to 80% non-condensing, 5 to 95% relative humidity

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

MIL-STD-810F, EN 60068-2-27

Software

Any 16 DAQ series plugin modules Up to 80 MDAQ series channels

The ORION-1616-100 is included as standard. You may upgrade this card as follows:

UP-ORION-16-22 upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add antialiasing filters (AAF), max. SR remains at 100 kS/s/ch

UP-ORION-16-24

UP-ORION-16-22-32

UP-ORION-100-1000

UP-ORION-100-200-8

8 channels

UP-ORION-100-1000-8 upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max. SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 22-bits, add AAF, increase from 16 to 32 analog channels upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch upgrade the resolution to 24-bits, add AAF, max.SR increases to 200 kS/s/ch, decrease to upgrade the max. SR to 1000 kS/s/ch, decrease to 8 channels

DS-7-SE data acquisition software is included as standard*

32 analog channels, or multiple video cameras, or DEWE-CAM-FW-70, or DEWE-CLOCK use requires upgrade to

PROF edition.

64+ analog channels requires upgrade to DSA edition.

LabVIEW VIs are available for Dewetron ORION series A/D cards and DAQ series signal conditioners.

Popular upgrades

Counter expansion (UP-ORION-CTR8)

Synchronization interface (UP-ORION-SYNC)

Upgrades the A/D card from 8 TTL digital I/Os and 2 TTL counter / encoders to:

8 synchronous TTL digital inputs protected up to 25 VDC

8 synchronous counter / encoder or 24 digital inputs with programmable threshold levels (0-40 V), input voltage range

-35 to 60 V, AC/DC coupling

Includes DB37 pin connectors installed

Installs the SYNC hardware input/output ports and LED indicators onto the mainframe. Allows systems with the same base ORION card to be synced. Additionally Requires DS-OPT-NET software option for synchronization under DS-7 software.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3040-RM | 7-147

Input specifications

Digital Isolation (ORION-BASE-DI-ISO)

HDD upgrade to solid state disks

DEWE-3040-RM - DAQ version DEWE-3040-RM - MDAQ version

Isolation for the 16 digital inputs of ORION base cards.

Input low: 0 - 2 V, Input high: 3 - 50 V bandwidth: DC up to 1MHz

Isolation voltage between channels: 150 VDC

Isolation voltage between Input and Output: 250 VDC

Connector: DSUB-37 connector (replaces standard digital I/O connector)

HDD-UP-SSD-120 Upgrade to 120 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-240 Upgrade to 240 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 90 MB/s

HDD-UP-SSD-480 Upgrade to 480 GB flash disk (replaces standard spinning hard disk), $ no moving parts, max. data throughput 100 MB/s

Adds an internal IRIG or GPS time code interface (does not require a PCI slot) Time code interface

Popular interface add-ons

CAN expansion (UP-ORION-CAN2)

IRIG / GPS time code (DEWE-CLOCK-INT)

VIDEO-FG-4

ARINC-429 / 1553 interfaces

Adds 2 synchronous high speed CAN bus interfaces to the ORION card inside the system. Includes two DB9 factory installed connectors for these counters on the side panel of the DEWE-3050, and rear panel of the DEWE-3040 and

DEWE-3050. Includes DS-OPT-CAN software option supporting CAN BUS interface.

IRIG or GPS synchronized clock source for DEWETRON systems, installed inside a new DEWETRON base unit

Input: IRIG signal code A or B, AM or DC, or GPS signal

Output: TTL clock from 10 Hz to 10 MHz, PPS and ORION-DSA-SYNC, IRIG-B DC

Uses one USB interface (requires DS-PROF or higher)

Please order GPS antenna GPS-ANT-1 separately (if GPS is needed)

Adds a four channel VIDEO INPUT PCI/e card to the system. Four BNCs for analog NTSC video input on the right side panel, allowing four video streams to be recorded in sync with the data

Adds a multi-channel ARINC-429 or MIL-STD-1553 interface to the system. Available as a single PCI/e card with either or both interfaces on it, or as separate external USB interfaces. See the INTERFACES section for a comprehensive list.

External channel expansion

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series modules Add one or more EPAD2 series external signal conditioners to your system. Each one provides 8 thermocouple,

RTD, low voltage, or low current inputs. EPAD2 modules can be daisy-chained up to 8 modules per system. CPAD2 modules are the same except with CAN BUS interface.

Additional Specifications

ORION-1616-100 A/D specifications

Number of analog channels

Bit-resolution

Maximum sample rate

Input configuration

ADC type

Channel separation (cross-talk)

DC accuracy

Signal to noise

Interchannel gain mismatch

Interchannel phase mismatch

8 channels

16-bit ADC converters (one per channel)

14.7 effective number of bits

100 kS/s/ch simultaneous

Single-ended (note that the DAQ, HSI, or MDAQ conditioners are in front of the ORION card, and serve as the differential front-end for your signals.

Successive approximation (SAR)

> 90 dB @ fin 1 kHz

±0.02 % of reading ±0.013 % of range

89 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) 0 dBFS input < -86 dB

THD (fin = 1kHz) -20 dBFS input < -93 dB

±0.015 %

0.02° * fin (kHz) + 0.08°

7-148 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Digital I/O and Clock line specs

Digital input lines

Digital input characteristics

Digital output lines

Digital output characteristics

Clock divider output line

16

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level -0.7 V to 0.8 V

High voltage level 2 V to 5 V

Pull-up with 100 kΩ resistor

Input capacitance < 5pF

Input protection -1 V to 6 V

8

TTL/CMOS signal levels:

Low voltage level < 0.4 V @ 4 mA load

High voltage level > 3 V @ 4 mA load

Output current

Sink (low level) -20 mA Source (high level) 20 mA

Output impedance 50 Ω

1, same characteristics as digital output lines

Standard counter/encoder specs

Standard counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Time base accuracy

Measurement modes

Standard counter/encoder signal levels

Overvoltage input protection

2 x 32-bit (LEMO connectors for each)

Note - used as pair counters when advanced features are used. If you need two or more full-featured counters, please order the UP-ORION-CTR8

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

25 ppm

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

TTL/CMOS, pull-up with 100 kΩ

Input low level: -0.7 V to 0.8 V

Input high level: +2 to +5V

(DI 0 to DI 7): ±25 V continuous

(DI 8 to DI 15): -1 to 6 V

Advanced counter/encoders (UP-ORION-CTR8 option)

Advanced counter/encoders

Counter timebase

Measurement modes

Signal levels

Trigger adjustment range

Trigger level accuracy

Common voltage range

Overvoltage input protection

Max. DC level @ AC coupling:

8 advanced 32-bit counters

80 MHz (40 MHz max. input frequency)

Event counting, up/down counting, gated event counting, period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and encoder measurements

Symmetrical, differential

AC/DC coupling selectable

0 to 40 VDC with 40 mV resolution

±100 mV ±1% of trigger level

-35 to 50V

±100 V continuous

±50 V continuous

CAN BUS specs (UP-ORION-CAN2 option)

High-speed CAN interfaces

Bus pin fault protection

ESD protection

Physical layer

Compatibility

2 CAN 2.0B high speed interfaces

±36 V

12kV

High speed

2.0B standard, J1939 protocol support

OBD II via software option

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-149

8

signal Connections / Counters

Analog input connections

Because DEWETRON systems are compatible with so many different DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, EPAD, CPAD, and other

Dewetron modules, please refer to those signal conditioners in the Appendix for complete details about how to connect your signals to them.

Choice of Cables

Voltage cables should be instrumentation grade 50 Ω cables with a braided shield. Using good quality cables can make the difference between making a good measurement and not.

Why spend thousands of dollars on a powerful data acquisition system, and then apply low quality cables?

Long cable runs should use twisted pairs, where each pair is individually shielded. Then the entire cable should have a shield around all of the pairs, and a high quality insulation.

Thermocouple cables should be instrumentation grade thermocouple wires with a high quality insulation. It is not necessary to shield thermocouple cables.

Shielding Best Practices

Normally a cable’s main shield will drain into the ground pin on the Dewetron side. It is a best practice NOT to connect the cable drain shield on both sides. This will help you to avoid ground loops (voltage potential differences which can adversly influence the measurements.

8-150 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Counter/Encoder input connections

The DEWE-321x is suited with synchronous 32-bit advanced counter and digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter function like simple event counting, up/down counting and gated event counting also period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and all encoder measurements are supported.

All counter inputs can also be used as digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter input selections, the

ADC clock can also be used as counter source. The figure below shows the block diagram of the counter and input overvoltage protection.

1) Pull-up resistors 2) Over-voltage protection 3) Buffers

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-151

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Counter Applications

each counter block is equipped with three inputs. With this three inputs the following applications can be done:

Event Counting

Gated Event Counting

Up/Down Counter

Frequency Measurement

Period Time Measurement / Pulse Width Measurement

Two Pulse Edge Separation

Quadrature Encoder (X1, X2, X4, A-Up/B-Down)

Event Counting

In Event Counting the counter counts the number of pulses that occur on counter source. At each sample clock the counter value is read without disturbing the counting process. The figure below shows an example of event counting where the counter counts eight events on Counter Source. The synchronized value is the value read at the sample clock (see the encircled numbers in the figure, e.g. (1), (2), (3)... ).

Event counting figure :

8-152 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Software setup:

If counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-153

Gated Event Counting

Gated Event Counting is similar to Event Counting except that the counting process is gated. When the counter gate is active, the counter counts pulses which occur at the counter source. When the counter gate is inactive the counter retains the current count value. At each sample clock interval the current value is read.

The figure below shows an example of gated event counting where the counter counts three events on the counter source. At (1) and (2) the counter value is zero, because the gate signal is inactive. At sample clock

(3), (4) and (5) the actual counter value is read out. At (6) the same value as at (5) is output.

Gated event counting figure:

Software setup:

If counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.

8-154 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Up/Down Counter

The Up/Down Counter counts the rising edges on the counter source. The direction of the counting depends on the signal state on the counter aux pin. If counter aux is active (high level), the counter value increases; if counter aux is inactive (low level), the counter value decreases.

Up/Down counting figure:

Software setup:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-155

Period Time Measurement

In Period Time Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the period time of the signal present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base which occurs between two rising edges on Counter Source. At the completion of the period interval the counter value is stored in a register and the counter starts counting from zero. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the register value is read out.

Period time measurement figure:

Software setup:

8-156 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Pulse Width Measurement

In Pulse Width Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the pulse width of the signal present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base after a rising edge occurs on counter source. At the falling edge on Counter Source the counter value is stored in a reg- ister and the counter is set to zero. With the next rising edge on Counter Source the counter starts counting again. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6) ) the register value is read out.

Pulse width measurement figure:

Software setup:

Note: to measure the LOW time of the signal, invert the input.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-157

Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement

The two pulse edge separation measurement is similar to the pulse width measurement, except that there are two input signals: Counter Start and Counter Stop. After a rising edge has occurred on Counter Start the counter counts rising edges of the internal time base. Additional edges on signal start are ignored. After a rising edge has occurred on Counter Stop the counter stops counting and the value is stored in a register.

At the next rising edge on Counter Start the counter starts counting from zero again. At every Sample Clock

((1), (2), ... (6)) the register value is read out.

Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement figure:

Software setup:

If the input signals are inverted, the falling edges will be used for counting.

8-158 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Motion Encoders

Motion encoders have usually three channels: channel A, B and Z. Channel A and channel B provide the square signals for the counter, and have a phase shift of 90°. From this phase shift the decoder is able to recognize the rotation direction of the motion encoder. The third channel outputs one pulse at a certain position at each revolution. This pulse is used to set the counter to zero. The number of counts per cycle at a given motion encoder depends on the type of decoding: X1, X2, or X4. Some motion encoders have two outputs, which work in a different way. Either channel A or channel B provides the square signal, depending on the direction of the rotation.

The next sections illustrate the basic encoder modes that are supported:

Quadrature Encoder

In the first case, X1 decoding is explained. When Input A leads Input B in a quadrature cycle, the counter increments on rising edges of Input A. When Input B leads Input A in a quadrature cycle, the counter decre- ments on the falling edges of Input A. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (9)) the counter value is read out.

Quadrature Encoder X1 Mode figure:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-159

For X2 encoding the rising edges and the falling edges of Input A are used to increment or decrement. The counter increments if Input A leads Input B and decrements if Input B leads Input A.

Quadrature Encoder X2 Mode figure:

Similarly, the counter increments or decrements on each edge of Input A and Input B for X4 decoding. The condition for increment and decrement is the same as for X1 and X2.

Quadrature encoder X4 figure:

8-160 | OWNER’s GUIDE

The third channel Input Z, which is also referred as the index channel, causes the counter to be reloaded with zero in a specific phase of the quadrature cycle. The figure below shows the results for X1 encoding with input Z.

Quadrature Encoder with channel Z figure:

Software setup:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-161

A-Up/B-Down Encoder

The A-Up/B-Down Encoder supports two inputs, A and B. A pulse on Input A increments the counter on its rising edges. A pulse on Input B decrements the counter on its rising edges. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2),

... (9)) the counter value is read out.

A-up/B-down Encoder figure:

Software setup:

8-162 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Frequency Measurement

In general it is possible to take the inverse of a period measurement to get the frequency of the input signal.

If the period time measurement is done an inaccuracy of counted internal time base cycles of ±1 cycle ap- pears, because the counted cycles of the internal time base depends on the phase of the input signal with re- spect to the internal time base. For long period times, and therewith low frequencies, the measurement error is negligible. At high frequencies, and therewith short period times, few cycles are counted. In this case the error of ±1 cycle becomes significant.

Accuracy at period time measurement figure:

For higher precision result the frequency measurement is done with two counters. In each case two counters are paired, i.e. it have to be used counter 0 and counter 1 or counter 2 and counter 3 or counter 4 and counter 5 or counter 6 and 7 for the frequency measurement. The first coun- ter counts the rising edges on

Counter Source. The second counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base. At every rising edge on Counter Source the counter value of the second counter is stored in a register. At every Sample Clock

((1), (2), ... (6)) the values of both counters are read out.

Frequency measurement figure:

With these both measurement results not only the frequency can be calculated in a precise way. Also the event counter result can be show in fractions because the exact time when the event occurs at the input is known. The event counting result is recalculated with interpolation to the exact sample point like shown in the diagram above.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-163

In the next figure, the difference of the measurement result is shown. While a standard counter input shows the value up to one sample delayed, the counter input of the counter calculates the counter result at the exact sample point:

For low frequency input signals the frequency also can be obtained by measure the period time and take its inverse without more inaccuracy.

Period, pulsewidth, and duty cycle

Software setup:

8-164 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Miscellaneous counter functions

Filters

Each counter input has a digital filter, which can be set to various gate times. If the gate time is set to “Off”, no filter is on the input signal. The purpose of filtering is to eliminate unstable states, e.g. glitches, chatter,et al, which may appear on the input signal. Noise can be mis-counted, and should therefore be eliminated.

The filter circuit samples the input signal on each rising edge of the internal time base. If the input signal maintains his state for at least the gate time, the new state is propagated. As an effect the signal transition is shifted by the gate time.

The figure demonstrates the function of the filter:

Below, input signal with chatter, before and after filtering:

The filter can be chosen between eight filter settings:

Off, 100 ns, 200 ns, 500 ns, 1 μs, 2 μs, 4 μs and 5 μs.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL CONNECTIONs | 8-165

Two examples of filter settings:

The 100 ns filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 100 ns or longer. It will block all pulse widths that are 75 ns or shorter. The 5 μs filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 5 μs or longer and will block all pulse widths that are 4.975 μs or shorter.

The internal sampling clock (time base) is 80 MHz, so the period time amounts 12.5 ns. Pulse widths be- tween gate time minus two internal time base period times may or may not pass, depending on the phase of the input signal with respect to the internal time base.

Properties of all filter settings:

Reset on start measure

Usually all counters are reset at the start of data acquisition, i.e., the counter value is set to zero at the start of data acquisition. In some applications this is not required. For example, an angle encoder is adjusted to the physical zero position at the beginning of a test procedure. By resetting the counter at every start of the measurement this adjustment will be lost. Without this reset the counter is also active if the acquisition is interrupted between the test cycles. As a result the counter types out the absolute angle position at the measurement output all the time.

Count Direction

As default setting the count direction is in up-counting mode. Every rising edge at the input will increase the counter value. The DEWE-ORION-1616-10x supports also down counting without the need of an additional input like in the up/down counting mode.

No new value available

Especially in every kind of input period time measurement mode (also pulse width or two pulse edge separation measurement) there may be new information between two samples. Also measuring the line frequency of about 50 Hz with a sample rate of 10 kSamples/sec means, that only after every 200th measurement new input frequency information is available. Another example is the measurement on rotating machines if the sensor output frequency is lower than the sample rate. Depending on the application you can choose between two different output data settings:

„

„

Repeat last value: last measured cycle time is taken until a new measured cycle time is available

Make zero value: as soon as no input information is available the output is set to zero

8-166 | OWNER’s GUIDE

9

software Overview

your DEWETRON system is compatible with several software applications. For turn-key data acquisition, we offer DEWEsoft 7, aka Ds-7 for short. This is a very powerful yet fairly easy to use application that has reached wide acceptance among nearly all DEWETRON customers worldwide. It is the ideal application for R&D applications, since it can be so quickly configured to handle quickly changing requirements.

If your application is more industrial in nature, especially involving closed-loop testing, ATP testing, process control and automation, the software of choice is normally LabVIEW from National Instruments. LabVIEW is a powerful development environment used by many thousands of engineers and technicians worldwide.

DEWETRON offers robust LabVIEW drivers, socalled VI;s (virtual instruments), that you can drop onto your worksheet and integrate our ORION cards and DAQ series signal conditioners very easily.

This section will provide the basic specifications of both

DS-7 turn-key software application, as well as the LabVIEW drivers now available from DEWETRON for ORION series

A/D cards and DAQ series isolation signal conditioners.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-167

9-168 | OWNER’s GUIDE

LabVIEW Drivers for ORION and DAQ Modules

Dewetron customers creating automated test systems, manufacturing test, or any special function system, rely on LabVIEW from National Instruments as their development environment.

LabVIEW is perhaps the best known application of its type, all around the world. It’s no surprise therefore that DEWETRON has developed robust VIs (virtual instruments) that you can drop directly onto your LabVIEW application, integrating our hardware easier than ever before.

You might be aware that it is possible to program on top of

Dewesoft as well, but you need to run Dewesoft at least hidden, and have a paid license for it. But using DEWETRON’s

LabVIEW VIs you get native LabVIEW support for our hardware, and eliminate the need for Dewesoft.

Hardware Supported by DEWETRON’s LabVIEW VI’s

DEWETRON ORION series A/D cards are supported, including:

„ ORION 16-bit A/D cards

„

„

ORION 22-bit A/D cards

ORION 24-bit A/D cards

In addition, we’ve been adding our DAQ series plug-in ISOLA-

TION modules, starting with these most popular models:

„

„

DAQP-STG - universal / strain / bridge module

DAQP-HV - high voltage module

„ DAQP-LV - low voltage module

Additional DAQ series modules are being added all the time, according to our customer requests.

DwDAQ Library for LabVIEW

There are 15 VI’s as of this writing:

Using these functions you can setup the

A/D card, read its current settings, and more importantly, configure it the way that you want, including which channels to acquire, the acquisition rate, and how many samples to get from the card. Error checking is built in, so that you can verify at every step that the hardware is doing what you expect.

LabVIEW Drivers for ORION and DAQ Modules

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-169

DAQP Signal Conditioner Implementation

A great assortment of functions are provided so that you can control your DAQP signal conditioners. In particular we have implemented the three most popular ones as shown at left, but more modules will be added to the mix over time.

DAQP modules are controlled by way of the RS485 interface that is built into the ORION card (complete functionality is built in for module control). But for those applications where only DEWETRON DAQP series modules are used without

DEWETRON ORION A/D cards, you can still control the DAQP modules using a traditional serial interface that connects your computer to the DEWE-30 “rack” that holds your DAQP modules.

No matter what the application, with or without ORION cards, we have created a great library of LabVIEW VIs that will allow you to create your project more easily than you ever imagined.

Top level COUNTER related functions, from the DEWETRON LabVIEW manual

9-170 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Counter Inputs and Counter Expansion

ORION cards also have synchronous counter/encoder inputs on them, as well as digital I/O lines. These are also implemented in the VIs, using their own functions. The top level nine functions are shown in the figure at right. Below these are an array of subfunctions that allow you to read and control every function of the counters. Certain ORION cards have a

“counter expansion” option installed, which means that not only that there are additional counters (and digital input) lines are installed, but also that the counters have adjustable threshold levels. These advanced capabilities can be controlled from within the VI, too, if they are installed.

Digital I/O Lines

Every ORION card also provides at least 8 digital input and 8 digital output lines. These are TTL level lines as a standard, but can be expanded in quantity and voltage input capability via various hardware options. Once again, these lines are accessible via a group of related functions in the VI.

You can query the card to find out how many analog inputs, counters, and digital I/O lines that are installed, so that you know exactly what the hardware capabilities are in order to implement them perfectly in your application.

Top level COUNTER related functions, from the DEWETRON LabVIEW manual

CAN BUS Input Channel Functions

Finally, ORION cards feature optional CAN BUS interfaces, and there is a group of nine functions related to controlling these ports, setting up the messages and channels within them, scaling them, and more. You can both read from and write to the CAN BUS, creating a complete implementation of CAN BUS data in sync with your analog and other digital channels.

Sample LabVIEW Application

We have written a sample LabVIEW application that works with our hardware. Installing it will also install the LabVIEW drivers that you would need to start your own developments.

This is a great time saver and will start you off in the right direction.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-171

DEWESoft Turn-key Application (DS-7)

DEWETRON customers in the R&D world don’t want to write software, or run on LINUX - they just want a turn-key software application that can be used within minutes. DEWESoft (DS-7 for short) is a great package that perfectly supports most DEWETRON hardware.

Key DS-7 Capabilities and Features

Runs under Windows

DS-7 was written specifically for Windows, and does not run on any other operating system. But that’s perfectly fine for test and measurement specialists in the research sector. Data acquisition systems used in this sector are typically used for something different all the time, and flexibility is more important than long-term stability.

The feature set provided by DS-7 is truly impressive. You can acquire high speed (dynamic) data from

DEWETRON ORION and TRION series hardware (plus all of our signal conditioners), as well as hundreds of channels of asynchronous data from CAN, ARINC, 1553, SERIAL, and more.

Easy visualization

One of the most popular aspects of DS-7 is how easy it makes it for you to arrange the screens just the way that you like them. It provides recorder graphs, scopes, analog and digital meters, 2D and 3D graphs, tabular displays, text objects, X-Y graphs, and more. Place them in any arrangement and assign the channels into them that you want. DS-7 makes that very fast and easy. The entire setup is saved, so you can create countless configurations and recall them in a matter of seconds.

MATH functions

DS-7 includes a rich set of pre-made MATH functions that you can apply to your data DURING recording, or

AFTER recording. These include programmable filters, integration, FFT analysis, and so much more. When the computer is not powerful enough to handle what you want to do in real-time, you can set any or all of the MATH functions to be processed after recording. DS-7 is not as powerful as a real analysis tool such as

Flexpro or Matlab, but it’s pretty darn good for the money.

9-172 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DS-7 Software Specifications

DEWESoft software specifications

Data file size

Setup files

Setup file format

Data file format

No restrictions, however we suggest to keep files to within 8 GB for your convenience

A setup file contains all hardware settings and all display settings that can be configured within the software. An unlimited number of setup files may be saved for easy loading and re-use any time in the future

XML data format is used with D7s extension or XML extension

Binary file with XML header portion containing the entire setup file, with D7d extension. A library DLL is available for adding Dewesoft 7 data file importation into any software program under your control. Several commercially available analysis programs have added direct reading of Dewesoft 7 data files in this way, including

Matlab®, Flexpro®, and nCode®.

Data display

Built-in screens

Screen design

Data display widgets (standard)

Data display widgets (optional)

Scope, Overview, Recorder, FFT, Video, Power

Every display screen can be modified by the user

Screens can be deleted, and new screens added

Subscreens may be added below main screens

Screens may be renamed and moved on the toolbar

Recorder (y/t strip chart) graph, horizontal, up to 16 channels/graph

Recorder (strip chart) graph, vertical, 1 channels/graph

Scope y/t graph, up to 32 channels/graph

Digital meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable

Analog meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable

Bar graph, horizontal or vertical, with color coded alert levels, user programmable

X-Y graph, X-YYY or 4 x X-Y, linear or angle based X-Y modes supported

FFT graph, up to 4 channels/graph

2D array graph

3D array graph

Background image container

Video display container

GPS track display container, compatible with map background images

Discrete display, LED with color change, user programmable

Discrete display, Alphanumeric, user programmable messages based on discrete levels

Text container, user programmable

Line tool, for drawing connections from meters/graphs to other widgets

Vectorscope, harmonic FFT for voltage and current (included with DEWESoft-OPT-

POWER)

Third-octave display (included with DEWESoft-OPT-SNDLVL)

On-line and Off-line MATH

Function blocks included Formula editor: user-programmable arithmetic, algebra, trigonometry, boolean logic, measuring functions (time distance and ampltitude delta), and more.

Filtering: IIR, FIR, FFT, and Envelope

Integration, Double integration, Derivation and Double derivation (IIR filter module)

Polynomial / coefficient scaling (IIR filter module)

Basic statistics, array statistics, Latch math, counting functions, classification

Reference curves: Y/T, X/Y, and FFT

Constant function

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-173

DEWESoft software specifications

Function blocks (continued)

Math channel operation modes

Exact frequency calculation

CA noise (included with DEWESoft-OPT-CA combustion analyzer)

Angle sensor (user definable angle-based sensor toolkit)

FFT, SFFT, CPB

Scope trigger math function

Strain gage rosette calculator

Math channels can be created before or after recording

Math channels created before recording may be set to not process until after recording, or may be set to process during recording

Math functions created after recording can be processed on a subset of the data, or all of the data

New channels resulting from math channels are saved to the data file, both before and after recording

On-screen analysis capabilities

Cursor measurements

Data zoom in/out

Data replay

Replay speed and direction

Data export capabilities

Recorder graphs have selectable cursors which can be used to take precise measurements anywhere within the data, or any channels

Delta ampltidue and delta time are calculated, displayed, and printable

Cursors can be locked individually

Graph may still be zoomed/unzoomed when cursors are locked

Cursors and their readings appear on the paper when screen is printed

Any recorder graph can be used to zoom the data in or out, as many times as necessary

Data can be replayed to make it look like it did when recording

Replay can be increased or decreased in speed up to 8000x

Replay can be forward or reverse

Export file formats available

Export selection

Export channel selection

Export mode

Export timebase

Software licensing and distribution

Acquisition mode

Analysis mode

Matlab®, Flexpro, Excel®, delimited ASCII text

Diadem®, Universal 58, FAMOS®, nsoft time series, Sony log, RPC III, Comtrade®,

ATI®, Technical Data Management TDM, Impression Diadem®, Standard Data File,

WFT, Replay RPL, Wave (audio wav), Google Earth® KML

The area zoomed using the cursors will be exported.

If no zooming has been done, the entire data file will be exported

Any combination of channels may be exported, from 1 to all

Data may be exported at the full acquisition rate, or at the reduced storage rate.

When reduced is chosen, user may select to export up to four columns per channel: min, max, ave, rms

User selectable absolute time, relative time, or trigger (zero) time

A valid DEWESoft license is required to RECORD (acquire) data

No license is required to use DEWESoft to analyze data

DEWESoft may be given to third parties for installation and use to analyze data files

Off line math, zooming, printing, and data export are all supported

9-174 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWESoft software specifications

Input sensor types supported

Analog sensors

Digital inputs

Video sensors

Sound sensors

GPS sensors

Inertial sensors

BUS interfaces supported

CAN BUS

ARINC 429

MIL-STD-1553

PCM data

Virtually all analog type sensors are supported (see Conditioners section for compatibility details), abbreviated list:

Strain gages, accelerometers, microphones, RTDs, thermocouples, load cells, force sensors, voltages, currents, string potentiometers, LVDTs, resistive sensors

Digital I/O “discrete” lines, position encoders, tachometers, frequency meters

USB and Firewire webcams which support DirectShow/DirectX under Windows7®

Gig-E ethernet video camera (DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-50 option)

Synchronized Firewire camera (DEWE-CAM-01 option)

NSTC and PAL video streams (VIDEO-FG-4 option)

IEPE and charge type microphones (see analog sensors)

Compatible with:

DEWE-VGPS-200C, NMEA compatible GPS stream, Leane V-SAT®, Racelogic

VBOX II® GPS, Javad® GPS, Microsat® GPS

Compatible with:

XSENS MTI® and MTI-G® series MEMS based sensors (requires PLUGIN-XSENS software option)

Genesys ADMA® series gyro / GPS platforms (requires PLUGIN-ADMA software option)

CAN 2.0B, with several additional protocols, including J1939 and OBD II (optional interface and software option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN)

Importation of Vector DBC files is included with this option

Note: CAN output is available via option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-OUT)

This option also includes a Vector license for the export of Vector DBC files

Hardware supported:

All Dewetron CAN hardware, Softing® CAN PCI and USB, Vector® CAN, National

Instruments® PCI-CAN/2 card

Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally available.

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally available.

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

Internal full-length PCI format bit-sync/decom interface optionally available

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-PCM

Requires a model with a full length PCI slot available, or external expansion chassis with PCI slot(s).

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-175

DS-7 Operation Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis

Where to Start?

Turn on your Dewetron system. When Windows is loaded, find the DS-7 icon on the desktop. It looks like this:

Double-click it. When DS-7 loads, it will be in the ACQUISITION mode by default, showing any existing

SETUP FILES that you have created. It should look like this:

The files might also look like icons. This is selectable near the top right corner of the window using these buttons:

You can load any setup file by simply double-clicking it from this page. But don’t do that yet: let’s make a new setup file. Before doing anything, we need to cover some questions that you might have already:

What kind of files are these?

These are SETUP files. In the ACQUISITION mode you create a system setup, which is used to record a

DATA file.

Are these my data files?

No, these are not data files. You cannot see or load your data files in the ACQUISITION mode!

Why can’t I see my data files?

You can if you change to the ANALYSIS mode. But DEWESoft starts up in the ACQUISITION mode by default.

9-176 | OWNER’s GUIDE

What is the difference between ACQUIsITION and ANALysIs modes? Why do I need them?

ACQUISITION - in this mode you set up the system and store (record) your data

ANALYSIS - in this mode you can see your stored data, print it out, export it, and analyze it further

Where is my data stored? How do I get to it?

It’s stored on the hard drive. And don’t worry, we will be loading and replaying captured data files in a few minutes!

Start with a Blank Setup

Click [Ch. Setup] in the ribbon:

When you do this, you will be on the ANALOG setup screen first. This is where you set up the analog inputs of your system. You might have other setup screens for DIGITAL, COUNTER, CAN, VIDEO and more inputs… but let’s focus on the analog inputs in this QuickStart. Notice that the Analog screen is highlighted in yellow when selected.

Below it you will see your channels. How this looks will vary according to which kinds of signal conditioners your system has, and how many channels. Here is a system with eight DAQ modules:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-177

Notice that DEWESoft automatically activates the first channel for you. You need to activate the ones that you want to store when you record data.

Each channel is shown on one row which has these fields: Slot, On/Off, (Color), Name, Amplifier, Physical

Values, CAL, and SETUP:

9-178 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Activate the Channels

All channels that are set to USED will be stored when you press STORE. It does not matter whether the channel is shown on the display screen or not! If it is activated here as USED, it will be stored. It is possible to activate a channel but not store it - this is an advanced feature not covered here.

To turn on more channels, simply press their [Unused] buttons, and they will change to [Used].

HINT: to turn on (or off) all channels at once, click the top of the column and select from the menu that will appear:

“Select all” will turn ON all channels, while “Deselect all” will turn them all OFF.

Set Up Your Channels

The easiest and most direct way to configure a channel is to click the “Set ch. #” button all the way to the right:

To configure channel 0, for example, click the [Set ch. 0] button.

The channel setup dialog will appear. This is a critical screen to learn about, so let’s take a close look at what it does and how to use it.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-179

Channel Setup Dialog

This dialog seems complex at first, but it’s really quite simple once you understand what it contains and how to use it. There are four sections:

9-180 | OWNER’s GUIDE

PART 1: signal conditioner hardware control (top-right quadrant)

It is best to configure this section first, because this actually conthe signal conditioning HARDWARE. In the example above, we a DAQP-LV low voltage module, which has two basic input types: age and current.

Assuming we want to measure voltage, simply set the RANGE the selector: trols have voltusing

Now set the filter (if you have an MDAQ system, you may or may not have the filter option). Different signal conditioners have different settings, so please refer to the details about them. In this quick start we will just use voltage modules and keep it simple.

In our example we set the range to 50V. Have a look at the reference section and you will see this on the

LEFT SIDE of the bar graph. Note that if you change the range, this will change directly below on the bar graph:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-181

PART 2: channel name, units, color… (top-left quadrant)

Now enter a short name for this input channel, any additional info you want into the next field, and then the UNIT OF MEASURE. This is important to do before moving to the next section.

In the example above, we are configuring a channel which will be used to measure air pressure in PSI.

You can also set the color here. The “Min value” and “Max value” and “Sample rate divider” fields will be explained later. These are more advanced, so please ignore them for now.

9-182 | OWNER’s GUIDE

PART 3: Scale/CAL your channel (bottom-left quadrant)

In this section you enter whatever scaling your input needs.

-

NOTE : If you are simply measuring voltage from a voltage module, you don’t need to do any scaling (unless the voltage has been stepped down before being input to the Dewetron system).

Let’s say that your transducer outputs 1V for 500 PSI. All you need to do is enter these values into the “by two points” fields, as shown here:

In other words, when your sensor outputs 0V, this represents 0 PSI. But when it outputs 1V, that represents

500 PSI.

This simply establishes the slope of the scaling. In this case it is a linear function which multiplies the input by 500 and changes the UM from V to PSI. You can click the [by function] button and see this algebraically:

This slope is the famous y = mx + b equation from high school. The scaling is created by a multiplier and an offset. In our example, the offset is zero (none). But there are times when the offset is not zero. For example, if you are scaling from Celcius to Fahrenheit. These two temperature measurement systems have placed ZERO at different places: 0° C = 32° F. So to scale from C to F you would set it up like this:

or…

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-183

It doesn’t matter whether you use the 2-point scaling method or the function scaling method to scale your channel! Use whichever one is more comfortable to you and the scaling factor that you prefer. Both of the methods above are the same. They both express the equation C x 1.8 + 32 = F

Reference Check (bottom-right quadrant)

This fourth quadrant of the channel setup screen provides a handy reference, where the ACTUAL input scale is shown on the left side of the bar graph, and the result of your scaling is shown on the right side of the bar graph:

-

or …

NOTE : DEWEsoft will show the data in your scaled units of measurement from this point forward! Of course, the data are really stored unscaled, to preserve all of their resolution, but they are always shown scaled according to what you do here, during and after recording. They are also exported in scaled engineering units.

Look at the channel above on the right, our PSI channel. It shows ±25,000 PSI. But this is too much: your sensor will output only 8 volts max, so the 50V range is too much. No problem! Change the ACTUAL measuring range from 50 to 10V, and look what happens:

>> results in >>

Now the measurement range of 10V yields a scaled measurement range of ±5000 PSI, which is what you were looking for. In this way you can see the relationship between the ACTUAL hardware measuring range and the SCALED measuring range.

9-184 | OWNER’s GUIDE

If everything looks good, then you are ready to move on to the next channel. You can either click [OK] at the bottom of the setup dialog, or click the [ > > ] button to move to the next channel:

Change the Display Scale

One very important thing to note is that the scaled range shown on the right side of the bar graph on the setup screen sets the DEFAULT DISPLAY RANGE for this channel. Therefore, if you were to put this channel into a strip chart, scope, or analog meter gauge on the display screens, the scale will be taken from this bar graph.

Let’s take the example of the thermocouple channel, which is scaled like this:

So, if we put this channel into a strip chart, DEWESoft will set the scale to match the right side of the bar graph, like this:

Note that DEWESoft set the channel’s display scale from -4.5e2 (-454°F) to 2.5e3 (+2498°F).

But what if this range is too much? Let’s say that you expect to only really measure from -100°F to +400°F?

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-185

You can change it right here on the graph, which we will cover later. But even better would be to PRE-set the display scale of this channel, so that when you put it into a graph or meter which has a scale, it will automatically be set to the desired span. How to preset this default display scale? It is back on the channel’s setup screen, in section 2:

Setting the Default Display Range

If you refer back to PART 2: channel name, units, color..., you will find two fields that we skipped over before.

They are labeled “Min value” and “Max value”. By default they say “Auto” in them, which means that the display range of this channel will be set to the same min and max values of the reference bar graph. But you can override that by entering numbers into either or both of these fields!

So in our example, we want the temperature channel’s default range to be -100°F to ±400°F, therefore we would enter that like this:

Note that making this change will not CHANGE the range of any existing graph, but you can coax them to defer to these settings by right-clicking on the channel name within the graph:

9-186 | OWNER’s GUIDE after right-clicking on the channel name inside the graph:

And when you add this channel into graphs for the first time, they will be scaled at -100°F to ±400°F automatically!

Above, the same temperature channel shown in several different kinds of graphs and meters, they all have the default -100°F to +400°F display scale, because you have preset the display scale back on the setup screen for that channel.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-187

Copying Channel Settings

You just learned a lot in setting up that channel. You set the actual hardware range/filter, then moved left to the channel name, description, units, and possibly set the display range, then moved down to do the scaling… all the while keeping an eye on the reference bar graph to ensure that this channel was set correctly.

At this point you might be worrying that this is a lot of work to do on every single analog channel. Is there a shortcut you can take to speed up the process?

Yes! Normally you will have several channels whose configurations are very similar. Here is our set up screen:

OK, you just set the first channel up … and the next three channels are going to be very similar. Their hardware settings will be the same, and possibly even their scaling, display scale settings, etc. How do you copy those settings from channel 0 to the next three channels?

Easy. Click the first box in the SLOT column of the channel that you want to copy:

When you click the SLOT box of any channel, it pops up the Copy/Paste menu. Only Copy is active, since there is nothing to paste yet. Click Copy.

Now click on the SLOT box of channel 1, the next channel down. Suddenly the Paste menu item is active, so click it to paste the settings from Channel 0 to Channel 1:

Now you get some very nice choices, which make the copy/paste process very flexible. Here is what each of

9-188 | OWNER’s GUIDE the three sub choices under Paste source (<module type> : <channel>) means:

„

„

„

Paste - it will simply paste the settings from the channel you copied to this channel, EXCEPT that it will not paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to this channel.

Paste to all - it will paste the settings from the channel you copied to ALL channels, EXCEPT that it will not paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to the other channels.

Paste special… - here you can choose exactly which parameters it will paste from the channel you copied to this channel, or even a range of channels. So if you wanted to really make them all the same color, or paste to a range of channels (example: copy channel 14 and then paste it to channels 23 to 31).

If you select the Paste special... option, you get this screen where you can control what gets pasted, and to which range of channels:

You can click the boxes in the PASTE column to toggle whether this parameter gets pasted or not. As mentioned, the Used/Unused status is not normally pasted from one channel to another, but here we can override that and paste that, too, as well as the channel name, etc. At the top we told it to paste from Slot 1 to Slot 3, so that channels 1, 2, and 3 will receive this paste simultaneously. Click OK to execute the paste, and see what happens:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-189

The Paste Special function turned those three channels on and pasted every parameter except the channel names and colors from channel 0 to channels 1, 2, and 3. Now you can just modify the channel names right here, and you’re ready to go.

Just double-click in the white field under the Name column to directly edit any channels’ name. You don’t need to open up the [Set ch. #] dialog box to enter a name or pick a color.

OK, our analog channels are all set up - let’s make the final adjustments and then record some data.

9-190 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Set the Data File Name

You need to tell DEWESoft what to NAME your captured data file. In other words, you need to set the file name. For this function, please click the File details button in the toolbar:

By default, DEWESoft will put a name like Data into this field. Type in whatever you want, avoiding characters that are illegal to use in Windows filenames, such as $ <> {} [] / \ | ; : , -- you know the list! If you stick with numbers, letters, underscores and hyphens you will be OK.

Automatic Recording STOP function

Let’s say that you want to start storing, and then have DEWESoft record for one hour automatically. Or stop after a certain file size is reached. These functions are easy to control using the Stop storing after checkbox that you can see here. Check it, and some settings controls will appear automatically for you:

With Stop storing after checked, you can set DEWESoft to stop storing automatically based on time (hours, minutes, or seconds), or file size (in MB), or number of triggers within the file.

Automatic File Numbering

Notice the checkbox called Create a Multifile. This means that DEWESoft will automatically name your files for you, so you don’t have to keep entering a new name each time you want to record data.

If you don’t use multifile, and you stored data right now, it would be stored to the filename Data.d7d.

If you come back here, this screen would look different. Do you notice the difference?

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-191

If you saw that the filename “Data” is now written in RED, then you were correct. DEWESoft shows a filename in RED here if this file already exists! So if you were to try and store again, DEWESoft would stop and tell you that this file exists, and give you the chance to either overwrite it with new data, or enter a new name.

To avoid this, check the Multifile box, and then use the setup button that will appear to pre-configure how

DEWESoft will automatically name your files, like so:

The way it is set above, the base part of the filename will be Data, and each time you store data, DEWESoft will add an underscore and then four digits, starting at zero. So you will get a series of data files called:

Data_0000.d7d

Data_0001.d7d

Data_0002.d7d

Data_0003.d7d

Data_0004.d7d

… and so on.

9-192 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Notice also that you could elect to start numbering the files at something higher than 0000. Simply select or enter a starting file number.

Of course, you can change the base part of the filename to anything supported by the Windows OS. In the example below we entered Gear_check as the base part of our filename.

You may also turn on the DATE to be added to the filename. You could also turn on the TIME, which will disable the number at the end (you cannot have both).

In the gray example area, you will see a preview of how your files will be named (as shown above).

Automatic file SWITCHING function

When multifile is not checked, the box below it is called Stop storing after, and as we saw, it allows you to set DEWESoft to stop storing according to how big the file is, or when a certain amount of time has elapsed.

But when multifile is checked, the Stop storing after function changes slightly to be called Make new file after. In this case, DEWESoft will not stop recording per se, but it will close the current data file and immediately open a new one, which will be named according to the active multifile settings. In other words, instead of STOPPING storage outright, DEWESoft will switch to the next file in the series automatically.

Check the box and you will get similar configuration controls as before:

As before, DEWESoft can switch files automatically based on time (absolute or relative), file size, or trigger count. If you want one triggered event per data file, this is the way to do it, for example. Set it to triggers and set the quantity to 1.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-193

Set the Sample Rate

You need to select a sample rate. This is the number of samples per second that DEWESoft will store for each of your active analog channels. If you have four channels active, and you select a sample rate of 10 kS/s for example, DEWESoft will stored 10 thousand samples per second for each of the four channels. This means that 40,000 samples will be stored each second. In a 16-bit system that means 80,000 bytes of data per second. In a 22 or 24-bit system, it is 160,000 bytes of data per second.

Note : Typically you should select a sample rate which is at least twice as high as the highest frequency that you want to measure. The higher the rate, the more time axis resolution you will get, but the bigger the file will get!

You set the rate right here on the ANALOG setup screen, just above the channel list:

Use the Dynamic acquisition rate to set the sample rate. Using the small triangle at the bottom of the field you can change the units of the sample rate, as shown here. So if you think in kiloHertz, for example

(kSamples per second per channel), you can select that instead of Hz/ch). You can work in Hz, kHz, or even

MHz if you have a really fast system. When you change sample rate units, the value shown in the box will also change accordingly.

To select a rate, either choose one from the list that drops down from the little triangle, or simply type one into the field and press ENTER on the keyboard. If DEWESoft cannot do this range, it will correct it and show you what it can do:

There are several storing modes in DEWESoft, but in this first example we are simply going to store manually, by pressing STORE then STOP. Later in this QuickStart guide we will come back and learn how to use reduced storage mode and the triggered modes.

9-194 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Save Your Setup

Everything that you can set up in DEWESoft is saved to a setup file that you can name freely (according to

Windows file naming restrictions of course). It is ALWAYS a good idea to save your setup before moving on from here.

You need to be in the SETUP mode (as we have been for many pages now). On the left side of the toolbar are large buttons for [Save] and [Save as]. If you have not yet named this setup file and you click [Save],

DEWESoft treat this the same as if you had clicked [Save as].

Use [Save as] to save the current setup configuration to a new name. So you can open an existing setup that you like, use [Save as] to make a copy of it under a new name, then change it freely! No need to start from the beginning each time.

WHAT’S NEXT?

Yes, there are many other kinds of channels that Dewetron systems typically have, such as digital inputs, counter/encoders, video cameras, CAN BUS interfaces, and more… but this is a quickstart guide and we will focus on making simple analog input recordings.

There are also several storing methods, such as triggering and reduced data. But for the quickstart we will focus on the ALWAYS FAST mode, which is like a tape recorder: you manually press STORE and DEWESoft records your active input channels at the selected dynamic acquisition rate, until you press STOP.

Are you ready to record some data?

It is better if you have some real signals connected to your channels. Even a simple 9VDC transistor battery, or a function generator that can output a sine wave, is a great way to input signals. If you have nothing but straight lines on the screen, it is impossible to learn how to zoom in, for example.

So please take a moment and connect at least one real signal to your dewetron system, and then let’s move forward to the MEASURE screen, where we will use the default displays and STORE some data.

After that we will learn how to replay it.

Using the Acquisition Screens

When you click ACQUISITION from the ribbon at the top of the DEWESoft window, the default displays will appear: Overview, Scope, Recorder, and FFT:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-195

If this is your first visit to Overview, there will be a digital meter group containing any channels that are set to

USED back on the analog setup screen.

In the example above, just one channel is active.

Note : going back and activating more channels will not automatically add them to this screen - you have to do that manually.

Elements of the Acquisition screen

What exactly do the Acquisition screens contain? It might seem complex at first, but there are really just four main functional groups of objects, as shown here:

9-196 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Notice that four screens are created for you by default. click on the Scope, Recorder, and FFT screens and see how they are set up by default. You can change everything about these screens as mentioned earlier, but for now let’s use them as they are, and then come back to the design functions later.

1. RIBBON AND TOOLBAR - contains the DEWESoft ribbon, where you can navigate among the setup screens, display screens, and design mode. Also contains the toolbar, which has buttons to start and stop storing data, and select which screen to display.

2. PROPERTIES BAR - where you can set the properties of any display widget in the Data display area, as well as the properties of each display screen

3. DATA DISPLAY AREA - where your signals are shown, according to which display screen has been selected from the toolbar

4. CHANNEL LIST - shows your channels, and allows you to assign them into graphs and widgets.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-197

Please click on the Recorder button in the toolbar to activate that display:

The recorder shows you one big graph by default. Or perhaps more graphs depending on how many channels were set to USED when you first come here after leaving the setup screen. We had only one channel

USED, so DEWESoft gave us one graph with our one channel on it. Common questions at this point:

Is my data being stored already? I see it moving on the screen!

No. It is being monitored but not yet stored, because we did not click the STORE button yet.

I see some data that just went by, but I want to save it to disk. Is this possible?

No, data being monitored is not stored. It is not possible to capture it now.

Can I freeze this display right now? What about when I am storing data?

9-198 | OWNER’s GUIDE

To freeze the display when just monitoring data (not storing), press the STOP button. It will change to say

START when you do that, so that you can re-start it moving on the screen.

If you are STORING data, and you press STOP, the recording will STOP and the screen will stop moving.

If you want to freeze the display while DEWESoft continues to store data in the background, use the

FREEZE button instead! This is limited by a RAM buffer, so you cannot freeze the display and look back in time beyond the amount of RAM that is available for this function.

Speed up/Slow down the recorder graph

If the data are scrolling past too slowly or too fast, use the blue [+] and [-]

STORE SOME DATA

Let’s get down to business and record some data. Press the STORE button and the screen will be cleared. A red vertical line appears and your data is now storing to disk. This is also indicated in the LOG in the toolbar area:

Close-up view of the recording log:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-199

Marking your recordings with EVENTS

„

„

„

During recording, you can mark your data in three ways:

Notice event - just hit the spacebar on the keyboard, and a gray line will be time-stamped and added to the recorder graph. This is like the simple event marker of an old fashioned chart recorder.

Text event - press the N key on the keyboard. Click on the log area if necessary to open the log for typing. Just type in whatever you like. The text event will be time-stamped according to when you pressed

N, not when you finish typing, so there is no rush!

Voice event - (requires that sound events be activated in the project configuration, and that your Dewetron system has a usable sound card installed) press and hold V on the keyboard, and talk into your PC mic (not included by Dewetron). A short voice message will be added to the data file.

You will see all of these events later when you reload this captured data to the screen. More about that later.

Each event type is indicated on the screen with a vertical line of a different color. You can also activate them using the little icons near the log area instead of the keyboard shortcuts, as shown here.

Stop storing...

Press the STOP button and the recording will be closed. The screen will freeze.

Reloading your Data Files

This is as simple as pressing the ANALYSIS button near the top-left of the screen! If you have not gone to any other screen since stopping the recording, DEWESoft will automatically load the last data file that you recorded. Here it is!

9-200 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Replay reference strip

Across the top of the DISPLAY AREA is something new: the display reference bar. By default, DEWESoft puts the first channel into this reference strip. When you load a data file, the entire file is displayed.

The beginning of the data is on the left, and the end is on the right.

This reference strip will become very useful when you ZOOM IN on the data. Let’s learn how to do that now

Zooming in and zooming out

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-201

It is important to know how to zoom in and out on various parts of your data, to look closer and make measurements. Notice that when you are in the Analysis mode, there are two grey cursors and one yellow cursor on the screen. The yellow cursor is also shown in the reference strip at the top.

But let’s use the gray cursors to zoom. Simply drag them into position around the area that you want to zoom. Or, you can simply click and drag to the right, then release, to set the cursors.

Now move the pointer between them, and you will notice that it changes to a pointer with a small PLUS symbol below it:

To zoom this area, simply CLICK with your mouse (or touch with your finger, if you have a touchscreen) between these cursors!

Notice what the screen looks like now:

9-202 | OWNER’s GUIDE

See how the area that you zoomed has been highlighted into a little box? This is done to show you WHERE in the data file you are looking on the recorder, and roughly how much of the data is being shown. This is a great reference, and is needed once you start zooming in.

Zoom in again and again!

You can zoom in as many times as you like.

How to unzoom?

There are two ways:

1. Simply RIGHT-CLICK onto the recorder graph, and each zoom that you have done will be un-zoomed in reverse order. So you can step backward through your zooms perfectly.

2. Use the blue MINUS button at the bottom right corner of the recorder graph to reduce the amount of time shown on the graph.

Move the zoom box

The small zoom box shown in the reference strip can be directly moved. Use the mouse and drag it left or right. Or, use the PAGE+UP and PAGE+DOWN buttons on your keyboard to move it in whole steps. You can also move it in half steps by using the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

Make direct measurements on any channel

Simply by moving the pointer along any waveform, DEWESoft will show you a color-coded X and Y values in engineering units in the top-left corner of the recorder graph. The pointer turns into a crosshairs when you

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-203

move it along a waveform. Notice the values shown at the top of the graph:

Using the Cursors

DEWESoft uses these cursors in two ways: to zoom as shown above, and to make measurements on the signals. To make full use of them, activate the cursor checkbox in the properties panel on the left, when your recorder graph is active:

Before you check the box Show cursor values, the delta-T is already shown here. In the screen shot above, notice the label: dt = 6.7 ms f = 149 Hz

Therefore, the delta time between the cursors is less than 7 ms (<0.007 s), and the reciprocal of that time interval is 149 Hz.

Now check the Show cursor values box, and notice that the recorder graph will get a new panel on its right side, which shows the cursor I and cursor II values in a table:

So we see the value of the channel called Master Cylinder at cursor I, cursor II, and then the calculated delta amplitude value.

9-204 | OWNER’s GUIDE

If a recorder graph has more than one channel in it, cursor readings for the other channels will also be shown here, like in this example:

You can also move the cursors and take readings at exact locations. Simply drag each cursor into position.

To prevent accidentally zooming because you clicked in between them, you can LOCK each cursor using the little padlock icons on the properties panel.

Print Out Your Data

You might want to make a print out on paper after recording data. To do this, make the screen look how you want it to appear on the paper by zooming and using the cursor controls. Next, click the PRINT item from the ribbon along the top of the DEWESoft window.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-205

You can turn the page to portrait or landscape orientation using the buttons in the toolbar.

Want to add some text to the page? Simply type it into the text field in the toolbar, and it will appear on the header of the printed page.

Add your company logo to printouts

You can associate a BMP image to DEWESoft, so that it will be printed in the header when you print your data.

Click the Settings menu near the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen. Click on Global setup... to open the dialog box.

9-206 | OWNER’s GUIDE

When the dialog opens, click on the Print tab to see those settings:

Click on the ellipsis […] button and then choose the bitmap (*.bmp) image that you want to appear on your printed output.

Next time you print something, it will have your logo at the top-left.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-207

Export Your Data

You might need to convert the DEWESoft data file to another format, so that you can open it in a different analysis program. You can do this from the Analysis mode. Open a data file, and then zoom in if you want to export only a certain portion of the data file. If you want to export it all, do not zoom in.

After opening a data file, click the EXPORT item from the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen:

Now click the File export button from the toolbar. When you do, you will see a list of file formats that you can convert this data file to. Select any one of them. DEWESoft will put the name of this data file into the Export file name field automatically - however, you can change it to whatever you like. But please do not add the file extension, because DEWESoft will add it automatically.

NOTE : to export to either Excel or Flexpro formats, you need to have these applications on this computer! Otherwise, exporting will not work! This is because Ds-7 needs to communicate with these programs.

Modify the Screens

It is not possible to do this subject justice in such a short manual. But you should know that you can enter the Design mode by clicking the Design button in the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen, and then

9-208 | OWNER’s GUIDE change virtually every aspect of each screen. This is one of the most powerful and popular features of DEW-

ESoft. Have a look at just a few of the screens that you can make in a matter of moments:

Use the hardware STORE and STOP buttons

Some Dewetron instruments include hardware buttons for starting and stopping recording. You may use

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-209

them just like you use the on-screen buttons labeled the same: STORE and STOP. These hardware buttons are active at the same time that the software buttons are active.

The built-in LED will illuminate when data is storing. When you press STOP, the LED will go dark, and the storing will stop.

9-210 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-211

Projects and Global settings

This is part 2 of our QuickStart Guide to DEWESoft 7! It was written at the time of DEWESoft version 7.0.1, however it will remain largely compatible with higher versions of the software. It is meant to help you reach the next level of knowledge with DEWESoft. Part 1 focused 100% on the analog inputs, and using the measure screens as they are. In Part 2, you will see how to configure DEWESoft the way that you like it both at the highest possible level (Global level) as well as at the Project level -- and explain the difference. The

Project level is especially important to learn about, since it never existed before DEWESoft7.

NOTE : In this manual we will often refer to DEWESoft as “DS-7” as shorthand. There is no difference.

What is a Dewesoft Project?

You can consider a Project to be like a “hardware profile,” in that it defines the hardware that you will be using with DEWESoft. It also contains flexible settings that control how the system behaves. Let’s say that you have a computer that you sometimes use a DEWE-43-V (USB connection), and other times you connect a DEWESoft-NET ethernet based system, or other times yet, you use an ORION A/D card and rack of DAQ modules outside your computer.

In DEWESoft6, there was only one global hardware setup, which you would have to change each time you wanted to connect these different pieces of hardware to. But now with “Projects,” you can make and name a hardware profile for each possibility. But a project defines more than just the hardware setup, as we will learn in this QuickStart Guide.

To see your Projects, click the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:

The first item is called Project >

Click it to open the submenu, where you can see your existing Projects, and then some controls below them for adding a new Project, renaming the active Project, removing a Project, etc.

If you have not visited here before, you probably have a single Project called Default (you always need to have at least one Project, otherwise you would have no hardware setup!).

9-212 | OWNER’s GUIDE

In our case, we have a Project called “DEMO,” in which there is no data acquisition hardware defined, and

DEWESoft creates waveforms for demo and training purposes. The checkbox tells us that this is the currently active Project. There is also another project called “DEWE43,” which is used when we connect our

DEWE-43-V unit, and a third Project called “Sound card,” in which we use the computer’s sound card as a two channel sound recorder.

Hardware setup screen

Let’s check the hardware settings of the active Project. Simply click the Hardware setup… menu item. This menu will close and the hardware setup dialog will open.

Hardware setup is where you control all of the hardware connected to your system, as well as the options that you might have purchased for DEWESoft. Your license info is also stored here. There are several screens, starting with ANALOG.

You can see that we have selected No A/D Hardware, since we want this project to be purely for demo and training purposes, even when there is no hardware connected. But we have selected the Amplifiers to be

COM port or offline, so that we can use them in the setup mode for training.

In our other Project where we connect the DEWE-43-V and DAQ modules to make real measurements, the hardware setup screen looks different, of course:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-213

There are other tabs for setting up other input types, such as CAN, GPS, VIDEO...and more. The Plugins tab is where you activate software plugins that you have purchased for DEWESoft (some plugins are free).

Registration is where you enter your license information.

One source of potential confusion is the Math tab, so it is worth mentioning here:

MATH Options

It is important to note that the Basic functions (Filter, Formula, Statistics…) box can be checked. These functions are included with all versions of DEWESoft. It should be checked for you already, but if it isn’t, go ahead and check it.

However, the additional features below that are OPTIONAL - i.e., they have to be paid for. If you check their boxes, and you do not have a license, you will not be able to click OK and use DEWESoft!

Note : The DEWEsoft-DEWEsoftA version includes most of these options. However, Power requires the addi-

9-214 | OWNER’s GUIDE tional option called DEWEsoft-OPT-POWER.

BUT if you want to try them before buying them, the solution is simple: create a new project called DEMO and then set it up with NO A/D HARDWARE like we did, and then you can turn on every option in the world!

No license is needed for the demo mode! In demo mode, DEWESoft will generate sinusoidal waveforms that you can use to test any function that you want, without any license.

And now with the ability to have different projects, you don’t have to take a risk by changing your “real” hardware setup -- just make a project called DEMO and then set up the hardware for this demo/testing mode, where every option is turned on. The only thing you cannot do is try these functions with real data coming in

(unless you purchase the option of course).

These options are called “built-ins” because they are included already in the DEWESoft source code - they simply require a valid license to be used for real.

DEWESoft Plugins

Then there are options which can be added in to DEWESoft as little snippets of code, or quick large chunks, called PLUGINS. These plugins are easy to install - you simply copy them into the \addons directory under the DEWESoft program file location on the hard disk. Then restart DEWESoft, and all installed plugins will be shown in the Plugins tab here on hardware setup. For example:

Above you can see that we have a variety of plugins installed. Some of them are free of charge, while others are included with the hardware option that you have purchased from us, or are an extra cost option.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-215

To activate a plugin you need to toggle it to Used, as you can see we have done above with the DEWESoft-

NET plugin. When you click some plugins, they may have some additional features or configuration selections that will appear in the Plugin properties area at the bottom of the dialog box. Not all plugins have this.

Please consult with your Dewetron sales person to learn more about which plugins are available for DEW-

ESoft.

More Project Properties

In addition to the hardware and licensing configuration that you set up on the Hardware setup dialog, each project also contains several other properties that you can configure according to your needs. Click again on the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:

Notice now the item called “Project setup…”. Please click it to open the dialog box:

This dialog has several subsections, including:

„ Project folders - where you can set your default folders for setup files, data files, and exported data files

9-216 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

„

Starting setup - where you can force DEWESoft to load a particular setup and screen when it loads

Security - where you can establish password protection of the setup mode

Internal variables - where you can define project level variables which can be used in Math channels, displayed on the screen, etc. These can be text or numeric variables.

Data header - where you can set up a data entry box that will appear automatically before or after data storage, to force the operator to enter whichever test parameters you want added to the data file

Memory - top level control of DEWESoft’s use of physical RAM

The settings that you make here will apply to only the active Project! This is a lot of flexibility.

Most of the project subsections are obvious how to use, so we won’t get into them here in the QuickStart.

But there are two subsections worth a closer look: Internal Variables and Data Header, so we will do that now!

Internal Variables

Here you can define variables which will exist at the Project level. That means that they will be available to all setups which are created when this project is active. Variables can be in the form of TEXT or NUMERIC values.

To create a variable, click the [+] symbol, and a default channel will be added, which you can directly edit.

You can rename the variable’s ID, channel name, and even give it a unit of measurement and color, if it will be used as a channel. Next you can set the TYPE of data that it should contain: whether a floating, integer, or text value.

If it is a numeric type, you can set the channel type to single or async. This does not apply to text data types.

„ A “single” value means that it is treated like a static number in DEWESoft.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-217

„ An “Async” value is treated more like a channel in DEWESoft. This means that it could be processed in a series of calculations, like a filter. But there is no way to filter a static value. As a result of this distinction, both async and single value numeric variables can be used within the FORMULA kind of math channel.

However, only an async value could be processed by a FILTER math channel. Do you see the difference?

Finally, you can set the default value. This field is quite wide, which is useful when this variable will hold some text.

Above we have created four variables - one of each basic type: text, floating number, and integer number. In addition, there are two versions of floating numbers: one which is async and another which is a single value.

So now what can we do with these variables? Well basically, we can use them in MATH channels, and we can also simply put them on the screen in any setup that is active when this Project is active! These values will be stored with any data files that are created when this project is active.

Using variables in Math channels

Numeric variables can be used within your MATH channels, which is their primary purpose after all. You can use these variables to hold constants, for example, which are needed in your calculations.

If you create a new FORMULA math channel, you will see how you can use them:

9-218 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Above you can see that in the formula math setup, there is a tab called Variables, which will appear as soon as there is at least one variable created for the current Project! So you can use these values within your

MATH formulas, as shown above… we are dividing the real analog signal called ‘Oil’ by the variable called

‘Oil_Temp.”

This formula creates a new virtual channel called ‘Oil_calc’ with the units ‘C’ (notice how we entered those parameters near the top-left corner of the screen above).

So now this new math channel is available to be placed on the screen. Let’s take a look at that by clicking the Measure button near the top of the DEWESoft window:

Click Measure from the ribbon...

After clicking Measure you will see the first display screen, called Overview. If this is the first time you have visited the Overview screen with this setup, DEWESoft will automatically put your USED channels onto the screen in the form of digital meters, like this:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-219

Looking at the right side of the display, you can see a list of channels shown in the grey, vertical task bar. By default these channels are GROUPED according to type.

In this setup we have analog channels, then the one Math channel, then our Variables.

Each channel is shown within its group. Each group is collapsible.

In the first DEWESoft QuickStart Guide we showed you the channel list, but we did not show you how to get the most from it. We will do that in a future QuickStart Guide.

For now just have a look at the screen -- and notice how your channels appear within the digital meters:

Even your text variable can be shown in a digital meter! Basically every kind of channel can be displayed in this meter (there are very few exceptions, and not worth mentioning at this point).

9-220 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Data header

In this subsection of the Project setup, you can define a form that will appear when you record data, in order to collect some additional information from the operator about the test.

„

„

„

When you first come to this subsection, it will look like the screen shot above. The main part of the dialog box will be completely empty, as shown here. This is your workspace, where you can create data input fields that the test operator will use later. There are three things that you can add to this workspace:

Info - This is basically just a section header, which you can freely name.

Input - A field which will collect alphanumeric input from the user

Selection - A control that allows the user to pick from a list that you have predefined

OK, let’s see how all these work. It is normally a good idea to start by writing down on paper what you want to collect from the user. Just use a piece of paper, and then refer to it as you duplicate it in the software.

Let’s say that you want to collect this information, arranged in these groups:

Test operator info:

name

ID number

Test article info: model name (could be model A, model B, or model C) serial number lot number

Test procedure info:

ATP number (could be 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, or 22a)

ATP step (could be any number from 1 to 100)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-221

How would you create this? It’s quite simple. Let’s start with the first group of info:

Test operator info:

name

ID number

First we create the group, by clicking the icon, then editing its label below, like this:

Now we have a section, and we can add the fields below it. The first field we want to collect is the operator’s name. If you have a lot of operators and it is not practical to predefine them all, just use an Input field, so that the user can type his or her name freely.

Click the icon, then edit the label, as shown here:

Now we want to add the ID number field. Repeat the same step: click the label:

icon, then edit the

9-222 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Great! Section 1 is done. We have created a category, and then defined two input fields that the operator can type into when data is recorded. Let’s move on and create the next section, and learn how to create a selection field. As a reminder, here is what we need to create:

Test article info: model name (could be model A, model B, or model C) serial number lot number

So first we create the category header by clicking the icon, then editing its label below:

Easy enough. But now we need to create a selector so that the operator can simply choose from model A, model B, or model C (and nothing else). To do that, you click the icon, and then edit its label:

But this field looks different than the simpler Input fields that we created before. A selector control requires that you define the selections right now. To do that, click the (ellipsis) button:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-223

The selection list dialog opens, where you can add new items to the list. Above we have typed “model A” into the new item field, then clicked the Add item button below, to move it into the list. Do the same for “model B” and “model C,” then click OK.

At this point you have the idea, right? Please continue along and add the rest of the items from our checklist, until it looks like this:

If you change your mind and want to delete a field, or rearrange the order of them, there are controls exactly for those functions:

To move a field up or down, use the icons shown here. Also, you can use the Delete icon to remove a field completely. To select WHICH FIELD to move or delete, simply click on the field, and it will get a darker color field behind it, like the one called “Rabbits” here:

9-224 | OWNER’s GUIDE

With this field selected, click the icon and it will go away. There is no UNDO, so be careful.

If your form is ready, there is still one very important step left: you must tell DEWESoft WHEN to show this form to the operator! There are checkboxes near the bottom, where you can tell DEWESoft to pop up this form at the start of acquisition, or at the end, or both.

It is critical to check at least ONE of these boxes, otherwise the form will never appear! Remember that this data header exists at the PROJECT LEVEL. Therefore, it does not matter which setup you use when storing data: when this project is active, the data header and internal variable settings that you establish here will be applied during recording.

Let’s see how this works.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-225

OK, we have our system set up and ready to record. Using the info in DEWESoft QuickStart-1 you learned how to set up and scale your channels, and in QuickStart-2 you have learned how to create internal variables and a data header. You have combined variables and real data in the MATH section to create virtual channels, which will be displayed and recorded, too. The sample rate is set up and you have a nice screen to look at.

Press STORE and watch what happens:

9-226 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Congratulations! When you press STORE, the Data Header dialog will instantly appear, and your operator can fill in the fields and then click OK to continue.

Selectors that you have predefined will show their first value by default, so if you want to force the operator to make a choice, you can create a first selection like “--” or “choose” when you define the selection.

If you think that your operators will be annoyed by this data header and will skip over it, you could also check the box to have it appear at the end of storing, when they have more time to fill it out.

Data headers can be as long as you like. If you create many fields, the screen will automatically create

NEXT and PREV buttons to navigate through multiple pages of fields. But take care: few people want to fill

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-227

out so many fields, and will quickly grow tired of it.

If you store data, stop, and then store again, the data header will appear again -- with the fields already filled in from the first run. So the operator just needs to change any fields which might have a different value now… the other fields can be left alone.

Looking at the data header information later

Data header values, and all variables from the project that was active when a given data file was created, are stored within the header of the data file. This is crucial for documentation purposes! How can you see this info?

In the Analyze mode, click ONCE on any data file. In our case, we just captured some data called Test.d7d, so let’s have a look:

When you click on the name of a data file here, you will see the header information from this file below, in several tabbed areas:

9-228 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Settings shows the basic settings of the data file (sample rate, date and time of storing, duration, and many more elements about each of the captured channels)

Events there are always at least two events in any data file: the date and time storing started, and the date and time when it stopped.

Data header what we just created! The fields are captured here

File locking whether this file is protected against post-processing or not

Preview a simple look at one of the display screens

We cover all of this in more detail in the manual, but for now click the Data header tab and see what is captured here:

Yes, your inputs are safely stored within the data file, for documentation purposes! What else can you do with these values? Can you print them out or show them on the screens?

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-229

To print out the data header info:

First, load the data file by double-clicking its name from the list. Then click the SETUP button in the ribbon:

At this point you can review the various elements contained within the header by clicking their icons: Channels, Events, Data header, File locking, etc. But if you just want to make a print-out, click the PRINT button in the ribbon, and you will get a preview of what the paper will look like:

When you do a print preview from captured data, with the SETUP clicked in the ribbon, you will see a preview of the entire header section of the data file.

To get a preview of the DATA itself, i.e., any of your display screens, simply click REVIEW from the ribbon, then click PRINT in the ribbon:

9-230 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Variables within the data header

You might have noticed that DEWESoft creates a variable from each of the fields that you create in your data header. These variables can be displayed and used in processes, just like the internal variables that you created earlier!

For example, let’s say that each time you run a test you need to input a variable that will be used in a math channel. Like doing repetitive valve tests, where different valve diameters are used all the time, as one example. You could ask the operator to simply enter the valve diameter using the Data header pop-up, and then this value will be processed mathematically in whatever way you want!

Imagine a situation where a tolerance is calculated by multiplying a constant value by another value which might change from test to test? This is not a problem: you can use the Internal Variables that we learned about earlier to hold a constant value, and use the Data header field to collect a second value at run time from the operator…. then put them together in a math channel.

Above - we add an internal variable to hold the valve circumference, which will not change from test to test...

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-231

Above - then we create a data header question that the operator needs to respond to at the beginning of each recording, called Valve diameter. DEWESoft automatically assigns it a unique ID - but let’s change it to

“ValveDiam” to make it easier to identify this parameter later. Now you should also define the TYPE of data that can be entered: text, integer, or floating number. Since a number is absolutely required here, you should not allow the operator to enter text, for example! You may also define the units and color of this channel.

Above - we create a MATH channel that we named ‘Valve_calc’ which will combine these two values and give you the output that you need to test against!

This particular math channel doesn’t really make any sense: it is just one hypothetical example of how you can use these variables in DEWESoft.

Displaying variables on the screen

So now you can see that project variables - whether they are predefined or collected from the operator at

9-232 | OWNER’s GUIDE run time, can be quite powerful. Importantly, they are captured within the header of the data file, and are thus a permanent part of the documentation.

You can use them mathematically, or simply show them on the screen. How to do that? Let’s see:

Did you notice that in the channel list, ALL VARIABLES are shown? If your variables are not showing, then perhaps you are clicked on a display object which cannot hold them, like a scope or FFT graph. To reveal all of them, click on a digital meter … then look at the channel list. You can see in the example above that there is a group of variables, and within it, there are now two sub-groups, labeled ‘Data Header’ and ‘Internal

Variables’, and they contain exactly the variable names that we defined above.

In the screen above we have simply put these variables, as well as the real and math channels into meters.

Note that the data header variable is unknown until you press STORE and then the operator enters a number! Then that value will be known to DEWESoft, and also will be used in the MATH channel that calls for it.

This is what has happened above.

Projects Summary

You can make as many Projects as you require. This is a handy way to quickly configure the system for

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-233

different test scenarios, and different hardware configurations. A great example is when you have a channel expansion box: sometimes you need it, and sometimes you don’t You can therefore make a different Project for each configuration.

But that’s only the beginning: you might have only one hardware configuration, but you can use Projects for different test scenarios, since the data header and internal variables exist at the project level, and they are a great source of automation and documentation, as you have seen above.

We suggest that you make a Project called DEMO that you can use for training, as well as to try all of the options that are available as built-ins and plug-ins.

Global Setup

9-234 | OWNER’s GUIDE

In the previous section you learned how to create Projects, which will set up the system in a certain configuration. But then there are some configuration parameters that you can at the highest level, i.e., above the level of any particular Project. This is the Global setup, and by definition there can be only one.

Referring again to the [Settings] button, click it and then select the “Global setup…” item.

When you select this item you will get the Global setup dialog box:

There are several tabs on this dialog, which allow you to configure these parameters:

General where you can set the language, character set, default sample rate, and similar

Displays where you can control which screens are active by default, and set the display background color

Sound

Print where you can active VOICE EVENTS for data storing, and trigger sounds from the PC sound card where you can define several aspects of printing, and link to your company’s logo to print on reports

Folders

Amplifier where you can set up the default folders for top level settings and the sensor database

(Infrequently used) top level Amplifier setting. Please leave this alone unless instructed otherwise

The most often-used features at this top level are: Changing the DEWESoft background color

The default background color is dark blue. However, if you plan on printing reports frequently directly from

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-235

DEWESoft, you might want to change the background to WHITE, because then the screen and paper output will match. Also, this will prevent you from using really light colors like yellow (or white), which look great against dark blue, but which are impossible to see when printed on white paper.

To change the background color to white, click the [Displays] button on the Global settings dialog box:

Here you can simply set the color to white using the selector.

Here is the difference:

Adding a logo to your printouts

To add a logo, click the [Print] button on the Global settings dialog box:

9-236 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Now click the […] button and then choose a BMP logo file that will be printed when you print stored data onto paper.

Summary

This concludes Part 2 of the DEWESoft QuickStart Guide. We have still only scratched the surface of this amazing data acquisition software program. There are more input types, more math functions, and … well, it’s a long list.

Please refer to the DEWESoft 7 Manual and DEWESoft 7 Tutorials for further information about how to use these advanced capabilities, or make arrangements to attend a Dewetron training class, where you can really learn a lot.

Finally, please experiment with DEWESoft and try everything. The software is quite intuitive once you get started.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-237

DS-7 Plugins

DEWEsoft software can be expanded with the installation of software PLUGINS. There are several kinds available:

„ Drivers for different hardware (A/D card, serial or other port connected devices, wireless devices, etc.)

„ Graphical display widgets for the measurement displays

„ Export filters to convert captured data to additional file formats

„ Extensions of the functionality of DS-7

„ New MATH functions for custom processes

This section will focus on a few of the key PLUGINs that are used with our systems. It is not meant to replace all of the documentation that is available separately related to DS-7, but as a convenience within this manual.

PLUGIN Installation and Configuration

How to Install a PLUGIN

All plugins need to be copied to the ADDONS folder within your Dewesoft installation. Normally this will be at this path, but your system might be different:

D:\DEWESoft7\Bin\V7_0\Addons\

In addition, all PLUGINS must be registered. Starting with Windows7, Microsoft does not allow an application to directly register a plugin, so you must manually start the process with a mouse-click.

This is easily accomplished by clicking on the SETTINGS button near the top right corner of the DS-7 window (while in the setup mode). Then click HARDWARE SETTINGS from the menu. When the dialog box opens up, click on the ADDONS tab. Then click the REGISTER PLUGINS at the bottom of the screen. When this process completes after a few moments, you must click OK on this dialog. Then quit the DS-7 application and restart it in order that the newly registered plugins (of any kind) are registered.

The PLUGINS tab of the HARDWARE SETUP screen

9-238 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Configuring Certain PLUGINS

Some plugins have a setup interface that must be configured. From the ADDONS tab of the hardware setup screen, click once on the designed PLUGIN and you will see any user-configurable settings below. In the example we click on the TARSUS plugin, and below within the gray area several selectors appear, where you can configure this software.

Plugins tab, showing the configuration of a certain plugin

Make the appropriate changes and then click OK to register them and close this box. Your settings will be saved under this hardware project.

The OK button at the bottom of the HARDWARE SETUP dialog box

We learned about PROJECTS in an earlier section of this chapter - so you know that you can create multiple projects, which are essentially hardware profiles, that allow you to have different hardware configurations.

So if sometimes you use a certain piece of hardware, but other times you don’t, you can make different

PROJECTS, and load the one that you prefer.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-239

Testing plugins without a license

Nearly all plugins require a license specific to them, in order to make them work. So how can you try out a plugin without first buying it? Answer: get a 30 day eval code. Even if your system is 100% licensed, you can still add a 30-day code to your license, and it will unlock all features, including any installed and registered plugins. Contact DEWETRON to get a 30 day evaluation code. In the screen shot above notice that a TRIAL license was installed when the screen shot was made.

Note - some plugins require HARDWARE in order to function - you must also have that hardware!

PLUGIN-ETHERNET-REC

This plugin allows you to display and record data parsed from an ethernet stream, including UDP packets.

No special hardware is needed, because basically every DEWETRON system has at least one ethernet interface already. Assuming you have an available ethernet interface on your DEWETRON system and you want to capture data from it, you can use this PLUGIN.

First, install it according to the process mentioned at the beginning of this section. Make sure it is enabled, and licensed (even using a 30 day TRIAL / EVALATION license is fine for testing purposes).

WinpCAP installation

In addition to the plugin itself, we require that a third-party ethernet sniffer package be installed onto the

DEWETRON computer. WINpCAP enables the access to the network interface (driver and DLL libraries).

Please visit this page in order to download the software:

http://www.winpcap.org/

Download WinPcap_4_1_3.exe

There might be a newer version by the time you visit this page - no worries, simply get the latest version and use this name as a reference only.

After installation you should restart your DEWETRON computer to make sure that all of the new libraries are instantiated.

9-240 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Setting up your Ethernet streams, filters and channels

Once the plugin has been installed and enabled, and WinPcap has been installed, you should be able to see a new icon on your DS-7 SETUP toolbar, which looks like this:

The first thing we need to do is to add a STREAM. Click the button in the toolbar below the ETHERNET icon to do that:

Some controls will appear below:

Click the “+” button to add an ethernet STREAM

Datastream dialog, ethernet data source selected

Data Source Choose ETHERNET, or UDP, or DEWESOFT (with Dewetron hardware this will always be either ethernet or UDP). We will cover ETHERNET and UDP setups below.

Select Interface Choose the appropriate network card (the one that you will be reading the data from).

Max Packet Size 1520 is the default, and is also the maximum length of the ethernet frame.

Hint: If you have a fast stream with shorter frames, you can improve the performance and reduce data file size by reducing this value.

Selecting ETHERNET is the simplest to setup. Simply choose the interface and maximum packet size as mentioned above. Then click OK at the bottom of this dialog box to register these settings.

However, if you have chosen UDP, the dialog box will change slightly, and provide some alternate setup parameters to configure:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-241

Datastream dialog, UDP data source selected

Input Type This can be set to either UDP PORT or REPLAY FILE. If you select a port, you need to give the port number and max packet size. The default values of 2999 and 2048 are entered for you. However if you select REPLAY FILE, you need to point to a file that contains the data you want to read, as well as the max packet size.

UDP source, replay file input type

Forward UDP packets

This can be set to one of three selections:

Disabled UDP packets will not be forwarded

UDP Port UDP packets will be forwarded to the selected port and destination IP address (boxes will appear where you can enter these values)

Replay file UDP packets will be written into the named file (a text box will appear where you can enter the filename)

9-242 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Regardless of whether you have selected ETHERNET or UDP as your data source, as soon as you can set one up, this will appear on the large open area of the software:

Ethernet Stream ready to be further defined

So far this section has column headings, but is emtpy. Therefore now we must add a filter chain, and then some CHANNELS to be displayed and recorded.

Defining the Filter Chain

Since each stream can have one or more filter chains, we need to define the one(s) that we need.

Click the [ + ] button under the capture “Filter chains.”

When you do, a single filter will be created for this stream, and it will appear like this:

Ethernet filter within the first stream

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-243

Defining the Filter Chain

We need to define this filter chain. Let’s start by clicking the SETUP button on it the right side of it. When you click this SETUP button it will open up the Filter Settings dialog box:

The Filter Settings dialog box

The Filter chain is used to filter out ethernet frames by MAC address, IP address, packet type, etc. This is a very flexible setup, because you have the ability to include or exclude specific fields. You can also write multiple strings in each field.

Note - if you write multiple strings in each field, they must be separated by a space character

Here is an example:

IP Address: 192.168.10.1 192.168.10.2

This will include both addresses. This also works with all other fields.

If you click in the fields, e.g. “Destination IP”, the according part in the protocol will be highlighted. Here for instance we search for all messages going to 192.168.1.255; switch the view to “DEC” to see the plain numbers:

9-244 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Example of a filter chain setup

Notice that we are already seeing the data stream at the bottom of the dialog box. This is a great convenience when setting up these filter chains.

If you happen to know the exact position of the string, you can search for specific bytes or characters, by using the Data filter. Switch the preview to ASCII to see plain text. You can clear the previous values from the screen, to make sure that you are seeing the latest real data, or to discover if data is really moving or not.

Using the DATA FILTER

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-245

In the example below we will define a filter chain under the UDP protocol. We will search for messages with a destination port of 5001. We will see short test messages coming in, and the we can decode/extract our channel from it.

Sample filter chain setup using UDP protocol

And what do we get from this? Depending on the protocol, the packets can vary. For example, IPv6 addresses are longer than IPv4 addresses.

Configuring your channels

Well, now that we have configured the stream and the filter chain, we can finally define the actual CHAN-

9-246 | OWNER’s GUIDE

NELS that we want to measure, display, and store.

Channels are always defined as a “child” of the selected Filter Chain. So first select the Filter Chain, and then click the [ + ] CHANNEL button to create one or more channels:

The ADD CHANNEL button [+]

Notice that you can add multiple channels below a given filter chain, simply by pressing the [+] key again.

Click the channel to turn it to a darker gray color, if you want to remove it. Once it’s selected in this fashion, simply press the [-] key and any selected channel will be deleted.

⇒ Take care - there is no UNDO function here, so if you accidentally delete a filter chain or channel, you will need to add it back again manually.

Several channels added below a Filter Chain

Of course, each channel needs to be set up. This is done by clicking the SETUP button on the far right of any channel. When you do that, the Channel Setup dialog will appear:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-247

Notice that the selected bytes have been highlighted to make it easier for you to see them:

Just like with analog channels, this dialog box is where you can enter your slope (a scaling FACTOR and

OFFSET). For example, to convert from Celcius to Fahrenheit you would enter a factor of 1.8 and and offset of 32.

You can also define the default DISPLAY SCALE here using the Min Value and Max Value fields. This will not affect recording at all, but simply predefines the display scale of this channel when shown on a graph or meter that has a scale. For example, if this channel might have a max possible range of -1500 to +2000°C, but you just want to display it from -300 to +600°C, you would enter those two numbers into the min and max fields.

Note - just as with analog channels, please do not enter the + sign. It is understood that numbers that do not have a minus sign are positive numbers.

Our sample channel starts at byte 42 and is 16 bits long:

9-248 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Set your channels to USED

It is an absolute MUST that channels be set to USED. Only channels which are USED can be shown on the displays, recorded, or processed within MATH functions. Be sure to press this button for all channels that you want to record / display / process in math!

Filter chains and channels MUST be set to USED here in order to be displayed/recorded/processed

You’re Ready Record Data

Now that your ethernet data has been defined, you can use these channels just as if they were analog channels.

Display

-

Move to your display screens and you will see these channels in the channel LIST on the right side of the display. You can put them into digital and analog meters, Recorder Graphs, and

Tabular displays.

Note - because ethernet data is essentially asynchonous channels, they cannot be put into the sCOPE graph or

FFT graph directly.

Recording Just like any other channel(s) within the software, these channels will be STORED when you record data. And of course, replayed later when you analyze the data file.

Process Just like any other channel(s) within the software, these channels can be used within your

MATH functions, and even combined with other synchronous and asynchronous channels to create unlimited derived parameters.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-249

Matlab - Exporting Data from DS-7

Data exchange is an important matter for our customers, so there are several options how the proprietary

DS-7 data and file format can be transferred and read by other software.

Exporting MAT files from the DS-7 (DEWESoft 7) Export menu

There are basically two methods of exporting data from DS-7:

DirectX export into Flexpro or Matlab - including templates to automatically process data into reports.

Then there is ...

File export, which either writes other vendors’ proprietary data formats (e.g. MAT file) or commonly used interchange formats like CSV.

This section is concerned with using File export from DS-7 to Matlab analysis software. Matlab is a very powerful tool made by The Mathworks, a company separate from and not affiliated with DEWETRON. The

Mathworks owns the product Matlab, its intellectual property, including any and all Matlab related patents, trademarks and copyrights.

The 2 GB Export Limitation, and How to Overcome

DS-7 uses standard MATLAB™ libraries to write this specific file format as version 5 files with a 2 GB size limit.

The DS-7 export function has an inherent 2 GB limit

9-250 | OWNER’s GUIDE

However, starting with DS-7 version 7.1 this limit can be overcome if newer MATLAB™ libraries are installed on the system. These libraries must be the 32-bit ones, because DS-7 is a 32-bit application. It is possible to install MATLAB™ 64-bit and 32-bit in parallel on the same machine with the same installer medium, but the latter one has to be started manually (e.g.: bin\win32\setup.exe). By installing this version, also 32-bit libraries are installed and registered and DEWESoft shows a new MATLAB™ export file type, MAT file version 7.3 removing the 2GB barrier.

The export screen under DS-7.1 has additional choices regarding the data export

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-251

Using DWDataReader Library inside MATLAB™

The DWDataReader library (including many examples) is available for download free of charge. It can be found on the www.dewamerica.com homepage on the DS-7 pages.

Because our library is a native DLL, depending on the programming language in use and its included interop support, data types have to be converted and memory allocated.

„

„

„

To make this easier for the end-user a number of examples are available for Win32 & Win64-bit MATLAB™ or C language, Win32 VBA and Linux C.

The MATLAB™ example includes 3 files, the MATLAB™ script, the library and the header file.

dw_data_reader.m

DWDataReaderLib.dll

DWDataReaderLib.h

The basic steps to access D7D data files are explained in the library’s documentation:

1. Call DWInit to initialize the dynamic link library

2. Call DWOpenDataFile to open DEWESoft data file (*.d7d)

3. Call DWGetChannelListCount to get the number of channels

4. Allocate the DWChannel structure then call DWGetChannelList to get channel list properties

5. Call DWGetScaledSamplesCount to get the number of all samples

6. Allocate memory (data and time_stamp) then call DWGetScaledSamples

7. Call DWCloseDataFile to close data file

8. Call DWDeInit to clear and close dynamic link library

Short walk-through of the example:

Hint: The steps inside the demo are documented, so just look at the comments for more information.

„

„

„

„

„

„

64-bit operation mode is checked at first.

Then the DLL is loaded into MATLAB™.

The steps above have to be followed for correct operation, so the next step is to init the library.

Get version is an optional step.

„

„

„

Structures and referring pointers are created to be used as return types later on.

The data file being opened is defined in line 41, default path is c:\Test.d7d.

[stat, file_name, info_data] = calllib(DWDataLibFile, ‘DWOpenDataFile’, ‘c:\Test.

d7d’, sptr.Value);

DWGetChannelListCount returns the number of channels inside the data file.

Events, such as start storing, are checked with DWGetEventListCount and DWGetEventListItem

All data channels are then looped through and parameters such as name and color are read with

9-252 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

DWGetChannelListItem

Data itself is opened by reserving data and time_stamp variables and then using the DWGetScaledSamples function

Color representation varies from different software, so the appropriate conversion is shown next by doing an example plot.

As final steps the data file is closed by using DWCloseDataFile and the library de-initialized by calling

DWDeInit.

If the DLL is no longer used inside MATLAB™, the unloadlibrary function frees up memory.

This demo shows basic operation and can be modified according to your own programming needs.

Using DCOM to access DEWESoft data online with MATLAB™

After installation, DS-7 is a registered DCOM component on your Windows system, giving you access to a large number of functions, among them remote control and optionally hiding the software or loading a measurement setup and accessing data online or offline.

This same DCOM standard is used when programming your own plugins, math modules, import or export filters or additional hardware drivers – independent from the used programming language.

Again, there are programming examples on the www.dewamerica.com webpage on the DS-7 product pages.

Example ListChannels:

„ Start DEWESoft from inside MATLAB: global h; h = actxserver(‘Dewesoft.App’); h.Init(); h.Visible = true;

„ Build ChannelList h.Data.BuildChannelList;

„ Count all available channels h.Data.AllChannels.Count

„ Count used ones only h.Data.UsedChannels

„ Access channel with index and get Name property: h.Data.UsedChannels.Item(0).Name

OWNER’s GUIDE - sOFTWARE | 9-253

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Example ReadDataFile (offline data):

Start ActiveX server

Go to Setup screen

Start storing a data file

Load the file in analysis mode

Get global parameters, such as sampling rate, number of channels

Loop through all the channels and get specific parameters, such as channel names

Read data and time_stamp from channel

Plot data

Clear handle

Example DewesoftEvents (online data):

This example shows how to access data online via DCOM interface, and display this data in a MATLAB™ plot directly.

Matlab screen showing data import from DS-7 software

9-254 | OWNER’s GUIDE

The main file here is actx_dewe_events, while the eventhandler is called from DEWESoft to transmit data online.

„

„

„

„

„

„

„ actx_dewe_events:

Start ActiveX server

Init DEWESoft

Load measurement setup

Register events

Start measure mode

Pause main thread to be able to get data-events

Stop and clear ActiveX components

„

„

„

„

„ eventhandler:

Listen for OngetData event

Calculate data position from block size, no. of blocks, previous samples,…

Loop through all channels and read data

Plot data block

Remember data position for next iteration

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-255

10

Important Accessories

DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply

Certain models include a Dewetron Power Supply (DPS) which outputs 24VDC at 10 amps (2410). Thus, the model name is DPS-2410. The DPS-2410 is used to power your system from 120/240VAC. When connected and powered on, it will also recharge any batteries which are installed within the system at the same time.

Here are the relevant specifications for this power supply:

Parameter

Power input:

Power output:

Ground:

Switch:

Indicator

Fuse

Fan:

Construction:

DSP-2410

100~250 VAC, 50/60 Hz standard worldwide power from AC mains

24 VDC nominal level, up to 10.5A absolute max (10A nominal and fused) yellow/green stripe color coded mini banana jack referenced to ground.

AC mains power switch, turns off the DPS-2410 completely (there is no hot standby mode)

Green LED indicates that the DPS-2410 is connected to power and turned

ON.

10A fast blow automotive type fuse

Built into the top cover. Series 1 models: black plastic fan bezel. Series 2 models: flush metal fan grille.

Aluminum with rubber shock protection corners

DPS-2410 Compatibility

The DPS-2410 is included as standard with the DEWE-3210 series, and is included with the 310-UPS battery option for the D310 series. It is not required by nor compatible with the DEWE-3040-RM or DEWE-3050 series.

10-256 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DPS-2410 Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-257

DPS-2410 Call-outs

Rubberized shock absorbing corners

AC Mains input receptacle

LED power on indicator

24 VDC power output

20A fuse

Power on/off

Chassis ground point

Important safety notices:

⇒ Never block the vetilation holes on any side of the DsP-2410

⇒ Always locate the DPs-2410 in an open, well ventilated area

⇒ Never apply power to the DPs-2410 when it is enclosed within the carry bag, shipping case, or any other location where air flow is restricted.

⇒ Always replace the external fuse with the same value and type. Never substitute a larger A value.

⇒ Use the chassis ground point if needed to reference the voltage to the UUT or test stand

⇒ Do not open the DPs-2410. service must be performed by qualified DEWETRON service personnel.

⇒ If the chassis appears damaged, or any connector is loose or damaged in any way, do not apply power to the

DPs-2410.

⇒ Never use the DPs-2410 for any purpose other than for which it was supplied by DEWETRON.

⇒ Failure to observe these safety protocols, as well as other best practices related to electronic equipment and power conversion equipment, can lead to equipment damage, or bodily harm or even death to you and others.

10-258 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Neutrino-4

The Neutrino-4 is an optional external battery charger and additional DC power supply unit. It can recharge four Dewetron standard batteries (model BATT-95WH) simultaneously when powered from 120/240 VAC.

The Neutrino-4 has a built-in LCD display exactly like the one which is on the DEWE-321x mainframe, so it will show you the number of batteries inside and their aggregate charge status.

Using a special power cable, the Neutrino-4 can also be unplugged from AC and plugged into the DC input of many DEWETRON systems to provide an additional power source. With a full loaded and charged

Neutrino-4 plus the batteries already within models like the D310 (with 310-UPS option), DEWE-3050, and

DEWE-3210, you then have the power of six Dewetron BATT-95WH batteries. Since a rule of thumb is that you typically get one hour of data acquisition time per battery, this means your system can run practically an entire work day without being connected to external power.

Above left: with the door open and batteries partially or completely removed

Above right: with the door closed

„

„

„

The Neutrino also supports hot-swapping of its batteries, so you can feed in fresh batteries at regular intervals, to keep it supplying DC power indefinitely.

What’s included with the Neutrino-4:

The Neutrino-4 mainframe

AC mains input power cord

One (1) BATT-95WH smart battery (please order additional batteries separately if you require them)

Note - the Neutrino-4 is not compatible with the SideHAND2 series batteries used within the D310 with the

310-UPS option, or the DEWE-3050. We offer a desktop charger called the BAT-CHARGER-1, which supports both the original BAT-95W and newer SideHAND2 series batteries

Neutrino-4 Outline and Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-259

10-260 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Important safety notices:

⇒ Never block the vetilation holes on any side of the Neutrino-4

⇒ Always locate the Neutrino-4 in an open, well ventilated area

⇒ Never apply power to the Neutrino-4 when it is enclosed within the carry bag, shipping case, or any other location where air flow is restricted.

⇒ Always replace the external fuse with the same value and type. Never substitute a larger A value.

⇒ Use the chassis ground point if needed to reference the voltage to the UUT or test stand

⇒ Do not open the Neutrino-4. service must be performed by qualified DEWETRON service personnel.

⇒ If the chassis appears damaged, or any connector is loose or damaged in any way, do not apply power to the

Neutrino-4.

⇒ Never use the Neutrino-4 for any purpose other than for which it was supplied by DEWETRON.

⇒ Failure to observe these safety protocols, as well as other best practices related to electronic equipment and power conversion equipment, can lead to equipment damage, or bodily harm or even death to you and others.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-261

„

„

„

BAT-CHARGER-1

This is a desktop (non-ruggedized) style battery charger, capable of recharging one battery at a time. The charger will also recalibrate our smart batteries automatically, whenever needed. The BAT-CHARGER-1 is compatible with both the classic BAT-95W batteries used in DEWETRON DEWE-3210, DA120, DA-121,

DA124, DEWE-3020, DEWE-5000, DEWE-571, DEWE-2600 and DEWE-3040 instruments, as well as the smaller “SideHAND2” series smart batteries used in the DEWE-3050 and D310 series.

What’s included with the BAT-CHARGER-1:

The single battery charger, plastic office use type construction

AC/DC power adapter and power cord.

Owner’s manual

Above: the BAT-CHARGER-1 shown with a SideHAND2 series battery plugged in, and a BAT-95W battery lying nearby.

Above: the BAT-CHARGER-1 shown with the included AC/

DC adapter. Not shown but also included is a standard AC power cable.

Right: The DEWE-3050 includes four

SideHAND2 series batteries. They can be hotswapped on the left side panel.

10-262 | OWNER’s GUIDE

BAT-CHARGER-1 Specifications

Specification

Weight:

Dimensions: (W x L x H)

Mating Connector:

LED Status Display

AC/DC power supply

AC Cord

Compliances

Certifications

235 g (8 oz.)

92 x 180 x 58 mm (3.5 x 7 x 2.25 in.)

5-pin standard battery connector

Green flashing: Charging

Green solid: Charge complete

Blue flashing: Calibrating

Blue solid: Calibration complete

Red flashing: battery fuel gauge recalibration recommended

Red solid: Error

(External) 90~260VAC, 24V, 2.5A DC, 119 x 38 x 60 mm, 500 g (18 oz)

Standard: 110V N. American 3-pin connector

Optional: 220V European 2-pin connector with ground recess

Optional: CH5000U: 240V UK 3-pin connector

System Management Bus Rev 1.0, Smart Battery Data Specification rev 1.0 and Smart

Battery Charger specification Rev 1.0 compliant

UL listed, CE Compliant

Outline Dimensions

Dimensions in inches (in.)

Multiply by 25.4 for mm

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-263

Safety

⇒ Do not expose the charger or power supply to water or liquids; this is not a sealed case. 2. Do not open the charger or power supply case, no user serviceable parts are inside.

⇒ Do not cover the fan exhaust or obstruct the airflow, this will cause overheating.

⇒ Use only the manufacturer’s power supply and observe terminal polarity.

⇒ Place the charger in a cool spot, away from external heat sources

⇒ Caution - during recalibration the charger may become warm.

Operation Guidelines

Place the charger on a flat, level surface away from sources of heat and moisture. Plug the DC connector from the power supply into the back of the charger and connect the power supply to the mains AC supply using the cable supplied.

Charging Batteries

Place the battery into the battery bay ensuring that the 5-way connector is fully seated. The LEDs in the status window will provide status information and the charger will automatically begin charging.

The BAT-CHARGER-1 charger is capable of sensing and delivering an appropriate charge to all Inspired

Energy NiMH and Li Ion standard battery packs, including the BAT-95WH and SIdeHAND2 batteries used in-

DEWETRON systems. Upon inserting the battery into the charger, the battery communicates to the charger over the SMBus telling the charger what type of cell chemistry it is and what type of charge regime it needs.

The charger then configures its output to provide the charge regime requested by the battery. If no SMBus communications are issued from the battery, the charger interrogates the thermistor/resistor I.D. pin on the battery terminal and delivers an appropriate charge.

LED Indication:

The status of the battery is indicated by the LEDs visible in the status window:

Green flashing:

Green solid:

Blue flashing:

Blue solid:

Red flashing:

Red solid:

Battery charging

Battery fully charged

Battery in calibration mode

Battery fuel gauge calibrated

Battery fuel gauge in need of recalibration

Error

10-264 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Recharging and Calibration Times

Different battery packs will require differing recharge times. The times given below are for a full charge from

0% to 100% state of charge. They are valid for all variants and custom hybrids of each battery model. (For example the NJ1020HP has the same recharge time as the NJ1020.

DEWETRON model Mfr. Model Name

BAT-95WH

SideHAND2

NL2404

NH2054

Recharge Time

3 hours

5 hours

Recalibration Time

7 - 10 hours

18 - 24 hours

Recalibration Time

Recalibration consists of a calibration charge, followed by a calibration discharge. Finally the battery is given a regular charge. A calibration cycle will be faster if the battery is fully charged to begin with. Recalibration time is governed by the battery voltage and capacity. Larger batteries, and lower voltage batteries will take longer to recalibrate. Calibration is initiated each time the button is pressed, so it is not recommended to press the recalibration button part way through the recalibration cycle.

What are the SMBus and the SBS?

The Smart Battery System defines the parameters that are stored by an SBS-compliant battery. These parameters include full battery status and fuel gauging information. The System Management Bus is the language by which these parameters are communicated between the battery, the charger and the host device.

How does the charger know what to deliver?

The charger is capable of sensing and delivering an appropriate charge to all Inspired Energy NiMH and

Li Ion standard battery packs. Upon inserting the battery into the charger, the battery communicates to the charger over the SMBus telling the charger what type of cell chemistry it is and what type of charge regime it needs. The then configures its output to provide the charge regime requested by the battery. If no SMBus communications are issued from the battery, the charger interrogates the thermistor/resistor I.D. pin on the battery terminal and delivers an appropriate charge.

Above: the BAT-CHARGER-1 includes an AC/DC adapter and AC power cable that connects to USA power receptacles. Customers in Europe / UK can order compatible power cables with their BAT-

CHARGER-1. Please consult DEWETRON about your requirements.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-265

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO

This is an isolated DC-DC converter that will power your Dewetron battery powered instrument from a wide ranging DC input power source, and also isolate it from that source.

This option is very popular in automotive applications, due to its isolation. And of course, it runs from such a wide range of DC input power: 10 VDC to 36 VDC, that it is very convenient for use in cars, trucks, busses, and even aircraft.

You can order the DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO as an accessory for any Dewetron instrument which runs from

DC power, as long as that instrument accepts 24 VDC.

Parameter

Input:

Input voltage:

Max. input current:

Input connector:

Output: Output voltages: Output power: Output current: Output connector:

Operating temperature: Derating above 45 °C:

Isolation voltage:

Status LED:

Dimensions: (W x D x H):

Weight:

Power on sequence:

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO

10 to 36 VDC (the input is protected against wrong polarity)

36 A @ 10 VDC input voltage (15 A @ 24 VDC)

2-pin LEMO connector male, type: EGJ.3B.302

24 V 300 W 12.5 A 2-pin LEMO connector female, type: EGG.2B.302

-20 °C to 60 °C 8 Watt/°C

500 VDC

Green LED indicates an output voltage > 21 VDC

~219 x 122 x 50 mm (8.6 x 4.8 x 2 in.)

1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)

First: Connect the system and the DCDC! Followed by the DCDC and the power supply connection.

The DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO has the CE Mark

10-266 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MOB-DISP-17 Mobile Display

For mobile applications, particularly in car and train testing, our MOBILE displays are highly useful. The

MOB-DISP-17 is our largest display, featuring a high brightness 17” TFT panel, which is also a touchscreen that connects to your DEWE system via a USB 2.0 interface.

The MOB-DISP-17 can be mounted using suction cups, or more permanently using the VESA 75 mounts, or the other

#1/4-20 tapped holes on most sides, to fasten it to an AUTO-

POLE or other fixture within your vehicle.

The MOB-DISP-17 has three important connections:

„

„

„

POWER - it runs from a wide ranging 9-29 VDC power source

VIDEO - it connects to your computer via a standard cable with either VGA or DVI video output

USB 2.0 - the touchscreen interface is connected via a standard A/B USB 2.0 cable

A set of standard length cables is included with the MOB-

DISP-17, which is suitable for short distance hookups. The display does include an AC/DC adapter so that you can operate it from regular AC mains power.

„

„

„

„

You can purchase an accessory kit for the MOB-DISP-17 called the

DISP-17-OPT, which includes:

Suction cups (2)

3 meter USB cable

3 meter VGA cable

1 m power cable with cigarette lighter plug on the input side

MOB-DISP-17, front view

The MOB-DISP-17 installed on a car dashboard. In the foreground is the

DEWE-214 data acquisition system.

MOB-DISP-17 Outline and Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-267

10-268 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MOB-DISP-17 Call-outs

Two USB 2.0 (type A) convenience jacks

One USB 2.0 (type A) convenience jack

VGA video input

DVI video input

Status LED

Screen set-up MENU buttons

B, A, SELECT, MENU,

POWER

USB 2.0 (type B) input from host computer

Power input jack (LEMO

FGG.1B.302.CLA)

Hook-up Example: Connecting to the D3PC

Red - 12 VDC power cable

Blue - USB 2.0 cable (A/B)

Green - VGA cable

OWNER’s GUIDE - IMPORTANT ACCEssORIEs | 10-269

MOB-DISP-17 Specifications

Parameter

Description

Power requirements

Power input connector

Screen resolution

Backlight

TFT details

DIsplay OEM

Touchscreen

Mounting positions

Standard accessories

Optional accessories (DISP-17-OPT)

USB convenience jacks

Environmental

Dimensions: (W x D x H):

Weight:

MOB-DISP-17

17” Ruggedized video display, suitable for mobile applications

12VDC, 5A peak. External AC/DC adapter included

LEMO FGG.1B.302.CLA

SXGA (1280 x 1024 pixels) resolution, Low power consumption

90 LEDs

Pixel pitch: 0.264(H) x 0.264(W) mm

Active display area: 337.92(H) x 270.336(V) mm

Surface treatment: Haze 25%, Hard-coating (3H)

Display colors: 16.7M (Hi-FRC)

Pixel arrangement: RGB vertical stripe

White luminance: 360(Typ.) cd/m2

Based on the Samsung LTM170ET01 TFT display with LED backlight unit

Capacitive touchscreen included, with USB 2.0 interface and drivers for Windows 7

VESA 100 tapped holes on the side opposite the display, and

#1/4-20 tapped holes on top and bottom for suction cup mounting

1m VGA cable with DVI adapter

2.5 m USB cable

1 m power cable, FGG.1B.302.CLA LEMO to banana plugs

AC/DC adapter for lab usage

2 high-grade suction cups

3 m VGA cable

3 m USB cable

1 m power cable (LEMO to cigarette lighter plug)

Three (3) USB 2.0 (type A) convenience jacks. Requires that the USB 2.0 (type B) input jack be connected to the DEWE system’s USB 2.0 interface via a standard USB 2.0 A to B type cable (one is included)

Operating temperature: 0 °C to 50 °C, 95% RH

Center of glass surface temperature absolute max: -10 °C to +60 °C

Storage temperature: -25 °C to 70 °C, 70% RH (do not store in direct sunlight)

384 x 39 x 337 mm (15.1 x 1.53 x 13.27 in.)

4.5 kg (10 lbs), not including cables

MOB-DISP-17 Safety Notices

Storage

⇒ (a) Do not leave the MOB-DIsP-17 in high temperature, and high humidity for a long time. It is highly recommended to store the Module with temperature from 0 to 35°C and relative humidity of less than 70%.

⇒ (b) Do not store the MOB-DIsP-17 Module in direct sunlight.

⇒ (c) The MOB-DIsP-17 should be stored in a dark place. It is prohibited to apply sunlight or fluorescent light in storing.

Operation

⇒ (a) Do not connect or disconnect the Module in the “Power On” condition.

⇒ (b) Power supply should always be turned on/off by the item 6.3 “Power on/off sequence”

10-270 | OWNER’s GUIDE

⇒ (c) The TFT module within the MOB-DIsP-17 has high frequency circuits. sufficient suppression to the electromagnetic interference should be done by system manufacturers. Grounding and shielding methods may be important to minimize the interference.

Operation Condition Guide

„

„

„

The MOB-DISP-17 should be operated under normal conditions. Normal condition is defined as below;

Temperature : 20±15°C

Humidity : 65±20%

Display pattern : continually changing pattern (Not stationary)

⇒ (b) If the MOB-DIsP-17 will be used in extreme conditions such as high temperature, humidity, display patterns or operation time etc.., It is strongly recommended to contact sEC for Application engineering advice. Otherwise, its reliability and function may not be guaranteed.

Others

⇒ (a) Avoid condensation of water. It may result in improper operation or disconnection of electrode.

⇒ (b) Do not exceed the absolute maximum rating value. (supply voltage variation, input voltage variation, variation in part contents and environmental temperature, and so on). Otherwise the MOB-DIsP-17 may be damaged.

Connecting the MOB-DISP-17

There are two essential connections, and one non-essential connection, to be made on the MOB-DISP-17.

Essential connections:

„

„

The VGA cable

The power

Non-essential connection:

„ USB 2.0

The VGA and power connections absolutely must be made in order for the MOB-DISP-17 to function at all.

However, you do not connect the USB 2.0 cable between your DEWETRON system and the MOB-DISP-17, the touchscreen will not function, and the USB jacks on the MOB will not function.

In order to activate the touchscreen, the driver must be installed onto the computer / DEWETRON system. If you have purchased the MOB-DISP-17 and the DEWETRON system together, we will have already installed the driver for you. Otherwise, you may have to download the display driver from our website and install it yourself onto the DEWETRON system. Please visit the MOB-DISP-17 product page on www.dewamerica.

com and locate the downloader for the driver. If you cannot find it, please contact Dewetron in Wakefield, RI for a copy of it.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-271

11

signal/sensor Adapters

MSI series interfaces

Most DEWETRON instruments are compatible with MSI series intelligent sensor interfaces. Exactly which

MSI interfaces can be used depends entirely on which signal conditioners are installed within your system.

The table on the next page cross references the compatibility of each MSI with various Dewetron DAQ and

MDAQ series signal conditioners, so please refer to that table when choosing MSIs for your system.

Several MSIs are available for both bridge series modules and voltage input modules, namely the ACC,

V200, and charge adapters.

When you plug in an MSI interface to any of the analog inputs, it should show up automatically on the

SETUP screen within DS-7, within the AMPLIFIER column.

Note - if your MsI interfaces are NOT showing up on the screen as shown above, then there are two possible explanations:

1. You have not upgraded your software to DS 7.0 or higher

2. Perhaps MSIs are not activated at the hardware setup level. To remedy this, please click the SETTINGS menu then select HARDWARE SETUP. On the analog page, ensure that the checkbox for MSIs is checked, then click OK to save this setting.

Note - please make sure that any conditioners that you have are checkmarked on this screen.

If you are using DS-7 and have activated MSI interface as described above, and MSI interfaces are still not showing up when plugged into your analog inputs, please contact us for technical support. Be sure to try more than one MSI interface, to rule out a defective MSI interface being the cause of this problem.

11-272 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MSI Compatibility Reference

MSI Modular Smart Interfaces for MDAQ and DAQ series modules

MSI-BR-ACC

MSI-BR-V-200

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

√

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

√

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

--

DAQP-STG

DAQP-

BRIDGE-A*

--

DAQP-

BRIDGE-B

--

DAQP-LV-D

√ --

Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Excitation current 4 mA at 21

V, High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -√ ----

MSI-BR-RTD

MSI-BR-CH-50

MSI-BR-TH-X

MSI-V-ACC

MSI-V-RTD

MSI-V-CH-50

200 V input adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Differential input configuration, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -not needed ----

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 and Pt2000 adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector

2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -√ ----

Charge input interface for DAQP-STG and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG with DB9 connector Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with

0.07 Hz, BNC signal connection

Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -√ √ √ --

Thermocouple type K / J / T adapter for DAQP-BRIDGE-x and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules

For use with isolated thermocouple sensors only ! (except in combination with DAQP-STG-D or DAQP-BRIDGE-A*, which are isolated)

High accuracy cold junction reference measurement, 1 m thermo cable with Mini TC connector

Automatic identification via TEDS*

-√

--

-√ ----

Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Excitation current 4 mA at 21 V, High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

-√ ---√

--

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500 and Pt1000 adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector

Automatic identification via TEDS

-√ ---

Charge input interface for DAQP-LV-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with 0.07 Hz, BNC signal connection

Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)

Automatic identification via TEDS

--

* DAQP-BRIDGE-A does not have TEDS, therefore it cannot recognize MSI interfaces

√

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-273

MSI Operation within DS-7

When you plug any one of them into the analog inputs, the software will detect it and show its name and serial number on the main channel setup screen, as shown here:

⇒ The only exception to automatic identification within Ds-7 is the DAQP-BRIDGE-A module, which does not have

TEDs interface. Therefore, although they will literally work, it is not convenient to use MsI adapters with that signal conditioner. The DAQP-sTG-D is a much better choice.

Adapters

ADAP series interfaces are passive adapters, available for various types of signal inputs. Unlike MSI interfaces, they are not controlled under the software, nor do they have a TEDS interface inside. They are strictly passive adapters. A popular one, for example, has a precision 50Ω resistor inside it, wired across the inputs, which serves as a current shunt for 0-20 mA applications.

Following these single function adapters is a table with the most popular adapters for wider applications.

ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT

The DAQP-CHARGE-A module comes with an adapter from microdot connector to BNC, allowing you to connect charge sensors with the small 10-32 microdot connectors to the

BNC input. This adapter is also available for purchase for the DAQP-CHARGE-A, or to be used in conjunction with the MSI-BR-CH-50 and MSI-V-CH-50 charge interfaces.

ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO

Isolation adapter for one CAN BUS interface. This small interface plugs into a standard DSUB9 CAN BUS interface connector, and provides real isolation between the vehicle CAN bus and the Dewetron CAN interface. This is very often needed in electrically noisy environments, and on military vehicles.

Being passive, ADAP series adapters do not show up on the Ds-7 setup screen.

However, you can select them manually in many cases, as we will show below.

11-274 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules

DAQ-SHUNT-1

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

--

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

--

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

--

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-BNC

--

DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC

DAQ-SHUNT-3

√

--

DAQP-LV-B

√

DAQP-LV-

BNC

--

DAQP-LV-D

--

DAQP-STG-D

--

Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor

100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy banana plug to Dewetron module / banana jacks on sensor side

√ √ ---√

Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor

100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy

9-pin DSUB to Dewetron module / BNC jack on sensor side

---√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x 0.3 meter cables with banana plugs

Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

--

√

--

DAQ-SHUNT-4 ---√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

---

DAQ-SHUNT-5

CONN-DSUB-9

--

√ √

--√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2 x safety banana jacks

√ ----

Mating connector for 9-pin DSUB connectors with convenient screw terminals inside

Eliminates soldering/desoldering

--

√

--

√

ADAP-MDAQ-BNC

ADAP-DAQ-BNC

√ √ √ ------

Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for MDAQ series modules

(pin-outs are the same as ADAP-DAQ-BNC, but there is an additional isolation resistor in this adapter to improve noise performance of differential MDAQ series modules)

------√ √

ADAP-BAN-BNC ---

Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for DAQ series modules

-√ not needed √ ---

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-275

Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-BNC

DAQP-LV-B

DAQP-LV-

BNC

DAQP-LV-D DAQP-STG-D

Adapter from banana jack to BNC.

Allows you to connect your cables with banana plugs into Dewetron modules which have BNC input connectors.

ADAP-MIC-BNC-CBL

ADAP-BR-1/4-120

-not needed

--

√

--

--

√

--

--

--

√

--

--

Microphone adapter and 6 ft BNC cable. Allows the use of standard unpowered mics with your Dewetron system.

Adapter: 3 Pin XLR Male to BNC Female Audio Adapter

Contacts (XLR) : 3 Genders: BNC (Female) / XLR (Male) Wired: Pin 1 & 3 = Ground / Pin 2 = Hot

Includes 6 ft BNC-BNC cable (not shown in picture here)

--

-not needed

ADAP-BR-1/4-350 not needed √ --

Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 120 Ω

DSUB9 input and output connectors

----

Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 350 Ω

DSUB9 input and output connectors

-not needed

Using Adapters in DS-7

Since ADAP adapters do not have any kind of electronic interface, they do not show up in the software automatically - you have to set them up yourself. But DEWESoft makes this easy. Simply access the SETUP screen for any channel that you have an adapter plugged into, and enter the appropriate settings and scaling information there.

In the next section we will look at setting up a few popular adapters in the most commonly requested scenarios.

11-276 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Using the DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter

Let’s take the case of the DAQ-SHUNT-1, which is a 50Ω shunt adapter for making 4-20 mA current measurements. Let’s see how to set it up within a DAQP-LV-B module. When you first open the SETUP dialog for this channel, by default it will be set to the VOLTAGE measurement mode, like this:

Therefore, it is necessary to change the mode from voltage to current, as shown here:

When you do this, the software changes the unit of measure from V to mA, and also presents you with the ability to select Shunt 1, Shunt 2 (Shunt 2 applies to Shunt 3, Shunt4, and Shunt 5, which are the same electrically, but which only have different I/O connector configurations), as well as a variety of Dewetron specialized shunts for automotive applications:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-277

Simply select the shunt that is appropriate. In this case, when you choose Shunt 1, DEWESoft will automatically scale the input. And notice that the measuring ranges are now given directly in mA instead of voltage units.

Have a look at the range selector:

Therefore you can simply select the 20 mA range, and there is no need to do any other scaling unless you need to convert the 20 mA signal to something else.

11-278 | OWNER’s GUIDE

For instance, if your 4 - 20 mA signal really represents -100 to 5000 PSI, you could enter these scaling values quite easily on this same screen. First change the Units from mA to PSI, then below in the Scaling area, enter these values:

That’s all you would have to do! Any scaling parameters which are linear can be entered in this way.

-

Note: the ranges shown above apply to the DAQP-LV module. When you use the DAQ-sHUNT-1 with other modules, the ranges will be different according to which module is being used.

Using custom Shunt resistors

After selecting CURRENT input type you can also select CUSTOM instead of one of the preset current adapters, at the end of the list:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-279

When you do this, the software allows you to enter the value of the shunt resistor that you are using, as well as the maximum wattage. The software will do the appropriate Ω’s law calculations to amperage for you automatically.

Note - Dewetron conditioners such as the MDAQ-sUB-BRIDGE and MDAQ-sUB-sTG also support the direct selection of CURRENT as a measuring type. Therefore you can use them with shunts as shown above. you simply need to adapt the input connector to handle a shunt resistor. An idea choice is the CONN-DsUB-9 mating connector, which makes it easy to insert your own shunt resistor into the mating connector and plug it into the

DsUB 9-pin input connector of the module.

…Using Current sensors

11-280 | OWNER’s GUIDE

In this case we recommend that you leave the Measurement type to Voltage, and simply enter the appropriate engineering units and scaling factor. For example, if you were using a current clamp that could measure

250 Amps, but which output 0.1 V/A, you would simply set up this channel like this:

After you set the Units to A, then enter the scaling factors as shown above so that 0.1 V = 1 A, simply use the Range selector to choose the appropriate current measuring range. Keep an eye on the right side of the scaling BAR in the bottom left corner of the screen. Notice that when you select the 25V measuring range, you will get a full scale 250 A measuring range. This is perfect. You can select smaller ranges if you expect that the current input will not really reach 250 A. Choose the range that best fits to your current sensor AND the desired measuring range.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sIGNAL/sENsOR ADAPTERs | 11-281

Using the ADAP-BR-1/4-120 or 350 bridge completion adapters

These adapters are only needed for Dewetron bridge conditioners which do not have internal completion for

1/4 bridge sensors. Therefore they are not needed by the DAQP-STG, DAQP-BRIDGE-A, DAQP-BRIDGE-

A, or MDAQ-SUB-STG-D, because these all support full bridge, half bridge and quarter bridge with internal completion for many bride wiring scenarios.

However, these adapters to apply to Dewetron conditioners that lack 1/4 bridge completion, including the

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE-D (which supports full and half bridge inputs only), as well as the inputs of the DEWE-

43, DEWE-101, and DEWE-3213 (those models support full bridge inputs only). Select the full bridge mode of the MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE, and then plug in the completion adapter.

This is less convenient than using a more capable signal conditioner, not only because of the external adapter, but because you cannot use the balance buttons in this mode. But it serves to adapt this less capable conditioner to handle 1/4 bridge sensors.

11-282 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 283

12

HsI series signal Conditioners

There are several series of Dewetron signal conditioners that may be installed in your system in many possible combinations. This section covers the HSI series plugin modules. These are user-exchangeable modules, all of which have the highest bandwidth that we offer in a plug-in module, and robust signal isolation, protecting you and your measurements against ground loops and other typical measurement problems.

HSI modules have the advantage of being “hot swappable,” meaning that they can be exchanged by the user any time, even with the system is powered on.

This modularily also means that the DEWETRON system can be converted very quickly to handle different measuring requirements and applications - simply plug in the modules that you need, make sure their addresses are correct, and then you’re up and running in a matter of moments.

DEWETRON HSI modules are small, multi-range ISOLATED signal conditioners, and hundreds of thousands of them are in use all around the world right now.

HSI Series Modules

HSI Module Connectors

Front Panel Connector Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown in the appropriate module description.

Rear Connector Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.

HSI, DAQ, and PAD module rear panel

284 | OWNER’s GUIDE

General module specifications

Module dimensions: 20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)

(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)

Front cover:

Environmental:

20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)

(W x H x D without connector)

Temp. range storage: -30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

Temp. range operating: -5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Rel. humidity (MIL202): 0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

RFI susceptibility: ±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

Common Information

Calibration information

„

„

„

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions.

Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

RS-232/485 interface

HSI modules can be configured via RS-485 interface. DEWETRON instruments include an internal RS-

232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all DEWETRON signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: 9600 data bits: 8 parity: no parity stop bits: 1 handshake: not required

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 285

Adding HSI modules to your Dewtetron system:

HSI modules can be plugged directly into DEWETRON models which have slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plug-in modules. Additional modules can be connected to most models by adding an external DEWE-30 or

DEWE-50 series expansion chassis to the system.

Typical HSI module configurations:

„ Installing 8 modules directly into the DEWE-3210: „ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, for accessing 16 total channels:

„ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, plus another 16 slot DEWE-30-16 rack, for a total of 32 HSI modules:

Analog/

Power/

RS485

Analog/

RS485

The DEWE-30-16 requires that an additional 16-ch A/D card be added into the DEWE-3210 mainframe!

Analog/

Power/

RS485

286 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Addressing HSI modules

Each HSI module must have a unique address (just like DAQP, PAD, and other modules). The address is stored inside the HSI module in non-volatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a HSI module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.

This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up your signals to what you believe is HSI module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.

There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.

„

„

„

There are essentially two ways to address your modules:

FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.

FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.

Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

Within DS-7, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:

Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 287

Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.

When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on. Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.

If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot, press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.

When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure

FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:

And your choices are:

288 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.

If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the prompts.

If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.

If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL

Module Installation Trouble-shooting

There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:

⇒ Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.

Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective and cannot communicate properly.

solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.

Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address, or is conflicting with it.

solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to address it

Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly good modules.

solution: start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PREssED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. select FILL when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 289

or push in the module... PUsH IN THE MODULE. The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your sETUP screen.

⇒ Problem: some modules show up with the sERIAL NUMBERs in the amplifier column, and some do not.

Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.

Solution: N/A

290 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-HV Isolated High Voltage module

„ Input ranges:

„ Bandwidth:

„ Isolation:

7 ranges (±20 V to ±1400 V)

2 MHz

1.8 kVRMS line to line 1.4 kVRMS line to ground

„ Input impedance: 10 MΩ

„ Protection: 4 kV burst, surge

„ Signal connection: Insulated banana jacks

V

HSI-HV Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:

1 year accuracy (2)

HSI-HV

20 V(1), 50 V(1), 100 V, 200 V, 400 V, 800 V, 1400 V

Range Signal frequency Accuracy

20 V; 50 V

100 V to 1400 V

DC

DC

0.1Hz to 1kHz

>1kHz to 10kHz

>10kHz to 50kHz

>50kHz to 100kHz

>100kHz to 1MHz

>1MHz to 2MHz

±0.05 % of reading ±60 mV

±0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

±0.05 % of reading ±0.01 % of range

±0.1 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

±0.4 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

±(0.016*f) % of reading ±0.1 % of range

±(0.010*f) % of reading ±1 % of range

±(0.014*f) % of reading ±3 % of range f = signal frequency in kHz

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Offset drift:

0.05%

Typically 20 ppm/°C (max. 50 ppm/°C)

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Signal delay @ full bandwidth

Filter selection:

Filter (low-pass):

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage

20 V to 100 V

200 V to 1400 V

50 V:

200 V:

1400 V: typical 0.5mV/°C max. 4mV/°C typical 5ppm/°C max. 20 ppm of Range/°C

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

10 MΩ || 2.2 pF

2 MHz

~ 290 ns

Push button or software

100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz (3)

Bessel or Butterworth, 40 dB/decade

10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR

110 dB

110 dB

110 dB

SNR

91 dB

95 dB

95 dB

100 kHz bandwidth

SFDR SNR

110 dB

110 dB

110 dB

82 dB

92 dB

95 dB

>80 dB @ 50 Hz

70 dB @ 400 Hz

Line to Ground 1.4kVrms

Line to Line 1.8kVrms

60 dB @ 1 kHz

48 dB @ 10 kHz

1 MHz bandwidth

SFDR

94 dB

94 dB

94 dB

SNR

76 dB

82 dB

82 dB

2 MHz bandwidth

SFDR

84 dB

84 dB

84 dB

SNR

73 dB

77 dB

77 dB

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 291

Parameter HSI-HV

Protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current maximum

Output protection

Power supply

Power consumption

Power On default settings

Surge (1.2 / 50)

Burst (5 kHz)

RS485 interface for module control

Power supply

TEDS support:

CAT III 600

CAT IV 300

±4000 V

±4000 V

±5 V

10 Ω

35 mA CAUTION: do not exceed maximum output current!

Short to ground for 10 sec.

±9 VDC ± 1%

1.2 W

Software programable

Yes

Integrated temperature sensor

N/A

MSI support: N/A

(1) 20 V and 50 V are auxiliary ranges and have a limited bandwidth.

20 V range typically 0.9 Mhz

50 V range typically 1.9 Mhz

(2) Conditions for accuracy: Module temperature is calibration temperature ±5 °C; humidity is 30 to 90 RH;

AC accuracy: the highest filter (2 Mhz) has to be activated. f = signal frequency in kHz.

for the 2 year accuarcy multiply all % of range and % of reading values by 1.5.

(3) 2 MHz filter: exclusively Butterworth 60 dB/decade. Please consider possible bandwidth limitation of further components in the measuring chain, e.g. A/D cards or signal conditioning mainframe

Signal hook-up

HSI-HV: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high voltages or currents.

⇒ Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!

⇒ Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high voltage!

⇒ Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!

⇒ Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-HV and

DAQP-HV-s3 module, and at the signal source side.

⇒ Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.

⇒ High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.

292 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module

„ Voltage input: 12 ranges (10 mV to 50 V)

„ Current input: ±20 mA using DAQ-SHUNT-1 (option)

±5 A using DAQ-SHUNT-4

„

or

Bandwidth: 2 MHz

V

„ Isolation: 1 kV RMS with banana jacks

„ Additional signal input types using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

RTD to Pt2000)

CHARGE

Constant current sensors

12 ranges (10 mV to 5 V)

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω); requires MSI-V-RTD

Charge up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CHA-50

HSI-LV Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges

Push button selectable ranges

One year accuracy (1)

Input coupling

Gain linearity

Gain drift range

Offset drift:

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Bipolar

HSI-LV

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±500 mV and ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50 V

±10 mV, ±50 mV, ±200 mV, ±1 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±50 V

Range

10 mV to 100 mV

Signal Frequency

DC

Accuracy

±0.02 % of reading ±60 μV

2.5 V

200 mV to 50 V

10 mV to 100 mV

200 mV to 50 V

DC

DC

0.1 Hz to 10 kHz

>10 kHz to 50 kHz

>50 kHz to 100 kHz

>100 kHz to 1 MHz

>1 MHz to 2 MHz

0.1 Hz to 1 kHz

>1 kHz to 10 kHz

>10 kHz to 50 kHz

>50 kHz to 100 kHz

>100 kHz to 1 MHz

>1 MHz to 2 MHz

DC

DC

±0.02 % of reading ±0.1 % of range

±0.02 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

±0.1 % of reading ±30 μV

±0.4 % of reading ±30 μV

±(0.016*f) % of reading ±0.1 % of range ±(0.010*f)

% of reading ±1 % of range ±(0.014*f) % of reading

±3 % of range

±0.05 % of reading ±0.01 % of range ±0.1 % of reading ±0.05 % of range ±0.4 % of reading ±0.05

% of range ±(0.016*f) % of reading ±0.1 % of range

±(0.010*f) % of reading ±1 % of range ±(0.014*f)

% of reading ±3 % of range

DC or AC software selectable (1.5 Hz standard, custom filters upon request, down to 0.01 Hz)

Typically 0.01 %; max. 0.04 % of full scale

Typically 10 ppm/°C (max. 30 ppm/°C)

±0.02 % of reading ±60 μV

±0.02 % of reading ±0.08 % of range

10 mV to 200 mV:

500 mV to 50 V:

Typically 3 μV/°C

Typically 10 ppm of range/°C

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

1 MΩ

2 MHz

Push button or software

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 293

Filter

Filter type

Typical SFDR and SNR

Typical CMRR

20 mV

1V

50 V

50 Hz

1 kHz

10 kHz

100 kHz

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz (2)

Bessel or Butterworth; 40 dB/decade

10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR SNR

88 dB

110 dB

110 dB

78 dB

98 dB

98 dB

10 mV to 1 V range

130 dB

120 dB

95 dB

75 dB

10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR SNR

88 dB

110 dB

110 dB

71 dB

95 dB

95 dB

2.5 V to 50 V range:

100 dB

75 dB

55 dB

25 dB

1 MHz bandwidth

SFDR SNR

77 dB

93 dB

94 dB

60 dB

82 dB

82 dB

2 MHz bandwidth

SFDR SNR

76 dB

84 dB

85 dB

56 dB

75 dB

75 dB

350 VDC

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connectors)

±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %), 200 mA resettable fuse protected (3)

±5 V

Input overvoltage protection

Isolation voltage

Sensor supply

Output voltage

Output resistance

Maximum Output current

Output protection

Power On default settings

10 Ω

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

Software programable

Power supply

Power consumption

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.8 W without sensor supply

RS-485 interface for module control

TEDS support

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 3)

MSI-V-ACC; MSI-V-RTD; MSI-V-CHA-50 MSI support

(1) Conditions for accuracy: Module temperature is calibration temperature ±5 °C; humidity is 30 to 90 RH.

AC accuracy: the highest filter (2 MHz) has to be activated. f = signal frequency in kHz.

For the 2 year accuracy multiply all % of range and % of reading values by 1.5.

(2) 2 MHz filter: exclusively for Butterworth 60 dB/decade - refer to filter specifications. Please consider possible bandwidth limitation of further components in the measuring chain, e.g. A/D card or signal conditioning mainframe.

(3) Overall current should not exceed DEWE-30-xx maximum power.

HSI-LV Signal Hook-up

HSI-V-B model with banana jacks

HSI-V-BNC model with BNC connector

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

6

7

4

5

8

9

HSI-LV pin-outs

With 9-pin DSUB (DB9) or LEMO (EGG.1B.307)

DB9

1

LEMO

7

Description

TEDS

2

3

1

N/A

IN +

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

6

2

5

3

N/A

4

GND (not isolated)

+9 V (200 mA max.)

+12 V (200 mA max.)

IN -

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

-9 V (200 mA max.)

294 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-LV: Typical sensor connections

Sensor with differential output, module powered Current measurement using external shunt

Current loop-powered measurement with external shunt

Sensor with common ground

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 295

HSI-LV Shunt Options

There are several current shunts that are available for this module, which can handle currents up to 5A. For higher currents, please use a rated CLAMP or FLEX COIL or other current transformer which has a voltage output.

Model Input Range Accuracy Description

DAQ-SHUNT-1

DAQ-SHUNT-1R

DAQ-SHUNT-4

100 mA

100 mA

5A

0.1%

0.1%

±0.1% < 10 ppm

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

Compatible with all Dewetron voltage modules and break-out boxes with banana jacks

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

(This is the resistor from the DAQ-SHUNT-1 option above - for user mounting/integration)

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x safety banana jacks

DAQ-SHUNT-5

5A ±0.1% < 10 ppm

296 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-STG Isolated Universal Input Module

Strain gauge, bridge sensors:

Piezoresistive bridge:

Voltage input:

RTD:

Resistance:

Isolation:

Signal input connection:

±0.1 to ±1000 mV/V (@ 5 VDC excitation)

±0.5 to ±10000 mV/mA (@ 1 mA excitation)

±500 μV to ±10 V

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω)

25 mΩ to 100 kΩ

350 VDC

9-pin SUB-D connector (standard) or LEMO (optional)

Additional signal input using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

THERMOCOUPLE

CHARGE

VOLTAGE

Constant current powered sensors (accelerometers, mics);

12 ranges (±2.5 mV to 10 V); requires MSI-V-ACC

Popular T/C types; requires MSI-BR-TH-J, -K, or -T

Charge sensors up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CH-50 up to ±200 V requires MSI-BR-V-200

HSI-STG specifications

V

Parameter

Gain:

Voltage Input ranges: Sensitivity @ 5 VDC excitation:

Resistance:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Voltage Input Accuracy:

Gain drift

Offset drift

Linearity

Excitation voltage:

Accuracy

Drift

Current limit

Protection

Excitation current:

Accuracy

Drift

Compliance voltage

Output impedance

Supported Sensors:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Shunt and completion resistor accuracy:

Automatic bridge balance:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (low pass):

Filter characteristics:

HSI-STG

0.5 to 10 000

±0.5 , ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2V, ±5 V,±10 V ±0.1 , ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1,

±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 mV/V

25 mΩ to 100 kΩ

>100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

3.5 nV * √Hz

±0.05 % of reading ± 0.02 % of range ±10 μV typical 10 ppm/°K max. 20 ppm/°K typical 0.3 μV/°K + 10 ppm of range, max 2 μV/°K + 20 ppm of range typical 0.02 %

0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5,10 and 12 VDC software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

±0.03 % ±1 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

100 mA

Continuous short to ground

0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20mA software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

0.05% ±2μA

15ppm/°K

12V

>1 MΩ

4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 3- or

4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ω (software programmable)1) 4-wire full bridge with constant current excitation (piezoresistive bridge sensors) Potentiometric Resistance Resistance

Temperature Detection: PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000

80 Ω to 10 kΩ @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation

Two internal shunt resistors 59.88 kΩ and 175 kΩ

0.05% ±15ppm/°K

Input range 500μV to 1V: ±200 % of Range

2.5V to 5V: ±40% of Range

2 MHz

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10Hz to 100Hz:

300kHz:

Butterworth or Bessel 40 dB/dec ( 2nd order)

Bessel 60 dB/dec (3rd order)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 297

Parameter

Typical SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC excitation:

Typical CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC excitation:

Isolation

Common mode Voltage

Over voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

HSI-STG Pin-outs

HSI-STG

66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V

160 dB [160 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

±350 VDC continuous (for input, excitation and TEDS interface)

±350 VDC input to housing

±50 VDC input (+) to input (-)

±5 V

< 1 Ω

Max. 5 mA; short to ground protected for 10 seconds

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433

MSI-BR-TH-x, MSI-BR-ACC, MSI-BR-V-200 ,MSI-BR-CH-50

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1.7 W @ 350 Ω, 2.15 W @ 120 Ω (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation)

Absolute max.: 3 W (maximum excitation @ maximum current)

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

298 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-STG-D Cables and Shielding

To reduce the influence of electromagnetic disturbances, shielded twisted pair cables are recommended. Connect the shield to the isolated GND (Pin4) to get the best result.

The twisted pairs for full bridge, half bridge, voltage and resistance mode are:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

Twisted pair 3

Twisted pair 4

EXC+

Sense+

IN+

R +

PIN1

PIN6

EXC-

Sense-

PIN8

PIN3

PIN2 IN- PIN7

PIN5 GND(isolated) PIN4

If TEDS is used also the shield could be used as GNDisolated

For quarter bridge mode:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

IN+

R +

PIN2 Sense1

PIN5 EXC-

PIN3

PIN8

HSI-STG Operation Notes

Free variable gain and excitation

The gain, excitation and offset values of this module are free programmable. So it is possible to normalize any physical sensor input signal to the ±5V output of the module. By using these settings as power on default, standalone solutions could be easily realized.

Gain: from 0.5 to 10000. The module input ranges are based on predefined gain values. The module automatically chose the best gain combination of the internal amplifiers to keep the overall noise and drift as low as possible.

Output offset: Could be programmed from the positive to the negative full scale range except on the input ranges above 1V.

Due to internal structure here the offset could be set from +20 % to – 20 %.

Excitation Voltage: The excitation voltage is programmable from 0 to 12 V in 185 μV steps. Setting the excitation to 0 V for example allows you to determine the noise of the sensor cabling. The sense terminals have to be connected to the excitation terminals all the time. Even if the remote sensing is not required.

Excitation current: The current could be programmed from 0.1 mA to 20 mA in 0.3 μA steps. The maximum compliance voltage is 12 V. The compliance voltage is automatically balanced around the internal GND. This minimizes the common mode error.

Power On Default function

You can store the latest settings of the module in the internal EE-Prom memory. Once the module restarts, it comes up automatically with these setting. This is important for stand alone applications and for fail-safe reasons.

Filter

The Module has nine selectable low-pass filters from 10 Hz to 100 kHz. The filter characteristic can be set to Butterworth

2nd order or Bessel 2nd order. An additional fixed filter inside this module is a 3rd order Bessel filter with a guaranteed -3 dB bandwidth of 300 kHz.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 299

HSI-STG Amplifier balance

The amplifier balance allows eliminating automatically all internal amplifier offsets. It switches the differential amplifier inputs

IN+ and IN- to the internal isolated GND reference point. Then the output offset of the module is automatically adjusted to zero for all ranges. This function takes up to 8 seconds. Automatically previous stored sensor offset values are cleared.

Sensor Balance

Typically every strain gage sensor has a certain offset. That comes from manufacturing tolerances or because of sensor mounting. By performing a bridge balance this sensor offset could be completely removed on the analog side up to 200 % of the actual range. This allows using the full dynamic of the AD-board instead of losing resolution because of digital offset shifting. Output offset and sensor balance may not exceed 200 % of range (20 % for ranges above 1 V).

Internal Completion Resistors

The DAQP-STG has an internal half bridge completion and two internal quarter bridge completions for 120 Ω and 350 Ω strain gages. The used high precision resistors with low temperature drift allow a long- time stable measurement of almost every strain gage type without using an external completion network.

Internal Shunt

With two internal shunt resistors (59.88 kΩ and 175 kΩ) and one spare socket for a customised shunt, the DAQP-STG has wide flexibility in case of shunt calibration. A jumper network gives the possibility to connect the internal shunts to either Sense+

Sense – IN+ or IN- to be compatible to existing sensor types and correction calculation methods. This technology is used to correct the complete measurement chain gain error from the sensor input to the digital signal output. It is based on the known ratio between the shunt resistor and the strain gage resistance.

Short

It switches the differential amplifier inputs IN+ and IN- from the input terminals to the internal isolated GND reference point.

With this function the absolute sensor offset could be determined.

CAL

It applies a high precision internal reference signal with 80% of the full scale value to the module. For ranges above 1V the reference signal level is 20 % of range.

Self Test

The self test function is a software controlled procedure that checks in the first step the amplifier itself. In the second step a basic sensor check will be performed. This test is only available in DeweSoft if an AD-Card is installed.

Part 1: Amplifier Test

The amplifier offset is checked by using the Short function The 80% Cal signal is applied to the amplifier. The complete isolation amplifier including the AD-Card is checked by using this test signal. The self test circuit switches the amplifier input to the positive excitation voltage, so also the input amplifier is checked. Warning: if there is a short circuit on the excitation this test will fail.

Part 2: Basic Sensor Test

Bridge Sensor: It is checked if the supply current doesn’t exceed the maximum value, and if the excitation voltage is within the predefined value.

300 | OWNER’s GUIDE

HSI-STG Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

HSI-STG Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used. A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the DAQP-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, HsI | 301

The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

HSI-STG Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection (Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!

The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance

4-wire sensor connection (Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the HSI-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

302 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire

For resistance and RTD mode, 4-wire connection is recommended (2-wire connection will not compensate wire resistance).

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V. This will internally connect the IN- to the GNDisolated to improve the common mode rejection.

Sensor with supply, and voltage output

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-303

13

DAQ series signal Conditioners

There are several series of Dewetron signal conditioners that may be installed in your system in many possible combinations. This section covers the DAQ series plugin modules. These are user-exchangeable modules, nearly all of which have robust signal isolation, protecting you and your measurements against ground loops and other typical measurement problems.

DAQ modules have the advantage of being “hot swappable,” meaning that they can be exchanged by the user any time, even with the system is powered on.

This modularily also means that the DEWETRON system can be converted very quickly to handle different measuring requirements and applications - simply plug in the modules that you need, make sure their addresses are correct, and then you’re up and running in a matter of moments.

DEWETRON DAQ modules are small, multi-range ISOLATED signal conditioners, and hundreds of thousands of them are in use all around the world right now.

DAQ Series Modules

DAQ Module Connectors

Front Panel Connector Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown in the appropriate module description.

Rear Connector Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.

HSI, DAQ, and PAD module rear panel

13-304 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MODUlE INPUT TYPE RANGES TEDS

High Voltage Measurement

DAQP-HV

V

DAQP-HV-S3

High voltage

±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±800, ±1400 V

V

DAQP-DMM

High voltage

±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±800, ±1400 V

High voltage

V

Low/Medium Voltage & Current Measurement

DAQP-LV

Voltage, current with external shunt or current sensor

V

IEPE via MSI-

V-ACC

PT100, Pt200,

Pt500, Pt1000,

Pt2000 and resistance via MSI-

V-RTD

±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±1000 V

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,

±500 mV

±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50 V

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,

±500 mV

±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10 V

-200 to 1000 C and 0 to

6.5 kΩ

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

DAQP-V

V

Voltage, current with external shunt or current sensor

±10, ±100 mV

±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V

N/A

DAQP-LA-SC

Current

Note: 5Arms continuous

DAQP-LA-B

Current

Note: intended for 4-20 mA applications

Bridge / Strain Gage Measurement

±0.1, ±0.3, ±1, ±3 A

±10 A peak, ±30 A peak max 5Arms continuous current

N/A

±2, ±6, ±20 mA

±60 mA, ±200 mA, ±0.6A max 0.6 A

N/A

BANDWIDTh (BW)

FIlTERS (lP / hP)

ISOlATION (ISO)

OVER-VOlTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.8 kVrms

(line-to-line)

BW: 700 kHz

BW: 20/30 kHz

LP: 10, 100, Hz

1, 2, 20/30 kHz

BW: 50 kHz

LP: 10, 100 Hz

1, 10, 50 kHz

ISO: 1.8 kVrms

(line-to-line)

ISO: 1.5 kVrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: up to 1 kVrms

(with banana jacks)

OP: 350 VDC

ISO: up to 1 kVrms

OP: ±500 VDC or

350 Vrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.4 kVrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.4 kVrms

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-305

MODUlE INPUT TYPE RANGES

DAQP-STG

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

DAQP-BRIDGE-B

DAQP-CFB

Strain gages, bridge sensors, voltages

Bridge:

Voltage:

Pot/Ωic sensors

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

Strain gages, bridge sensors

Pot/Ωic sensors

Resistance/Ωs

Full range of thermocouple type

±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50 mV/V

(@ 5 Vdc excitation)

200 Ω to 10 kΩ

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

Strain gages, bridge sensors

Pot/Ωic sensors

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

AC bridge, strain gage, carrier sensors

Full range of thermocouple type

±0.1, ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5,

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100 mV/V

(@ 5 Vdc excitation)

200 Ω to 10 kΩ

Full range of thermocouple type

Bridge: 0.1 to 1000 mV/V

Inductive: 5 to 1000 mV/V

Inductive/ LVDT sensors

Voltage: 0.2 to 1000 mV/vrms

N/A

Yes

N/A

Charge / IEPE Measurement

DAQP-ACC-A

IEPE sensors

±50, ±166, ±500 mV; ±1.66,

±5 V (Gain: 1, 3, 10, 30, 100)

Yes

DAQP-CHARGE-A

IEPE and charge sensors

Note: selectable integration and double integration

DAQP-CHARGE-B

Charge sensors

Note: selectable time constant for static charge sensors

Temperature and Universal Measurement

Charge: 5, 50, 500, 5000,

50000 pC

IEPE: ±5, ±50, ±500 mV,

±5 V

(0, 20, 40, 60 dB)

N/A

±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10 000,

±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000

000 pC

N/A

TEDS BANDWIDTh (BW)

FIlTERS (lP / hP)

ISOlATION (ISO)

OVER-VOlTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: 20 kHz

LP: 10, 100 Hz

1, 5, 20 kHz

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: ±50 VDC

BW: 200 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 200 kHz

ISO: N/A

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: dc to 2.3 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1 kHz

ISO: N/A

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: 0.5 Hz to 300 kHz

LP: 1, 10, 100, 300 kHz

HP: 0.5 Hz, 5 Hz

N/A

BW: 0.1 Hz to 50 kHz

LP: 100 Hz; 1, 3, 10, 50 kHz

HP: 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz

N/A

BW: 0.5 Hz to 100 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz;

1, 3, 10, 30, 100 kHz

HP: DC, 0.0001 Hz to

0.5 Hz

ISO: 350 VDC

13-306 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MODUlE

DAQP-THERM

DAQP-MULTI

INPUT TYPE

Thermocouple

(universal)

Thermocouple

(universal)

RTD

Voltage

V

Resistance

Bridge (constant current)

Frequency to Voltage Measurement

DAQP-FREQ-A

RANGES

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U freely programmable within the maximum range of the selected thermocouple type, internal linearization, internal

CJC

N/A

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U type, internal linearization, freely programmable range, internal CJC

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,

Pt1000 and Pt2000 sensors, programmable range (2-wire and 4-wire only)

10 ranges from ±5 mV to

± 5 V freely programmable range from 1 Ω to 1 MΩ

4-wire full bridge sensors,

13 ranges from ±0.5 to 5000 mV/mA

Yes

TEDS BANDWIDTh (BW)

FIlTERS (lP / hP)

ISOlATION (ISO)

OVER-VOlTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 3 kHz

LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100

Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel;

2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order

(programmable)

ISO: ±1000 Vrms continuous

BW: 3 kHz

LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100

Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel;

2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order programmable

ISO: 1000 Vrms continuous (for input, excitation and

TEDS interface)

Frequency to voltage

100, 1k, 5k, 20k, 100k and

200 kHz ranges;

Trigger level range 0 to 130 V,

Additional TTL output

(isolated pulse output of input signal)

N/A

Output modules

DAQN-V-OUT

BW: 200 kHz

Selectable input and output filters (range-dependent)

ISO: 350 Vrms

1:1 output module, from 0 to

±10 V; Accuracy ±0.05 %

Connector choices: banana,

BNC, or 9-pin DSUB connector

N/A

OUT

Analog output BW: 400 Hz

ISO: CMV output to input, continuous:

1500 VRMS max

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-307

General module specifications

Module dimensions: 20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)

(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)

Front cover:

Environmental:

20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)

(W x H x D without connector)

Temp. range storage: -30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

Temp. range operating: -5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Rel. humidity (MIL202): 0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

RFI susceptibility: ±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

Common Information

Calibration information

„

„

„

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions.

Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

RS-232/485 interface

DAQP modules can be configured via RS-485 interface. DEWETRON instruments include an internal RS-

232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all DEWETRON signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: 9600 data bits: 8 parity: no parity stop bits: 1 handshake: not required

13-308 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Adding DAQ modules to your Dewtetron system:

DAQ modules can be plugged directly into DEWETRON models which have slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plug-in modules. Additional modules can be connected to most models by adding an external DEWE-30 or

DEWE-50 series expansion chassis to the system.

Typical DAQ module configurations:

„ Installing 8 modules directly into the DEWE-3210: „ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, for accessing 16 total channels:

„ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, plus another 16 slot DEWE-30-16 rack, for a total of 32 DAQ modules:

Analog/

Power/

RS485

Analog/

RS485

The DEWE-30-16 requires that an additional 16-ch A/D card be added into the DEWE-3210 mainframe!

Analog/

Power/

RS485

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-309

Addressing DAQ modules

Each DAQ module must have a unique address (just like HSI, PAD, and other modules). The address is stored inside the DAQ module in non-volatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a DAQ module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.

This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up your signals to what you believe is DAQ module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.

There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.

„

„

„

There are essentially two ways to address your modules:

FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.

FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.

Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

Within DS-7, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:

Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:

13-310 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.

When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on. Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.

If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot, press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.

When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure

FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:

And your choices are:

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-311

„

„

„

„

If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.

If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the prompts.

If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.

If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL

Module Installation Trouble-shooting

There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:

⇒ Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.

Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective and cannot communicate properly.

solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.

Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address, or is conflicting with it.

solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to address it

Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly good modules.

solution: start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PREssED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. select FILL when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button

13-312 | OWNER’s GUIDE or push in the module... PUsH IN THE MODULE. The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your sETUP screen.

⇒ Problem: some modules show up with the sERIAL NUMBERs in the amplifier column, and some do not.

Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.

Solution: N/A

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-313

DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz)

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

7 ranges (±20 V to ±1400 V)

300 kHz (version DAQP-HV-S3: 700 kHz)

1.8 kVRMS line to line 1.4 kVRMS line to ground

Banana sockets (S3 = Screw terminals)

V

DAQP-HV Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:

DC accuracy:

20 V and 50 V

100 V to 1400 V

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Offset drift:

20 V to 100 V

200 V to 1400 V

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter (lowpass):

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage

Protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

DAQP-HV

20 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V, 400 V, 800 V, 1400 V

±0.05 % of reading ±40mV

±0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

0.03%

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)

50 V:

200 V:

1400 V:

Surge (1.2/50)

Burst(5kHz) typical 0.5mV/°K max. 4mV/°K typical 5ppm/°K max. 20 ppm of Range/°K

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

10 MΩ

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz

SFDR

98

98

98

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

76 dB 101 81 dB 108 90 dB

84 dB 101 89 dB 108 91 dB

86 dB 102 91 dB 107 92 dB

>80 dB @ 50 Hz

70 dB @ 400 Hz

60 dB @ 1 kHz

48 dB @ 10 kHz

Line to Ground 1.4kVrms

Line to Line 1.8kVrms

CAT III 600

CAT IV 300

±4000V

±4000V

±5 V

<10 Ω

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.7 W

13-314 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Power On default settings:

RS485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

DAQP-HV

Software programable

Yes

N/A

N/A

1) The 300 kHz filter setting applies only to the Bessell filter type

Signal hook-up

DAQP-HV: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high voltages or currents.

DAQP-HV-S3: The insulated screw terminal panels are the signal connection point. Always make your connections before applying voltage to them.

⇒ Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!

⇒ Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high voltage!

⇒ Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!

⇒ Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-HV and

DAQP-HV-s3 module, and at the signal source side.

⇒ Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.

⇒ High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-315

DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz)

Voltage input:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal input:

6 ranges (±10 V to ±1000 V)

30 kHz maximum

1500 VRMS

Insulated banana jacks

V

DAQP-DMM Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Range selection:

DC accuracy:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Input resistance:

Bandwidth (-3 dB ±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 V to 40 V range

100 V to 200 V range

400 V to 1000 V range

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter characteristics

@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 3 kHz

@ 30 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

10 V range

100 V range

1000 V range

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

DAQP-DMM

±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 V

Pushbutton or software command

0.1 % of reading ±0.1 % of range

Better than ±0.03 %

Typ. 20 ppm/°K, max. 40 ppm/°K

10 MΩ (±0.1 %)

Typical 20 kHz

Typical 25 kHz

30 kHz

Pushbutton or software command

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Butterworth 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

60 dB

76 dB

81 dB

73 dB @ 0 Hz

70 dB @ 50 Hz

57 dB @ 400 Hz

1.5 kVRMS

±5 V

<10 Ω

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.65 W typical

Yes

N/A

N/A

13-316 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Signal hook-up

DAQP-DMM: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high voltages or currents.

⇒ Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!

⇒ Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high voltage!

⇒ Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!

⇒ Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-DMM module, and at the signal source side.

⇒ Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.

⇒ High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-317

DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz)

Voltage input:

Current input:

Bandwidth:

12 ranges (10 mV to 50 V)

±20 mA using DAQ-SHUNT-1 (option)

±5 A using DAQ-SHUNT-4 or DAQ-SHUNT-5

300 kHz

Isolation: 350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

Additional signal input types using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

RTD

CHARGE

Constant current powered sensors (accels,mics);

12 ranges (10 mV to 5 V); requires MSI-V-ACC

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω); requires MSI-V-RTD

Charge up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CHA-50

V

DAQP-LV Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:

Push button selectable ranges:

DC accuracy:

Input coupling:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Offset drift:

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Typical CMRR:

Input overvoltage protection:

Isolation voltage:

Sensor supply:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Bipolar:

Unipolar:

10 mV to 200 mV:

500 mV to 50 V:

20 mV

1V

50 V

DAQP-LV

10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 500 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V

10 mV, 50 mV, 200 mV, 1 V, 5 V, 10 V, 50 V

Range Accuracy

10 mV to 50 mV ±0.02 % of reading ±40 μV

100 mV to 50 V ±0.02 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

10 mV to 50 mV ±0.04 % of reading ±40 μV

100 mV to 50 V ±0.04 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

DC or AC software selectable (1.5 Hz standard, cust.on request down to 0.01 Hz)

0.01 % of full scale

Typically 10 ppm/°K (max. 20 ppm/°K)

Uni- and bipolar

3 μV/°K

10 ppm of Range/°K

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

1 MΩ

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300kHz bandwidth 100 kHz bandwidth 10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR

100 dB

102 dB

102 dB

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

72 dB 98 dB 76 dB 97 dB 84 dB

82 dB 99 dB 93 dB 97 dB 96 dB

82 dB 99 dB 93 dB 97 dB 96 dB

10 mV to 1 V range: 2.5 V to 50 V range:

>100 dB @ 50 Hz 90 dB @ 50 Hz

>100 dB @ 1 kHz 65 dB @ 1 kHz

83 dB @ 10 kHz 55 dB @ 10 kHz

350 VDC

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %), 200mA resettable fuse protected 2)

±5 V

<10 Ω

13-318 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Maximum Output current:

Output protection:

Power On default settings

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

Software programable

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.8 W without sensor supply

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 3)

MSI-V-ACC; MSI-V-RTD; MSI-V-CHA-50

(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter characteristic (2) Overall current should not exceed Dewetron mainframe’s maximum power.

(3) TEDS is only available on the -D and -L versions

DAQP-LV Signal Hook-up

DAQP-LV-D pin-outs

Standard 9-pin DSUB connector

DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks

DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

Hot: IN+

Pin

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

Description

TEDS

IN +

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

GND (not isolated)

+9 V (200 mA max.)

+12 V (200 mA max.)

IN -

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

-9 V (200 mA max.)

Shield: IN-

DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector

DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector

DAQP-LV-L pin-outs

LEMO EGG.1B.307

Pin

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

Description

IN +

IN -

+9 V (200 mA max.)

-9 V (200 mA max.)

GND

+12 V (200 mA max.)

TEDS

See table >

⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

⇒ Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-IsOLATED sensor supply voltages

⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-319

DAQP-LV: Typical sensor connections

Sensor with differential output, module powered Current measurement using external shunt

Current loop-powered measurement with external shunt

Sensor with common ground

13-320 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DAQP-LV: Shunt Options

There are several current shunts that are available for this module, which can handle currents up to 5A. For higher currents, please use a rated CLAMP or FLEX COIL or other current transformer which has a voltage output.

Model Input Range Accuracy Description

DAQ-SHUNT-1

DAQ-SHUNT-1R

DAQ-SHUNT-4

100 mA

100 mA

5A

0.1%

0.1%

±0.1% < 10 ppm

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

Compatible with all Dewetron voltage modules and break-out boxes with banana jacks

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

(This is the resistor from the DAQ-SHUNT-1 option above - for user mounting/integration)

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

5A ±0.1% < 10 ppm

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x safety banana jacks

DAQ-SHUNT-5

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-321

DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz)

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connectors:

DAQP-V Specifications

6 ranges from ±10 mV to ±50 V

50 kHz

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

-B: Safety banana sockets

-BNC: BNC connector

-D: 9-pin SUB-D connector

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (option)

V

Parameter

Input ranges:

Range Selection:

DC accuracy:

10 mV range

100 mV range

1 V to 50 V ranges

Input coupling:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Input resistance:

Bandwidth (-3 dB):

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 kHz

@ 50 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

10 mV range

10 V range

50 V range

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage:

Sensor supply:

Output voltage:

Output resistance: maximum Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS:

Supported TEDS chips:

Supported MSI

DAQP-V

±10, ±100 mV, ±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V

Push button or software

0.05 % of reading ±40 μV

0.05 % of reading ±100 μV

0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

DC fixed

Better than ±0.03%

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 40 ppm/°K)

1 MΩ (±0.1 %)

50 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Pushbutton or software command

Butterworth

40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

61 dB

78 dB

78 dB

90 dB @ 0 Hz

78 dB @ 50 Hz

60 dB @ 400 Hz

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %)

±5 V

<10 Ω

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

5 mA

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.85 W typical without sensor supply

13-322 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DAQP-V Signal Hook-up

DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks

DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector

DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector

DAQP-V-D pin-outs

Standard 9-pin DSUB connector

Description Pin

3

4

1

2

7

8

5

6

9

Not connected

IN +

Not connected

GND (not isolated) reserved for +9 V sensor supply

+12 V sensor supply (200 mA max.)

IN -

Not connected reserved for -9 V sensor supply

Pin

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

DAQP-V-L pin-outs

LEMO EGG.1B.307

Description

IN +

IN -

+9 V sensor supply

-9 V sensor supply

GND

+12 V sensor supply not connected

⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

⇒ Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-IsOLATED sensor supply voltages

⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector

-

For sensor hook-up guidance and shunt resistor information, please refer to the DAQP-LV module

(except that TEDs is not available on the DAQP-V module)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-323

DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

DAQP-LA-SC: 0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak

DAQP-LA-B-S1: 2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A

300 kHz

1.4 kVRMS Input to ground

Signal connection: -SC: screw terminals

-B-S1: insultated banana jacks

DAQP-LA Specifications

Parameter

Input resistance (Shunt):

Shunt inductance:

Input ranges:

Continuous current:

Peak current:

DC accuracy:

100 mA and 300 mA

1 A to 30 A

DAQP-LA-SC

0.1 Ω

<10 nH

0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak max. 5 Arms

30 A max. 10 ms; 10 A max. 100 ms

2 mA and 6 mA

20 mA and 600 mA

±0.05 % of reading ±200 μA ±0.05 % of reading

±0.05 % of range

Offset drift

100 mA and 300 mA

1 A to 30 A

2 mA and 6 mA

20 mA to 600 mA

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Long term stability:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Protection:

Isolation voltage:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

100 mA

1A

30 A

DAQP-LA-B-S1

5 Ω

<10 nH

2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A max. 0.6 A

±0.05 % of reading ±4 μA ±0.05 % of reading

±0.05 % of range typ. max.

12 20 μA/°K

20 40 ppm of Range/°K typ . max.

0.24 0.4 μA/°K

20 40 ppm of Range/°K

0.03 %

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300kHz bandwidth 100 kHz bandwidth 10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR

95 dB

102 dB

104 dB

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

64 dB 95 dB 67dB 95 dB 77 dB

82 dB 103 dB 85 dB 113 dB 90 dB

89 dB 103 dB 89 dB 117 dB 91 dB

CAT III 150 V

CAT IV 100 V

Input to Ground 1.4 kVRMS

±5 V

<10 Ω

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

13-324 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Power On default settings

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS:

Supported TEDS chips:

Supported MSI

(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter

DAQP-LA Signal Hook-up

DAQP-LA-B-xx model with banana jacks

Software programable

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.7 W

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

DAQP-LA-SC model with screw terminal connectors

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-325

DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module

Strain gauge, bridge sensors:

Piezoresistive bridge:

Voltage input:

RTD:

Resistance:

Isolation:

Signal input connection:

±0.1 to ±1000 mV/V (@ 5 VDC excitation)

±0.5 to ±10000 mV/mA (@ 1 mA excitation)

±500 μV to ±10 V

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω)

25 mΩ to 100 kΩ

350 VDC

9-pin SUB-D connector (standard) or LEMO (optional)

Additional signal input using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

THERMOCOUPLE

CHARGE

VOLTAGE

Constant current powered sensors (accelerometers, mics);

12 ranges (±2.5 mV to 10 V); requires MSI-V-ACC

Popular T/C types; requires MSI-BR-TH-J, -K, or -T

Charge sensors up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CH-50 up to ±200 V requires MSI-BR-V-200

DAQP-STG specifications

V

Parameter

Gain:

Voltage Input ranges: Sensitivity @ 5 VDC excitation:

Resistance:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Voltage Input Accuracy:

Gain drift

Offset drift

Linearity

Excitation voltage:

Accuracy

Drift

Current limit

Protection

Excitation current:

Accuracy

Drift

Compliance voltage

Output impedance

Supported Sensors:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Shunt and completion resistor accuracy:

Automatic bridge balance:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (low pass):

Filter characteristics:

DAQP-STG

0.5 to 10 000

±0.5 , ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2V, ±5 V,±10 V ±0.1 , ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1,

±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 mV/V

25 mΩ to 100 kΩ

>100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

3.5 nV * √Hz

±0.05 % of reading ± 0.02 % of range ±10 μV typical 10 ppm/°K max. 20 ppm/°K typical 0.3 μV/°K + 10 ppm of range, max 2 μV/°K + 20 ppm of range typical 0.02 %

0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5,10 and 12 VDC software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

±0.03 % ±1 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

100 mA

Continuous short to ground

0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20mA software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

0.05% ±2μA

15ppm/°K

12V

>1 MΩ

4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 3- or

4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ω (software programmable)1) 4-wire full bridge with constant current excitation (piezoresistive bridge sensors) Potentiometric Resistance Resistance

Temperature Detection: PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000

80 Ω to 10 kΩ @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation

Two internal shunt resistors 59.88 kΩ and 175 kΩ

0.05% ±15ppm/°K

Input range 500μV to 1V: ±200 % of Range

2.5V to 5V: ±40% of Range

300 kHz

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10Hz to 100Hz:

300kHz:

Butterworth or Bessel 40 dB/dec ( 2nd order)

Bessel 60 dB/dec (3rd order)

13-326 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Typical SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC excitation:

Typical CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC excitation:

Isolation

Common mode Voltage

Over voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Module Pin-outs

DAQP-STG

66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V

160 dB [160 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

±350 VDC continuous (for input, excitation and TEDS interface)

±350 VDC input to housing

±50 VDC input (+) to input (-)

±5 V

< 1 Ω

Max. 5 mA; short to ground protected for 10 seconds

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433

MSI-BR-TH-x, MSI-BR-ACC, MSI-BR-V-200 ,MSI-BR-CH-50

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1.7 W @ 350 Ω, 2.15 W @ 120 Ω (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation)

Absolute max.: 3 W (maximum excitation @ maximum current)

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-327

DAQP-STG-D Cables and Shielding

To reduce the influence of electromagnetic disturbances, shielded twisted pair cables are recommended. Connect the shield to the isolated GND (Pin4) to get the best result.

The twisted pairs for full bridge, half bridge, voltage and resistance mode are:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

Twisted pair 3

Twisted pair 4

EXC+

Sense+

IN+

R +

PIN1 EXC-

PIN6 Sense-

PIN8

PIN3

PIN2 IN- PIN7

PIN5 GND(isolated) PIN4

If TEDS is used also the shield could be used as GNDisolated

For quarter bridge mode:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

IN+

R +

PIN2 Sense1

PIN5 EXC-

PIN3

PIN8

DAQP-STG Operation Notes

Free variable gain and excitation

The gain, excitation and offset values of this module are free programmable. So it is possible to normalize any physical sensor input signal to the ±5V output of the module. By using these settings as power on default, standalone solutions could be easily realized.

Gain: from 0.5 to 10000. The module input ranges are based on predefined gain values. The module automatically chose the best gain combination of the internal amplifiers to keep the overall noise and drift as low as possible.

Output offset: Could be programmed from the positive to the negative full scale range except on the input ranges above 1V. Due to internal structure here the offset could be set from +20 % to – 20 %.

Excitation Voltage: The excitation voltage is programmable from 0 to 12 V in 185 μV steps. Setting the excitation to 0 V for example allows you to determine the noise of the sensor cabling. The sense terminals have to be connected to the excitation terminals all the time. Even if the remote sensing is not required.

Excitation current: The current could be programmed from 0.1 mA to 20 mA in 0.3 μA steps. The maximum compliance voltage is 12 V. The compliance voltage is automatically balanced around the internal GND. This minimizes the common mode error.

Power On Default function

You can store the latest settings of the module in the internal EE-Prom memory. Once the module restarts, it comes up automatically with these setting. This is important for stand alone applications and for fail-safe reasons.

13-328 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Filter

The Module has nine selectable low-pass filters from 10 Hz to 100 kHz. The filter characteristic can be set to

Butterworth 2nd order or Bessel 2nd order. An additional fixed filter inside this module is a 3rd order Bessel filter with a guaranteed -3 dB bandwidth of 300 kHz.

DAQP-STG Amplifier balance

The amplifier balance allows eliminating automatically all internal amplifier offsets. It switches the differential amplifier inputs

IN+ and IN- to the internal isolated GND reference point. Then the output offset of the module is automatically adjusted to zero for all ranges. This function takes up to 8 seconds. Automatically previous stored sensor offset values are cleared.

Sensor Balance

Typically every strain gage sensor has a certain offset. That comes from manufacturing tolerances or because of sensor mounting. By performing a bridge balance this sensor offset could be completely removed on the analog side up to 200 % of the actual range. This allows using the full dynamic of the AD-board instead of losing resolution because of digital offset shifting. Output offset and sensor balance may not exceed 200 % of range (20 % for ranges above 1 V).

Internal Completion Resistors

The DAQP-STG has an internal half bridge completion and two internal quarter bridge completions for 120 Ω and 350 Ω strain gages. The used high precision resistors with low temperature drift allow a long- time stable measurement of almost every strain gage type without using an external completion network.

Internal Shunt

With two internal shunt resistors (59.88 kΩ and 175 kΩ) and one spare socket for a customised shunt, the DAQP-STG has wide flexibility in case of shunt calibration. A jumper network gives the possibility to connect the internal shunts to either Sense+

Sense – IN+ or IN- to be compatible to existing sensor types and correction calculation methods. This technology is used to correct the complete measurement chain gain error from the sensor input to the digital signal output. It is based on the known ratio between the shunt resistor and the strain gage resistance.

Short

It switches the differential amplifier inputs IN+ and IN- from the input terminals to the internal isolated GND reference point.

With this function the absolute sensor offset could be determined.

CAL

It applies a high precision internal reference signal with 80% of the full scale value to the module. For ranges above 1V the reference signal level is 20 % of range.

Self Test

The self test function is a software controlled procedure that checks in the first step the amplifier itself. In the second step a basic sensor check will be performed. This test is only available in DeweSoft if an AD-Card is installed.

Part 1: Amplifier Test

The amplifier offset is checked by using the Short function The 80% Cal signal is applied to the amplifier. The complete isolation amplifier including the AD-Card is checked by using this test signal. The self test circuit switches the amplifier input to the positive excitation voltage, so also the input amplifier is checked. Warning: if there is a short circuit on the excitation this test will fail.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-329

Part 2: Basic Sensor Test

Bridge Sensor: It is checked if the supply current doesn’t exceed the maximum value, and if the excitation voltage is within the predefined value.

DAQP-STG Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

DAQP-STG Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

13-330 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used. A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the DAQP-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution.

The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

DAQP-STG Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection (Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!

The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance

4-wire sensor connection (Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-331

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

DAQP-STG Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire

For resistance and RTD mode, 4-wire connection is recommended (2-wire connection will not compensate wire resistance).

DAQP-STG - Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V. This will internally connect the IN- to the GNDisolated to improve the common mode rejection.

13-332 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sensor with supply, and voltage output

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with

6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-333

DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module

Protection:

Input sensitivity:

Ranges and filter:

Bridge offset:

Bridge completion:

Shunt calibration:

Custom range:

Signal connection:

Fully isolated (input and excitation)

0.5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

Button or software selection

Automatic bridge offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ω)

Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible

Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset

9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

DAQP-BRIDGE-A specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:

Range selection:

Input impedance:

DC accuracy:

Gain linearity:

Excitation voltage: Accuracy: Drift: Protection:

Bridge types:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Zero adjust:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (lowpass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:

Typical CMRR:

Overvoltage protection:

Isolation:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

20 to 1000

±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250 mV ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50 mV/V

Push button or software

> 100 MΩ

±0.1 %

±0.05 %

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 and 10 VDC software programmable (5 VDC = default setting) 0.05 % ±1 mV typ. 20 ppm (max. 40 ppm) Continuous short to ground

Full bridge 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ω (software programmable)

120 Ω to 10 kΩ (down to 87 Ω on request)

Two internal shunt resistors or external resistor for shunt calibration (175k & 59k88)

Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)

20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Push button or software

Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

71 dB @ Gain 1000 79 dB @ Gain 20

73 dB @ 0 Hz 71 dB @ 400 Hz 70 dB @ 1 kHz

±10 VDC

350 VDC (for input and excitation)

±5 V

< 10 Ω

Max. 5 mA

Continuous short to ground

Yes

No

Manually support of MSI-BR-TH-x adapter

13-334 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Module Pin-outs

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1.44 W @ 350 Ω, 1.83 W @ 120 Ω (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 3 W (depending on sensor) *

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire sensor connection 4-wire sensor connection

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

Half bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-335

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

⇒ 1) ‘shunt’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

Potentiometric and µV measurements

The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.

By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).

The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.

13-336 | OWNER’s GUIDE

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.

The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).

Module configuration

DAQP-BRIDGE-A: Excitation:

Range:

0.5 V

500 mV/V

The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):

⇒ Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will not get the required

500 mV/V range.

Potentiometer sensor connection

The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potentiometric sensor:

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-337

DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module

Input sensitivity:

Bandwidth, filter:

Bridge offset:

Bridge completion:

Shunt calibration:

Custom range:

TEDS:

Signal connection:

0.05 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

200 kHz, 9 selectable lowpass filters (10 Hz to 100 kHz)

Automatic offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ω)

Supports 3- and 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge connection

Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible

Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset

Support for TEDS sensors

9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

DAQP-BRIDGE-B specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:

Range selection:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Accuracy @ 5 VDC excitation:

Gain drift @ 5 VDC excitation:

DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)

10 to 10 000

±0.5 1), ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV ±0.1 1), ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20,

±50, ±100 mV/V

Push button or software

> 100 MΩ

3.5 nV * √Hz

±0.05 % F.S.

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

Bridge types:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Zero adjust:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (lowpass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC excitation:

Typ. CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC excitation:

Max. common mode voltage:

Overvoltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 3- or

4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ω (software programmable) 1)

87 Ω to 10 kΩ @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation (120 Ω to 10 kΩ @ 10 VDC excitation)

Two internal shunt resistors

Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)

200 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0) 1)

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Push button or software

Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V 82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC 115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz 110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

±6 V

±10 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ω

Max. 5 mA

Continuous short to ground

13-338 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

RS-485 interface:

TEDS: Supported TEDS chips

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)

Yes

Hardware support for TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

Automatic MSI-BR-TH-x support

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1 W @ 350 Ω, 1.3 W @ 120 Ω (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 2 W (depending on sensor)

1) 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge or ±0.5 mV input range will limit the bandwidth to 30 kHz

Module Pin-outs

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire sensor connection 4-wire sensor connection

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-339

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire sensor (sense wired at the sensor) 3-wire sensor (sense wired at the connector)

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

Quarter bridge signal connection

4-wire sensor (sense wired at the sensor) 3-wire sensor (sense wired at the connector)

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUsT be connected!

⇒ 1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

Potentiometric and µV measurements

The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.

By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).

The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.

13-340 | OWNER’s GUIDE

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.

The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).

Module configuration

DAQP-BRIDGE-B: Excitation:

Range:

1 V

500 mV/V

The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):

⇒ Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will not get the required 500 mV/V range.

Potentiometer sensor connection

The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potiometric sensor:

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-341

DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors: full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω;

Special features:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection: quarter bridge 350 Ω inductive full bridge; inductive half bridge (such as most LVTD Sensors)

Automatic balancing up to 400% of range

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge

Two internal shunts for completion

0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

2.3 kHz

N/A

9-pin SUB-D

DAQP-CFB specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Inductive input ranges:

Input voltage ranges:

Bridge resistance:

Excitation voltage level:

Excitation voltage frequency:

Maximum excitation current:

Excitation voltage synchronization:

Excitation voltage accuracy:

Excitation voltage drift:

Excitation frequency drift:

Nonlinearity:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Balance adjusting range:

Capacitive imbalance compensation:

Phase adjustment range:

Balance adjusment accuracy:

Supported sensors:

Shunt calibration:

Completion and shunt resistor accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (lowpass):

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ 1000 Hz [100 Hz] and 2 VRMS excitation:

DAQP-CFB

0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V (inductive range is limited from 20 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS input voltage)

0.2 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS

60 - 1,000 Ω depending on excitation voltage

1, 2, 5 VRMS

5 kHz sine wave ±20 Hz

30 mARMS short circuit protected

Internal or external

5 VRMS ±5 mVRMS; 2 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS; 1 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS typically 50 ppm/°K typically 20 ppm/°K

±0.02 % FS

±0.2 % of reading ±0.1 % of range

±0.003 μV/V/K ±40 ppm of Range/°K within ±30 ppm/°K

±400 % of Range (±200 % at 1 V excitation)

Approx. 1000 pF

±40° (inductive mode only) within ±0.1 % FS full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω; quarter bridge 350 Ω inductive full bridge; inductive half bridge (typically LVTD Sensors) internal 50 kΩ and 100 kΩ Shunt

±0.05 %

DC - 2.3 kHz

10, 30, 100, 300, 1 kHz

2nd order Bessel, 2nd order Butterworth (40 dB/ decade)

78 dB [85 dB] @ 1 mV/V

80 dB [87 dB] @ 100 mV/V

13-342 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Over voltage protection

Output voltage:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power consumption:

Supported TEDS chips:

Weight:

DAQP-CFB

±10 V

±5V

±5 mA

Continuous short to ground max. 1.5 W

DS2406, DS2430, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 1) within 250 (±30) g

1) TEDS only supported by revision 2 of this module (or higher)

Module Pin-outs

Pins 6 and 8 can be left unconnected

Software controlled functions

Amplifier balance

Amplifier balance allows elimination of the amplifier offset. The input is shorted and all ranges are balanced by within the module. Any previously stored sensor offset values are cleared.

Sensor balance

Sensor balance is similar to the amplifier balance. Because the input is not shorted, the sensor offset is automatically adjusted to zero.

Short

When measuring the absolute strain it is possible to disconnect the sensor via software and short the input.

Shunt

Two different internal shunts resistors (50 kΩ and 100 kΩ) can be connected for easy function or calibration check. With this technique the whole measurement chain (sensor, amplifier and analog to digital conversa-

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-343

tion) are checked. The table below shows the shunt calibration result for typical strain gage resistor values.

Strain gage resistor

120 Ω

120 Ω

350 Ω

350 Ω

Shunt resistor

50 kΩ

100 kΩ

50 kΩ

100 kΩ

Result

0.6 mV/V

0.3 mV/V

1.74 mV/V

0.87 mV/V

The shunt resistor check is not possible in inductive bridge operation mode.

Cal

Independent of the value of the input signal, the CAL function sets the output to 80% of the actual range.

The base of this calibration signal is the excitation voltage. Therefore this is an easy check of the excitation voltage. The typical reasons why the excitation is not working are short curcuit of the excitation at the cabling or sensor defects, too high a load for the excitation amplifier (please decrease the excitation level), or wrong settings of the synchronization mode (no master assigned).

Synchronizing multiple amplifiers

Due the high amplification of strain gage amplifiers it is needed to synchronize the excitation voltage if multiple channels are used. This is done with Pin 8 of the back plane connector. See the detailed DAQ modules manual for details about how to set up the synchronization of multiple DAQP-CFB modules.

Sensor connections

Inductive half bridge sensors LVDT sensors

13-344 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Full bridge signal connection

4-wire sensor for standard bridge & inductive bridge (Sense wired at the connector)

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other modules.

Half bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor for standard bridge (Sense wired at the sensor)

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor for standard bridge (Sense wired at the connector)

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other DEWE-BRIDGE amplifier.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-345

DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors: Constant current type accelerometers, aka

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

IEPE, ICP, I.C.P.®, or Piezotronic

±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV

300 kHz

N/A

BNC connector

DAQP-ACC-A specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Gain:

Range/gain selection:

Gain error:

Sensor types:

Sensor excitation:

Input impedance:

Input voltage range:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (high-pass)

Filters (low-pass):

Voltage < 4 V

Voltage > 19 V

0.5 Hz filter

5 Hz filter

DAQP-ACC-A

±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV

1, 3, 10, 30, 100

Pushbutton or software selection

0.5 %

IEPE (constant current) only

4 or 8 mA (software selection), 10 %, up to 28 VDC

5 or 7 MΩ (depending on time constant), in parallel with 1.2 nF

4 to 19 V

”Shortcut” detection

“No sensor” detection

From selected highpass filter to 300 kHz (+2 to -5 dB @ fg)

0.5 Hz and 5 Hz (software selection)

0.32 s time constant

0.032 s time constant

1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz other filter steps available as an option upon request

Pushbutton or software selection

Butterworth

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics up to 100 kHz

300 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

RS-485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

Power consumption:

Gain 1 and 3

Gain 10

Gain 30

Gain 100

94 dB

91 dB

80 dB

73 dB

±5 V

<10 Ω

5 mA maximum

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC (±10 %)

Yes

N/A

Typical 0.8 to 1.0 W (depending on sensor)

13-346 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sensor connection

Standard IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-347

DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module

Handles both of these sensors: Charge type accelerometers and microphones, plus

Special features:

IEPE sensitivity:

Charge sensitivity:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

IEPE (Piezotron) accelerometers and mics

Directly outputs acceleration, velocity or displacement

0, 20, 40 and 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)

5, 50, 500, 5000 and 50000 pC

0.1 Hz to 50 kHz

N/A

BNC (10-32 microdot adapter included)

DAQP-CHARGE-A specifications

Parameter

Input sensitivity:

IEPE mode:

CHARGE mode:

Supported sensor types:

Sensor type selection:

Gain accuracy:

Input range fine tuning:

Range selection:

Output voltage:

DAQP-CHARGE-A

0, 20, 40, 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)

5, 50, 500, 5000, 50000 pC

Dynamic CHARGE and IEPE (constant current)

Pushbutton or software selection

1% full scale

Software selectable

Pushbutton: fixed ranges

Software: every range

Single (velocity) or double (displacement), 0 dB at 15.9 H Integration on-board:

LED indicators:

Constant current source:

Filters (high-pass):

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

Range and filter:

ICP LED:

OVL LED:

A, V and D LED:

5 LEDs

Active with connected ICP® sensor, inactive for charge input

Overload control (output voltage > 5 V)

Indicator for acceleration, velocity and displacement output

3.2 to 5.6 mA, > 24 V

0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz (±2 dB @ f0)

100 Hz, 1, 3, 10, 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

Push button or software selection

Butterworth

80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)

0.1 Hz to 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

5000 pC

500 pC

50 PC

5 pC

5 pC

90 dB

87 dB

73 dB

54 dB

60 dB @ 10 kHz

±5V

Output noise:

Power consumption:

Power supply voltage:

TEDS support:

RS-485 interface for module control

< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)

0.6 W to 1.2 W (depending on sensor)

±9 VDC (±10 %)

N/A

Yes

13-348 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sensor connection

Standard charge or IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with

BNC, 10-32, etc.

BNC to Microdot adapter

This adapter is included for no additional cost with the DAQP-CHARGE-A module.

Using an IEPE® sensor with charge input selected (or a Charge sensor with IEPE® input selected) will not destroy the module or the sensor, but the measured values will be incorrect.

When using the fine tuning option of the input range (3686 steps per decade), the module is no longer in a calibrated state. In this case the input range LED’s are not active!

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-349

DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors: Charge sensors, dynamic or static

Special capability:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Selectable time bases for long settling time sensors

Charge

±100 to ±1 000 000 pC

100 kHz

350 VDC

BNC connector

DAQP-CHARGE-B specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Supported sensor types:

Gain accuracy:

Gain linearity:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Range selection:

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

DAQP-CHARGE-B

±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10 000, ±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000 000 pC

Dynamic and static CHARGE accelerometers and microphones

0.5 % of range (1 % of range for 100 and 500 pC)

±0.5 %

100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Pushbutton or software selection

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

Push button or software selection

Bessel or Butterworth (software selectable)

40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

Time constant:

Drift input current @ 25 °C:

Offset drift:

Amplifier reset:

Long

Highpass filter on

DC mode

2 to 1000 sec.

< ±0.03 pC/s

50 ppm of Range/°K

Push button or software

Offset after reset:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:

Range 100 pC

Range > 2000 pC

Ouput noise:

@ 100 kHz

@ 30 kHz

±2 mV or ±1 pC (greater value is valid)

76 dB (82 dB @ 30 kHz / 85 dB @ 10 kHz )

81 dB (89 dB @ 30 kHz / 93 dB @ 10 kHz )

0.3 mVRMS + 0.01 pCRMS

0.12 mVRMS + 0.008 pCRMS

Output voltage:

Output noise:

Cable noise:

CMR:

±5V

< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)

< 10-5 pCRMS/pF

< 0.02 pC/V (difference between input and output ground)

Input overvoltage protection:

Isolation:

Power consumption:

Power supply voltage:

TEDS support:

RS-485 interface for module control

1 kV ESD

350 VDC

1.5 W to 3.5 W (depending on signal range and frequency)

±9 VDC (±1 %)

N/A

Yes

13-350 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sensor connection

Standard charge accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the

Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC,

10-32, etc.

BNC to Microdot adapter

This adapter is available as an option with the DAQP-CHARGE-B module.

High pass filter

The time constant of the internal highpass filter depends on the used input range. For range 1 (100 pC, 500 pC and 2,000 pC) the time constant is 2 seconds (or 0.07 Hz), for range 2 (10,000 pC and 40,000 pC) the time constant is 40 seconds (or 3.9 mHz). For the highest both ranges (200,000 pC and 1,000,000 pC) the time constant is 1,000 seconds or 0.16 mHz).

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-351

DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors: Thermocouple types K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U

Special feature:

Linearization:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Cold junction compensation:

Freely programmable measuring range!

On-board and automatic

On-board and automatic

3 kHz

350 VDC

Standard mini T/C connector, universal white

DAQP-THERM specifications

Parameter

Thermocouple types:

Range selection:

CJC absolute accuracy:

CJC stability:

Linearization:

Accuracy:

Nonlinearity:

Input resistance:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters:

Filter characteristics:

Isolation:

Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz:

Open thermocouple detection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Connector:

DAQP-THERM

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U

Min. to max. of the input range is freely programmable within the full thermocouple input span

±0.2 °C

0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change

DSP based linearization

Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below

> 0.01°C

> 1 MΩ

3 kHz

3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable

±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)

> 160 dB

100 MΩ pull up; software selectable

±5 V; 0 to 5 V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V possible only with special DEWE-30)

100 Ω

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC (±1 %)

1 W typical

N/A

Universal mini termocouple connector, white color code

Standard MINI thermocouple connector

13-352 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DAQP-THERM Input ranges and detailed specifications

Thermocouple

Type

E

L

S

N

C

U

T

R

J

K

Standard

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN 43710

ASTM E988-96

DIN 43710 min

[°C]

-50

-270

-270

0

-270

-210

-270

-50

0

-200

Input range max

[°C]

1372

1200

400

1760

1760

1300

1000

900

2310

600

Accuracy

-270 to

-200 °C

[°C]

6.70

0.68

4.37

9.14

4.25

-200 to

-100 °C

[°C]

0.70

0.60

0.69

0.77

0.60

0.64

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0 to 100 °C

[°C]

0.35

0.32

0.37

0.85

0.77

0.37

0.33

0.37

0.58

0.28

0.24

0.25

0.26

0.25

0.26

0.59

0.36

0.26

0 to 500°C

0.26

100 °C to fullscale [% of reading + °C]

0.027

0.019

0.009

0.012

0.017

0.018

0.045

0.45

0.27

0.23

0.33

0.26

0.25

0.23

0.44

0.33

0.24

> 500°C

0.44

B DIN EN 60584-1 0 1820

All values given in Celcius on these pages.

Software programmable module range

Regardless which input mode is selected, the module measurement range is completely free programmable.

Simply by entering the lower and upper limit the amplifier adjusts its gain and offset factors automatically.

The amplifier output is scaled to either ±5 V or 0 to 5 V. Converting a nonlinear temperature signal from a thermocouple to a linear analog output is one of the key features of this amplifier.

Open thermocouple detection

The open thermocouple detection of the DAQP-THERM consists of an 100 MΩ pull-up resistor. That typically drives a 50 nA current through the sensor which normally does not take effect on the measurement, but is enough to generate an input overflow if the sensor breaks. Despite of this small current, there are sensors available where this current generates a big error. These sensors are typically non-contact infrared thermocouples and fast response thermocouples. In that case the open thermocouple detection can simply be deactivated in the software. Sensors with up to 50 kΩ output impedance can be measured in this way.

CJC

The DAQP-THERM comes with an integrated cold junction compensation sensor with an absolute accuracy of ±0.2 °C. In order to archieve this accuracy the sensor has to be connected for at least 5 minutes to the thermocouple connector (CJC equilibrium time).

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-353

DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module

Thermocouple:

Bridge:

Voltage input:

RTD:

Resistance:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Freely programmable ranges within full thermocouple input span

±0.5 to ±1000 mV/mA

±5 mV to ±5 V (free programmable within ±5 V)

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000), freely programmable ranges within full RTD input span

1 Ω to 1 MΩ (free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ)

3 kHz

1000 VRMS continuous

Signal connection: Standard miniature thermocouple connector, and

9-pin SUB-D connector

DAQP-MULTI Specifications

DAQP-MULTI

Thermocouple (TC); Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD); Voltage; Resistance; Bridge with constant current excitation

Parameter

Input types:

Thermocouples

Sensor types:

Range:

CJC absolute accuracy:

CJC stability:

Accuracy:

Linearization:

Non-linearity:

Open thermocouple detection:

Connector:

RTD

Sensor types:

Range:

Constant current:

Accuracy:

Linearization:

Non-linearity:

Voltage

Input ranges:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

V

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U, others on request

Min. to max. of the input range is free programmable within the full thermocouple input span

±0.2 °C

0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change

Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below.

DSP based linearization on-board

> 0.01°C

100 MΩ pull up; software selectable

Mini thermocouple connector with integrated cold junction compensation sensor

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Pt2000, others on request

Min. and max. of the input range is free programmable within the full RTD input span

Pt100: 1 mA; Pt200, Pt500: 0.5 mA; Pt1000, Pt2000: 0.2 mA

Typical accuracy 0.15 °C for Pt100, details see table below

DSP based linearization on-board

> 0.01 °C

±5 mV, ±10 mV, ±20 mV, ±50 mV, ±100 mV, ±200 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, free programmable within ±5V

0 to ±100 mV Range: 0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV

>±100mV to ±5V Range: 0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±100 μV

Typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K

Typical 15 ppm/°K

> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

8 nV * √Hz

13-354 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Resistance

Ranges:

Accuracy:

Drift:

Constant current:

Bridge

Ranges:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Automatic bridge balance:

Supported sensors:

Connector:

Excitation current:

Accuracy:

0 to 200 μA

200 μA to 5 mA

Drift:

Compliance voltage:

Source resistance:

General Specifications

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filters:

Group delay:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz

Isolation:

Over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

RS485 interface for module control:

Supported TEDS chips:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

DAQP-MULTI

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 1M, free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ

See table below

Typical 15 ppm/°K

From 5 μA to 5 mA depending on range

0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 mV/mA

0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K typical 15ppm/°K

> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

8 nV * √Hz

±200 % of range

4 wire full bridges

DSUB 9, standard Dewetron bridge pin-outs

1, 2, 4 mA; software programmable

0.02 % ±50 nA

0.02 % ±1 μA

15 ppm/°K

15 V

> 150 kΩ

3 kHz

3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

300 μs with highest filter

Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable

>160 dB

±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)

±100 V between inputs (clamping voltage: 5 V @ TC input; 11 V @ Voltage input)

±5 V; 0 to 5V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V with special DEWE-30)

22 Ω

Max. 5 mA

Continuous short to ground

Yes

DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433,DS28EC20

No

±9 VDC (±1 %)

1 W typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-355

Type

E

L

S

N

C

U

T

R

J

K

DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed specifications for THERMOCOUPLES

Thermocouple

B

Standard

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN 43710

ASTM E988-96

DIN 43710

DIN EN 60584-1

Input range min

[°C]

-50

-270

-270

0

-270

-210

-270

-50

0

-200 max

[°C]

1372

1200

400

1760

1760

1300

1000

900

2310

600

Accuracy

-270 to

-200 °C

[°C]

6.70

0.68

4.37

9.14

4.25

0 1820

-200 to

-100 °C

[°C]

0.70

0.60

0.69

0.77

0.60

0.64

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0 to 100 °C

[°C]

0.35

0.32

0.37

0.85

0.77

0.37

0.33

0.37

0.58

0.28

0.24

0.25

0.26

0.25

0.26

0.59

0.36

0.26

0 to 500°C

0.26

100 °C to fullscale [% of reading + °C]

0.027

0.019

0.009

0.012

0.017

0.018

0.045

0.45

0.27

0.23

0.33

0.26

0.25

0.23

0.44

0.33

0.24

> 500°C

0.44

DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed specifications for RTDs

RTDs

Type

Pt100 (385)

Pt200 (385)

Pt500 (385)

Pt1000 (385)

Pt2000 (385)

Pt100 (3926)

Standard

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

Input range min

[°C]

-200

-200

-200

-200

-200

-200 max

[°C]

850

850

850

850

850

850

Current

[mA]

0.2

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

Accuracy

-200 to -100

°C [°C]

0.14

0.18

0.34

0.22

0.25

0.14

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0.21

0.27

0.42

0.29

0.35

0.21

100 °C to full-scale [% of reading + °C]

0.07

0.10

0.09

0.09

0.12

0.07

0.21

0.27

0.42

0.29

0.36

0.21

DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed DAQP-MULTI detailed specifications

13-356 | OWNER’s GUIDE

specifications for RESISTANCE for EXCITATION CURRENT

Resistance

Range

[Ω]

100

30

10

3

1

1,000,000

300,000

100,000

30,000

10,000

3,000

1,000

300

Current

[mA]

0.1

0.2

0.5

1

0.005

0.015

0.05

0.1

4

5

1

2

5

Accuracy

% of reading

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

% of range

0.08

0.07

0.25

0.18

1.02

0.35

0.11

0.07

0.12

0.08

0.06

0.10

0.23

Excitation

0 to 200 μA

>0.2 to 5 mA

% of reading

0.02

0.02

[µA]

0.05

1

Sensor connections

9-pin DSUB connector Mini thermocouple connector

Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-357

For resistance and RDT mode the 4-wire connection is recommended. The 2-wire connection will not compensate the wire resistance.

Voltage Measurement

Bridge sensor

13-358 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Thermocouple sensor

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-359

DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors: Frequency and tachometer sensors, hall effect F/V, optical speed

Frequency ranges:

Special feature:

Input ranges:

Isolation:

Signal connection: sensors, and more

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

Second output from module: TTL clock mirror of input frequency

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

350 VDC

9-pin SUB-D connector

DAQP-FREQ-A specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Minimum input frequency:

Range selection:

Accuracy:

Input signal:

Input resistance:

Input filters:

Filter selection:

Input coupling:

Trigger level:

Sensor supply:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection:

Output filter:

Filter characteristics

Selection

DAQP-FREQ-A

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

2 % of selected range

Pushbutton or software selection

±0.05 % (from 4 % to 100 % of range)

10 mV to 300 V

Note: the DSUB connector is only specified up to 250 V

For signals above 60 V do not use the metal housing of the provided DSUB connector

1 MΩ

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

Pushbutton or software selection

DC or AC (software selectable)

10 mV to 130 V (software programmable)

+12 VDC, ±9 VDC (not isolated)

350 VDC

±500 V peak / 350 VRMS

3 ranges with 1.5, 30 and 500 ms (10 - 90 %)

Butterworth, 60 dB / decade (18 dB / octave)

Automatically according to input range

Slow (default) or fast output filter selectable within the input range

Output signals:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Power supply voltage:

Main output

Secondary output

±5 V according to input frequency

Secondary: TTL level trigger output signal

< 10 mΩ

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

1 W max.

N/A

±9 VDC (±5 %)

13-360 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Sensor connection

⇒ sensor supply voltages are not isolated - only the input (pin 2 and 7)!

⇒ For signals above 60 V don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector!

Sensors without power supply Sensors with power supply

Open collector sensors (NPN) Open collector sensors (PNP)

The value of the resistor depends on the sensor supply voltage and the open collector sensor.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 13-361

DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module

Module purpose:

Input/Output range:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

1:1 (unity gain) isolation module, compatible

AD series cards which have analog outputs

±10 V

400 Hz

1500 VRMS

-B: Banana plugs

-BNC: BNC connector

-D: 9-pin SUB-D connector

OUT

DAQN-V-OUT specifications

Parameter DAQN-V-OUT

Input range:

Input range maximum:

Input resistance:

Output voltage range:

Over range capability:

Output drive:

Output resistance:

Output current during fault, maximum:

Output protection, transient:

CMV, output to input, continuous:

Transient

CMRR (50 / 60 Hz)

±10 V

±36 V maximum (damage will occur above ±36 V)

50 MΩ

±10 V

5 % @ 10 V output

50 mA max.

0.5 Ω

75 mA

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989

1500 VRMS max.

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989

110 dB

Accuracy:

NMR (-3 dB @ 400 Hz):

Non-linearity:

Stability:

±0.05 % span (0 to 5 mA load)

100 dB per decade above 400 Hz

0.02 % span

Offset

Span

±25 ppm/°C

±20 ppm/°C

Noise:

Output ripple, 1 kHz bandwidth 2 mVpp

-3 dB Bandwidth: 400 Hz

Power supply voltage: 9 VDC ±5 %

Over voltage protection

Power supply current:

Power supply sensitivity:

±10 V

350 mA full load, 135 mA no load

±12.5 ppm/%

13-362 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Output signal connections

DAQN-V-OUT-B module

Voltage output via banana plug cables

DAQN-V-OUT-BNC module

Voltage output via BNC cable

DAQN-V-OUT-B module

Voltage output via DSUB 9-pin cable

Pin

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

9

9-pin DSUB connector

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

GND (not isolated)

+9 V (not isolated)

Not connected

OUT + (-10 to +10 V, isolated)

OUT - (-10 to +10 V, isolated)

-9V (not isolated)

⇒ Use pin 4, 5 and 9 only as sensor supply (not isolated)!

⇒ For signals above 60 V don’t use the metal housing of sUB-D connector!

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-363

14

PAD series signal Conditioners

PAD Series Common Information

Calibration information

„

„

„

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions.

Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There is a separate calibration kit available for DAQ series modules manual calibration. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

General PAD module specifications

Module dimensions: 20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)

(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)

Frontcover:

Environmental:

20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)

(W x H x D without connector)

Temp. range storage: -30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

Temp. range operating: -5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Rel. humidity (MIL202): 0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

RFI susceptibility: ±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

14-364 | OWNER’s GUIDE

PAD Module Connectors

Front Panel Connector Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown in the appropriate module description.

Rear Connector Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.

HSI, DAQ, and PAD module rear panel

RS-232/485 interface

PAD modules can be configured via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers.

The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules.

To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: data bits:

parity: stop bits: handshake:

9600

8

1 not required

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-365

PAD Modules Table

Module Ranges

Bandwidth

(BW)

Filters

(FILT)

Voltage measurement

PAD-V8-P

V

8

Voltage

Current

±100 mV to ±50 V

±20 mA

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

Temperature and Ωic measurement

PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-J/K/T

8

Voltage

±15, ±50, ±100, ±150 mV

-150 mV to +1.5V

Thermocouple

Types J, K, T with PAD-CB8 breakout box

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-RTD

RTDs

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,

Pt1000, Pt2000, Ni120

8

Resistors up to 2 MΩ

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

Isolation

(ISO)

Overvoltage protection

(OP)

Special functions

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 150 VDC

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 15 VDC

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 15 VDC

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

Analog and digital outputs

PAD-DO7

7 Digital output Relay outputs (dry contacts) -ISO: 300 VDC

Max load:

0.5 A @ 60 VAC,

1 A @ 24 VDC

PAD-AO1 Voltage output 0 to 10V

1 -ISO: 300 VDC --

Current output 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

OUT

Please see the following pages for details about each of the available PAD series modules and accessories.

Note: if you want to also use DAQ or HsI series modules in this expansion rack, then you must also have an analog cable connecting it to the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211. In addition, there must be an A/D card inside the

DEWE-321x chassis with the appropriate number of ADCs available.

Hook-up Notes:

If using Rs232 com port, you must configure the port used for additional PAD modules in the Ds-7 settings > hardware setup > analog tab.

Make sure “PAD modules” are checked

14-366 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Adding PAD modules to your Dewtetron system:

PAD modules can be plugged directly into the DEWE-3210, because it has 8 slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plug-in modules. But if you don’t want to give up one of these eight dynamic input slots, you can simply add a DEWE-30 series chassis.

This method also allows the DEWE-3211 to utilze PAD series modules, since this model does not have any slots on its chassis. When only PAD modules are installed into it, the DEWE-30 series expansion box connects easily via either RS485 connected to the Dewetron chassis’ EPAD interface, or via RS232C using the

Dewetron chassis’ COM port. DEWE-30 chassis are available with 4, 8, 16, 32, 48, or 64 slots.

Note: if you want to also use DAQ or HsI series modules in this expansion rack, then you must also have an analog cable connecting it to the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211. In addition, there must be an A/D card inside the

DEWE-321x chassis with the appropriate number of ADCs available.

Typical hook-ups

PAD modules can plug directly into any DEWE system that has DAQ/PAD/HSI slots, or...

PAD modules can plug into a DEWE-30 chassis, and connect to a DEWE system via RS485 (always available on the EPAD connector in any DEWE mainframe)

When using PAD modules simply with a computer (not a DEWE computer), you can use the RS232 serial interface on the back of the DEWE-30 chassis to connect to your computer. If your computer does not have RS232, you can obtain and use an RS232 to USB converter that will create a virtual com port on your computer.

Do not connect both RS232 (USB) and RS485 interfaces at the same time.

If using RS232 com port, you must configure the port used for additional PAD modules in the DS-7 hardware setup, analog tab.

Make sure that PAD modules are check-marked in the HARDWARE SETUP SCREEN when using DS-7 software

When adding external PAD modules, enter the number of them under “Additional PAD modules”

If adding a DEWE-30 via RS232, select the appropriate com port here for the additional PAD modules.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-367

Addressing PAD modules

Each PAD module must have a unique address (just like DAQ modules). The address is stored inside the

PAD module in non-volatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a PAD module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address

31.

This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up your signals to what you believe is PAD module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.

There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.

There are essentially two ways to address your modules:

„

„

FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.

FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.

Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:

Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:

14-368 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.

When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on. Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.

If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot, press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.

When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure

FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-369

And your choices are:

„

„

„

„

If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.

If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the prompts.

If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.

If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL

Module Installation Trouble-shooting

There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:

⇒ Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.

Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective and cannot communicate properly.

solution: the FILL RACK procedure is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues. If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL

ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.

Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address, or is conflicting with it.

solution: the FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues. If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL ONE MOD-

ULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

⇒ Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t

14-370 | OWNER’s GUIDE know how to address it

Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly good modules.

solution: start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PREssED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. select FILL when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button or push in the module... PUsH IN THE MODULE. The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your sETUP screen.

⇒ Problem: some modules show up with the sERIAL NUMBERs in the amplifier column, and some do not.

Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.

Solution: There is no solution for this. But at the same time there is not really a proble, either. If you must have modules with serial numbers showing in the software, then the only remedy is to replace older hardware with newer hardware. That will eliminate the problem. PAD modules can also be replaced via newer EPAD2 modules if you don’t want to use DAQ slots for them any more. Using EPAD2 modules will free up slots in your DEWETRON chassis for more dynamic channels, via

DAQ and HSI series signal conditioners.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-371

PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module

Module purpose:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Interface boxes:

Voltage input module for DC/quasi-static signals

Selectable from ±100 mV to ±50V full-scale

6 Hz

350 VDC

25-pin D connector

PAD-CB8-BNC: 8 channel connector block, BNC

PAD-CB8-B: 8 channel connector block, banana jacks

V

PAD-V8-P specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Resolution:

Sample rate:

Read-out speed:

DC accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection

Common mode voltage:

NMR:

CMRR:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Voltage

Current

Power consumption:

1) Depending on system and number of channels

PAD-V8-P

8 differential input channels

±100 mV, ±150 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±50 V, -0.15 to +1.5 V

With external shunt resistor

10 µV for all ranges

12 Hz for all channels, maximum

Typical 80 channels/s 1)

±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV

6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)

150 VDC

350 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

120 dB @ 50/60 Hz

140 dB @ DC, 120 dB @ 50 Hz

Yes

9 VDC ±10 %

0.6 W typical

PAD-CB8-B and PAD-CB8-BNC break-out boxes

High quality break-out boxes are available for the PAD-V8-P module.

The PAD-CB8-B provides eight banana jacks, while the PAD-CB8-BNC provides eight BNC onnectors. Each one features a 2 meter long cable and connector that plugs into the face of the PAD-V8-P module. There are no electronics inside these break-out boxes.

14-372 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connector pin-outs

Pin

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

Pin

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

13

14

15

16

17

18

* not supported in Dewesoft software

Function

Channel 6 (+)

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Digital input 1*

Digital input 2*

Digital input 3*

+12 VDC

Reset / Digital input 4*

GND

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers are included.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-373

PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module

Module purpose:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Interface boxes:

Thermocouples and RTD input module for DC/quasi-static signals

6 Hz

350 VDC

25-pin D connector

PAD-CB8-TH8-K-M: T/C K mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-K-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-J-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-T-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-RTD: RTD, 9-pin DSUB, 2 meter cable

PAD-TH8-P specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input voltage:

Input resistance:

Gain linearity:

Temperature drift:

Typical noise:

Resolution:

Sample rate:

Read-out speed:

DC accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection

Common mode voltage:

NMR (50/60 Hz):

CMRR (50/60 Hz):

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

PAD-TH8-P

8 differential input channels

±1.5 V

1.4 MΩ

0.001%

30 ppm/°K

2 µV

10 µV for all ranges

12 Hz for all channels, maximum

Typical 80 channels/s 1)

Better than ±0.05 % ±200 μV (typ. ±0.03 % F.S. ±20 μV)

6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)

15 VDC

130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

120 dB

130 dB

Yes

9 VDC ±10 %

0.6 W typical

1) Depending on system and number of channels

14-374 | OWNER’s GUIDE

PAD-CB8-K-xx series break-out boxes

Above left: standard size PAD-CB8-K-P2 break-out box | Above center: miniature size PAD-CB8-K-M

Above: PAD-CB8-RTD break-out box

Parameter

Input channels:

Accuracy:

Typical noise:

Operating temperature:

Cable length:

Dimensions:

PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-P2 and PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-M

8 thermocouple sensors (J, K, or T) with built-in CJC (cold junction compensation)

Thermocouple type J:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -100 °C ±0.3 °C @

-100 to 150 °C ±0.4 °C @ 150 to 400

°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1200 °C

Thermocouple type K:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C ±0.4 °C @

-25 to 120 °C ±0.6 °C @ 120 to 400

°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1372 °C

±0.1 °C @ 6 Hz sampling; no average

-25 to +80 °C

2m (up to 12 m on request) approx. 196 x 57 x 32.2 mm (7.7 x 2.2 x 1.3 in.)

Thermocouple type T:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -150 °C ±0.4 °C @

-150 to 400 °C

PAD-CB8-RTD break-out box

Parameter

Input channels:

Constant current:

Constant current drift:

Connection types:

Standard input ranges:

CB8-RTD-S3:

Accuracy:

Typical noise:

Operating temperature:

Cable length:

Dimensions:

PAD-CB8-RTD

8 RTD sensors

1250 μA (CB8-RTD-S3: 250 μA)

5 ppm/°K

2-, 3-, and 4-wire

Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ω, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Ni120

Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ω, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Pt1000; Pt2000

Pt100 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt1000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

Pt100 a = 0.003916

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt2000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

Pt200 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.5 °C @ 400 to 630 °C

Pt1000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

Pt500 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

Ni120

±0.3 °C @ -80 to 100 °C

±0.6 °C @ 100 to 260 °C

0.01 °C

-25 to +80 °C

2m (up to 12 m on request) approx. 196 x 57 x 32.2 mm (7.7 x 2.2 x 1.3 in.)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-375

PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module

Module purpose:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Important note:

Driving dry contact relays

300 VDC

25-pin D connector

This module is not supported by DEWESoft data acquisition software

PAD-DO7 specifications

Parameter

Output channels:

Relay type:

Max load:

Gain linearity:

Input isolation:

Relay on-time:

Common mode voltage:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

PAD-DO7

7 relay output channels

Form “A” relay SPST N.O. with dry contacts

0.5 A (60 VAC) 1 A (24 VDC)

0.001%

300 VRMS

5 mS typical

130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

Yes

+12 VDC (±10%)

1.0 W typical

14-376 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connector pin-outs

Pin

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

Function

R1 NO

R1 COM

R2 NO

R2 COM

R3 NO

R3 COM

R4 NO

R4 COM

R5 NO

R5 COM

R6 NO

R6 COM

Pin Function

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

21

22

23

24

25

R7 NO

R7 COM

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

+12 VDC

Init

GND

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

* not supported in Dewesoft software

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Convenient building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, PAD | 14-377

PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module

Module purpose:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Important note:

Driving a DC analog output

300 VDC

25-pin D connector

This module is not supported by DEWESoft data acquisition software

PAD-AO1 specifications

Parameter

Output channel:

Output signals:

Voltage

Current

Resolution:

Accuracy:

Read-back accuracy:

Rad-back resolution:

Zero drift:

Voltage output

Current output

Span temp. coefficient:

Programmable output slope:

Current load resistor:

Isolation:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

PAD-AO1

1 analog VDC output channel

0 to 10 V

0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

12-bits

±0.1 % of FSR

±1 % of FSR

±0.02 % of FSR

±30 μV/°C

±0.2 μA/°C

±25 ppm/°C

0.125 to 1024 mA/sec or 0.0625 to 512 V/sec

500 Ω

300 VDC

Yes

+12 VDC (±10%)

1.2 W typical

OUT

14-378 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connector pin-outs

Pin

10

11

12

6

7

8

9

3

4

5

1

2

Function

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Pin

16

17

18

19

13

14

15

20

21

22

23

24

25

* not supported in Dewesoft software

Function

Not connected

Not connected

Reserved

Reserved

IOUT (+)

IOUT (-)

VOUT (+)

VOUT (-)

Not used

GND

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Convenient building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-379

15

MDAQ series Conditioners

MDAQ Series Common Information

Calibration information

„

„

„

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions.

Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for

MDAQ series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

General MDAQ module specifications

MDAQ modules are factory installed within your Dewetron system. From the outside you see only the input connectors. But inside, there is a BASE card which can hold any two 8-channel MDAQ-SUB modules on one side, and any MDAQ-FILT filter card on the other side. The result is a system which can be configured to suit a wide variety of applications.

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

15-380 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board

Every MDAQ assembly consists of a 16-channel MDAQ-BASE mother board and at least one MDAQ-SUB series 8-channel daughter card. Each MDAQ-BASE card can accept any two MDAQ-SUB cards, which are mounted next to each other on one side of the MDAQ-BASE. The other side of the MDAQ-BASE can accept any single Dewetron MDAQ-FILT series 16-channel filter card.

MDAQ-BASE-5 Details

The MDAQ assembly is factory installed according to your purchase order. Unlike DAQ modules, which can be freely plugged/ unplugged by the system user, MDAQ assemblies are not user-exchangeable. When your system is constructed at Dewetron, the

MDAQ assembly will be completely installed and tested.

TOP: MDAQ-SUB DAUGHTER cARDS (2)

MIDDLE: MDAQ-BASE MOTHER BOARD

BOTTOM: MDAQ-FILT cARD (OPTIOnAL)

MDAQ-SUB module dimensions:

Modules with BNC connectors:

Modules with DSUB connectors:

175 x 61 x 30 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 1.2 in.)

175 x 82 x 22 (6.9 x 3.2 x 0.9)

MDAQ-SUB output connector (for MDAQ-BASE mother board)

68-pin amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-381

Module

MDAQ-SUB-STG-D

Connector: DB9

V

MSI

MSI

MSI

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE-D

Connector: DB9

MSI

V

MSI

MSI

MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Connector: DB9

Chs

Input type Ranges

8

8

Strain gage (full, half, and

1/4 bridge, incl. shunt cal and balance) for strain gage applications

Voltage up to ±10V

IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

Voltage via MSI-BR-V200

Thermocouples via MSI-BR-

TH-J, -K, -T

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

Strain gage (full and half bridge) for strain gage sensors

Voltage up to ±10V

IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

Voltage via MSI-BR-V200

Thermocouples via MSI-BR-

TH series

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

Voltage up to ±200V

14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V

(@ 5V excitation)

15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V

Full range of thermocouple type

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V

(@ 5V excitation)

15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V

Full range of thermocouple type

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V 2)

8 IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

TEDS

Bandwidth

High-pass

Filter

Excitation

√

BW: 30 kHz

HF: --

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

√

BW: 30 kHz

HF: 0.16 Hz

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

EX: ±15 VDC

√

BW: 300 kHz

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

EX: ±15 VDC

V

MSI

MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC

Connector: BNC

8 Voltage up to ±200V 13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V --

BW: 300 kHz

HF: --

EX: --

V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC

Connector: BNC

8 IEPE or voltage up to ±10V 8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V √

BW: 300 kHz

HF: 0.16 Hz

EX: 4/8 mA

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC

Connector: BNC

(same image as above)

8 IEPE or voltage up to ±10V 8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V √

BW: 300 kHz

HP: 0.16 and

3.4 Hz

EX: 4/8 mA

1) When excitation is chosen on any channel of an MDAQ-SUB module, it is the same for all 8 channels of that module.

⇒ 2) We recommend not exceeding 50Vrms on the DSUB input connector for safety reasons

15-382 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special functions:

Ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors, 1/4 bridge sensors,

Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/Ωic sensors

Built-in bridge completion, built-in shunt resistors,

Software selectable auto-balance

Excitation programmable in 1 mV steps from 0 to 12VDC

Sense lines for the most accurate measurements

15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V

30 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-D: Banana plugs (standard)

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

V

MDAQ-SUB-STG specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Typ. input offset drift:

DC Accuracy (High Gain)

±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV

20mV

50mV

±100mV to ±200mV

MDAQ-SUB-STG

0.5 to 2000

±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,

40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V

>100 MΩ

3.5 nV * √Hz

0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

(no correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

DC Accuracy (Low Gain)

±0.250 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; 10V

Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:

Excitation voltage:

Excitation accuracy:

Excitation drift:

Excitation protection:

Excitation current limit:

Bridge types:

Shunt resistor:

Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:

Bridge resistance:

(with correction table applied) (no correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±1mV

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

±0.15% of reading ±1mV

±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

0 to 12 VDC, programable in 1 mV steps. (5 VDC default)

±0.05 % ±0.7 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

Continuous short to ground

50 mA/channel

4- or 6-wire full bridge

3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)

3- wire Quarter bridge with internal 120 Ω and 350 Ω completion (software selectable)

Internal 100 k and 50 k Resistor (software selectable)

0.05% 5ppm/°K

120 Ω to 10 k Ω

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-383

Parameter

Automatic bridge balance:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (low-pass):

Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

2.5mV to 20mV

25mV to 200mV

250mV to 1V

2V to 10V

Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

MDAQ-SUB-STG

Absolute Voltage

Input isolation:

Common Mode Voltage:

Input over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

TEDS compatible 1)

Power consumption:

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

Standard operating temperature:

350 Ω 16 Channels typ. 8 W

120 Ω 16 Channels typ. 15 W

350 Ω 16 Channels typ. 15 W

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F) mV/V @ 5V EXC

±10mV

±100mV

±0.5V

±5V

30 kHz

±2mV/V

±20mV/V

±100mV/V

±1000mV/V

See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)

64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

N/A (input is differential but not isolated)

12V maximum

±25 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ω

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

μm/m @ 5VEXC

(k=2 quarter bridge)

±4,000μm/m

±40,000μm/m

±200,000μm/m

±2,000,000μm/m

1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the

9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector.

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

PIN Function

EXC+

IN+

Sense -

GND

+15VDC (50 mA)

Sense +

IN-

EXC-

TEDS

15-384 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-385

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection (Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

⇒ sense leads (sUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!

‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

15-386 | OWNER’s GUIDE

⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V.

Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with

6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-387

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special functions:

Ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors

Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/Ωic sensors

Built-in bridge completion for half bridge

AC/DC coupling software selectable

Software selectable auto-balance

Several selectable excitation voltages

Sense lines for the most accurate measurements

15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V

30 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-D: Banana plugs (standard)

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional) V

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Typ. input offset drift:

DC Accuracy (High Gain)

±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV

20mV

50mV

±100mV to ±200mV

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE

0.5 to 2000

±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,

40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V

1 MΩ

3.5 nV * √Hz

0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

(no correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

DC Accuracy (Low Gain)

±0.250 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; 10V

(with correction table applied) (no correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±1mV

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

±0.15% of reading ±1mV

±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range

Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:

Excitation voltage:

Excitation accuracy:

Excitation drift:

Excitation protection:

Excitation current limit:

Bridge types:

Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:

Bridge resistance:

Automatic bridge balance:

2.5mV to 20mV

25mV to 200mV

250mV to 1V

2V to 10V

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5V (default) and 10 VDC (software selectable)

±0.05 % ±0.7 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

Continuous short to ground

50 mA/channel

4- or 6-wire full bridge

3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)

0.05% 5ppm/°K

120 Ω to 10 k Ω

Absolute Voltage mV/V @ 5V EXC

±10mV

±100mV

±0.5V

±5V

±2mV/V

±20mV/V

±100mV/V

±1000mV/V

μm/m @ 5VEXC

(k=2 quarter bridge)

±4,000μm/m

±40,000μm/m

±200,000μm/m

±2,000,000μm/m

15-388 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (low-pass):

Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

Input isolation:

Common Mode Voltage:

Input over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

TEDS compatible 1)

Power consumption for 16 channels:

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE

30 kHz

See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)

64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

N/A (input is differential but not isolated)

12V maximum

±25 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ω

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

350 Ω @ 10V Exc. typ. 15 W

120 Ω @ 5V typ. 15 W

350 Ω max. @ 15 W max.

120 Ω @ 15 W

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (sUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin sUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector.

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

PIN Function

EXC+

IN+

Sense -

GND

+15VDC (50 mA)

Sense +

IN-

EXC-

TEDS

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-389

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

15-390 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V.

Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with

6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset Sensitivity

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-391

MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Measuring ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Voltages, and low currents with appropriate shunt

The DSUB version has sensor power on board, and is TEDS compatible

Low and high ranges from ±0.125 V to ±200 V

300 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-BNC: BNC jacks (standard)

-D: 9-pin DSUB connector

MDAQ-SUB-V200 Specifications

V

Parameter

Input ranges:

Divider OFF (higher voltage ranges)

Divider ON lower voltage ranges)

Input impedance:

DC accuracy: (Divider OFF)

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; ±10V

DC accuracy: (Divider ON)

±2.5 to ±20V

±25V; ±50V

±100; ±200V

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

125 mV to 10 V (Divider OFF)

2.5 V to 200 V (Divider ON)

Over voltage protection:

-3 dB Bandwidth: (Divider OFF)

(Divider ON)

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMRR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz) (Divider OFF)

(Divider ON)

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz BW (Divider OFF)

±0.125 V and ±0.25 V

±0.5 V to ±10 V

MDAQ-SUB-V200

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V (12 V max CMV)

±2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 V, 25 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V (250 V max CMV)

1 MΩ to GND, 2 MΩ differential

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±0.06% of reading

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±400 μV

±1 mV

±0.03% of range

(with correction table applied)

±8 mV

±20 mV typ. 15 ppm/K (max. 40 ppm/K)

±0.03% of range

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

(without correction table applied)

±0.25% of reading

±0.25% of reading

±0.25% of reading

8 mV

20 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 μV/K (max. 20 μV/K) typ. 100 μV/K (max. 200 μV/K)

±250 VDC

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 0.125 V and 1.25 V)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 2.5 V and 25 V)

> 80 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

> 70 dB (> 56 dB)

> 87 dB

> 96 dB

±2.5 V and ±10 V

±10 V to ±25 V

±25 V to ±200 V

(Divider ON)

Programmable sensor supply (1)

Sensor supply accuracy(1)

Fixed sensor supply (1)

Output voltage:

Output impedance:

Output current:

RS485 interface for module control:

> 84 dB

> 88 dB

< 93 dB

0 to 12 V short circuit protected;

50mA current limmitation ±0.05 % ±2 mV

±15 V (50 mA)

±5 V

5 Ω

±20 mA

Yes

15-392 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Parameter

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Sensor connection:

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-V200

±15 VDC typ. 4.5 W / 10 W

-BNC:

-D:

BNC connector, female

9-pin DSUB connector, female

Yes (-D model only!), compatible with chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

1) Applies to the MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D model only (DSUB connector)

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-BNC version

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D version

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

See table >

⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of sUBD connector.

⇒ Note - for safety reasons, refer to your local/government regulations about the maximum voltage that may be applied to

BNC or DsUB connectors!

PIN

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

DSUB-9 connector

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D module (typ x 8)

TEDS

IN+

Reserved

GND

+15V sensor supply

0 - 12VDC sensor supply (software programmable)

IN-

Reserved

-15V sensor supply

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-393

MDAQ-SUB-V200 sensor connections

Sensor with differential output, module powered Sensor with common ground

Loop-powered sensor, ext. shunt Single-ended connection

Current measurement, external shunt Potentiometric connection

15-394 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Avoiding Common Mode Issues

In contrast to isolated amplifiers the input common voltage range is limited at differential amplifiers. The measurement configuration below shows the possibilities to measure the current of a 24 V supplied system.

The optimum input range in that case is 500 mV. That will work fine for CH1 in the picture, but not for the

CH0. This channel will exceed the maximum common mode voltage and go into overflow.

With the MDAQ-SUB-V-200 module, there are several ranges which overlap between the 12V and 250V max CMV ranges. This is intentionally done to provide you with more options when it comes to choosing the best possible fit of range/resolution/common mode.

The max. CMV is shown here within the software (analog channel setup dialog):

Notice that in the screen shot above left, the CMV is shown to be 12V max, whereas it is 250V max in the screen shot above right.

⇒ Always pay attention to the max CMV which is listed on the channel setup screen, when you select a given range within the software.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-395

MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Modes:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

IEPE constant current accelerometers and microphones, and ±10V max. signals

Single ended or differential input mode

AC/DC coupling

300 kHz

N/A

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

BNC connector

V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC specifications

Parameter

Input voltage ranges:

Gain:

Input modes:

Input impedance:

DC Accuracy:

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

Over voltage protection:

Voltage modes

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5;10V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V

0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40

IEPE or low voltage

Single-ended or differential

AC or DC coupling

1 MΩ

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±400 μV

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±1 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K) typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)

IN+ differential ±40 V

IN- differential: max ±40 V

IN- Single ended: max 300 mA

12 V (differential mode)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

Max common mode voltage:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:

Range ±0.125 V

Range ±0.25 V

Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V

Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V

Sensor excitation:

Current noise:

RS485 interface for module control:

Power supply voltage:

Output voltage:

Output impedance:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

> 87 dB

> 93 dB

> 96 dB

> 100 dB

4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC

150 nA * sqrt (Hz)

Yes

±15 VDC

±5 V

5 Ω typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

15-396 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC version

Typical Sensor Hook-ups

HOT: IN+

SHIELD: IN-

Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode

For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the

BNC is connected to GND. The input coupling is switched to AC. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so that it can read the sensor information from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in the voltage mode).

In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.

The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.

NOTE: If floating input sources (like batteries) are connected to the MDAQ-sUB-ACC the amplifier has to be used in single ended configuration (GND-switch ON)! Otherwise the input may be out of the maximum input voltage range!

In differential mode as well as in single ended mode AC or DC coupling is possible. The standard high pass filter frequency is 3 Hz in AC-mode. Please contact DEWETRON for other frequencies.

⇒ The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 channels of this MDAQsUB module. However, other MDAQ-sUB modules may be set to different constant current levels.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-397

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Modes:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

IEPE constant current accelerometers and microphones, and ±10V max voltages

Two selectable high-pass filters

Single ended, AC/DC coupling

300 kHz

N/A

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-BNC: BNC connector

V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A specifications

Parameter

Input voltage ranges:

Gain:

Input modes:

Input impedance:

DC Accuracy:

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

Over voltage protection:

Voltage modes

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5;10V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V

0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40

IEPE or low voltage

Single-ended only

AC or DC coupling

1 MΩ

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±400 μV

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±1 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K) typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)

IN+ ±40 V

IN- Single ended: max 300 mA

±12 V (differential mode)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

Max common mode voltage:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:

Range ±0.125 V

Range ±0.25 V

Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V

Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V

Sensor excitation:

Current noise:

RS485 interface for module control:

Power supply voltage:

Output voltage:

> 87 dB

> 93 dB

> 96 dB

> 100 dB

4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC

150 nA * sqrt (Hz)

Yes

±15 VDC

±5 V

Output impedance:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

5 Ω typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

15-398 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC version

Typical Sensor Hook-ups

Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode

For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the

BNC is connected to GND. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so that it can read the sensor information from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in the voltage mode).

In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.

The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.

⇒ The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 channels of this MDAQsUB module. However, other MDAQ-sUB modules may be set to different constant current levels.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, MDAQ | 15-399

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card

MDAQ-FILT-5-BE: Bessel characteristics

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics

16 Channel 2nd order low pass filter

5 selectable filters including bypass function

5 different cut off frequencies

Discrete low noise filter design

Independent filter settings for each channel

Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx specifications

Parameter

Filter range (-3 dB):

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BE

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1

Bypass bandwidth:

Filter characteristics:

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx

30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass

30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass other frequencies optionally available

> 700 kHz

Attenuation slope:

Filter Accuracy:

DC gain:

Offset error:

Input voltage range:

Channel separation @ 50 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Input configuration:

Output configuration:

S/NR @ bandwidth:

Output impedance:

Output current:

Output connector:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

-BE model

-BU model

2-Pole Bessel

2-Pole Butterworth

40 dB/decade (12 dB/octave)

±1.5 dB @ fc

1 (0 dB)

Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)

Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5

±10 VPP

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board

Single-ended

> 100 dB

5 Ω

20 mA max.

68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type

±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE typ. 3 W

175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)

15-400 | OWNER’s GUIDE

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE: Bessel characteristics

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics

16 Channel 4th order low pass filter

5 selectable filters including bypass function

5 different cut off frequencies

Discrete low noise filter design

Independent filter settings for each channel

Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx specifications

Parameter

Filter range (-3 dB): version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1 version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2 version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1

Bypass bandwidth:

Filter characteristics:

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass

163 Hz, 500 Hz, 2.5 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass, bypass

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, bypass

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30 kHz, bypass other frequencies optionally available

> 700 kHz

Attenuation slope:

Filter Accuracy:

DC gain:

Offset error:

Input voltage range:

Channel separation @ 50 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Input configuration:

Output configuration:

S/NR @ bandwidth:

Output impedance:

Output current:

Output connector:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

-BE model

-BU model

4-Pole Bessel

4-Pole Butterworth

80 dB/decade (24 dB/octave)

±1.5 dB @ fc

1 (0 dB)

Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)

Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5

±10 VPP

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board

Single-ended

> 100 dB

5 Ω

20 mA max.

68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type

±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE typ. 3 W

175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-401

16

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series

EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview

EPAD2 modules are external signal conditioning modules which connect to virtually any Dewetron system via the RS485 interface, normally marked EPAD on your Dewetron system. It is marked this way on both the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 mainframes. However, EPAD2 series modules may also be connected to any computer using a small interface box called the EPAD-BASE2, which allows you to connect one or more

EPAD2 modules to your computer’s RS232 or USB 2.0 interface.

CPAD2 modules are external modules which connect to any Dewetron system which has at least one CAN

BUS interface. Unlike EPAD2 series modules which employ the RS485 bus for communication and data transfer, CPAD2 modules employ the CAN BUS for these functions.

Both EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are 100% compatible with Dewetron software. The following pages will show you how to connect and control these modules from within your system, as well as provide detailed specifications about these modules.

EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are available for measuring voltage, current, and temperature. Each module provides 8 inputs. They have a separate 24-bit ADC for each input channels, and provide galvanic isolation to avoid ground loops and common mode problems. They can be daisy-chained to add more and more channels to a single interface (CPAD2 and EPAD2 modules cannot be chained together).

EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are not meant for dynamic/AC signals, but are intended for slowly changing

(quasi-static) and DC signals. They are the ideal way to add a moderate or even large number of slow channels to your Dewetron system in an affordable and convenient way.

Further technical details can be found within the xPAD technical reference manual, a separate document.

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

16-402 | OWNER’s GUIDE

General EPAD2/CPAD2 Module Specifications

Environmental:

Temp. range storage:

Temp. range operating:

Enhanced temperature range:

Rel. humidity (MIL202):

RFI susceptibility:

-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

-5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Upon request and special order

0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

EPAD2/CPAD2 Series Common Information

Calibration information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

„

„

„

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

EPAD2 RS-232/485 interface

EPAD2 series modules are controlled via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: 9600 data bits: 8 parity: no parity stop bits: 1 handshake: not required

CPAD2 CAN BUS interface

CPAD2 series modules are controlled via the industry standard CAN BUS over CAN 2.0b protocol, and they require this interface for all data transfers. CAN BUS is an option for both the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 instruments, and must be installed at the factory in order for this interface to be available for CPAD2 connection.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-403

Cross-reference of EPAD2 / CPAD2 modules

MODULE

EPAD2-TH8-x

CPAD2-TH8-x

(where x = J, K, T, U)

EPAD2-V8

CPAD2-V8

EPAD2-RTD8

CPAD2-RTD8

EPAD2-TH8-P

CPAD2-TH8-P

EPAD2-LA8

CPAD2-LA8

INPUT TYPE

8 thermocouple connectors

Type J: xPAD2-TH8-P-J

Type K: xPAD2-TH8-P-K

Type T: xPAD2-TH8-P-T

Type U: UNIVERSAL

8 isolated voltage input channels

INPUT RANGES

Type J: -210 to 1200 °C

Type K: -270 to 1372 °C

Type T: -270 to 400 °C

Type U: includes types K, J, T, E,

R, S, B, N, C, and U

Physical input range: ±50 V

Software selectable: ±100 mV,

±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V,

±10 V

ISOLATION COMMENTS

Overvoltage protection: 15

VDC

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to BUS, power and chassis)

Types J, K, T have typical accuracy of ±0.4°C

Type U (universal) has typical accuracy of ±1.4°C

Overvoltage protection:

350 VDC

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to BUS, power and chassis)

DSUB25 connector - please order PAD-CB8-B or -BNC breakout boxes to complete this module

8 isolated Resistance

Temperature Detector (RTD) channels

Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω

RTD:

PT100(385), PT200 (385),

PT500(385), PT1000 (385),

PT2000(385), PT100 (3961)

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to BUS, power and chassis)

Overvoltage protection: 15

VDC

LEMO connectors

8 isolated voltage inputs

Supported breakout boxes:

PAD-CB8-x-P2 PAD-CB8x-M PAD-CB8-RTD

8 isolated current inputs

±1.5 V fixed

0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, ±30 mA

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to BUS, power and chassis)

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to BUS, power and chassis)

Overvoltage protection: 15

VDC

DSUB25 connector - please order PAD-CB8-J, K, T or

-RTD breakout boxes to complete this module

Overcurrent protection:

70 mA cont.

LEMO connectors

Installing CPAD2 modules

After connecting a CPAD2 module to an unused CAN BUS interface on your Dewetron system, run DEWESoft and go to the HARDWARE SETTINGS screen, accessed under the

SETTINGS button. Then click on the CAN button.

Select the CAN interface that you connected the CPAD2 module to on that screen and set it to work with CPAD2 modules, as shown in the screen shot here.

If your software does not have this selection on the CAN screen, please obtain the CPAD2 plugin from Dewetron. This is a software addon that is free of charge with your CPAD modules. It was included on a DVD/CD disk when you purchased your CPAD2 module(s). Or it can be downloaded from our FTP site.

Additional CPAD2 series modules can be daisy-chained to the first module. The last CPAD2 module must have the terminator plugged into the last open connector to ensure stable bus communications.

Terminator

16-404 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Installing EPAD2 modules

When you purchase an EPAD2 module for an existing

Dewetron system, you need to make a small change to the hardware setup of your system so that the EPAD2 is recognized by the software.

First, connect the EPAD2 to the EPAD connector on your system. If you plan to connect multiple EPAD2 modules, start with one first and then add the others one at a time.

When connected properly, the EPAD2 LED should light up, indicating that it is powered. If this does not happen, check your cabling and verify it with Dewetron if necessary.

Now run DS-7. Click the SETTINGS button near the top right of the screen and then click HARDWARE

SETUP. Make sure you are looking at the ANALOG page of this dialog box. It looks like this:

Notice the area that we have drawn a red rectangle around in the screen shot above: this is where you need to input the number of EPAD2 modules that you want to add. Enter that number here. Then click OK to close this dialog box.

Click Ch Setup to see the list of ANALOG channels in DS-7. Scroll to the very bottom of this list and you will see that four empty channels have been added. Assuming that one EPAD2 module is connected already to the bus, double-click the first empty EPAD2 channel in the list within the AMPLIFIER column:

Double-click here

The new empty channels are outlined in red above. Now DOUBLE-CLICK on the first amplifier button, that we have outlined in blue above. That will cause DS-7 to pop up the question “what should be done with the module?”, at which point you should click the FILL button.

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-405

When you click FILL, DS-7 will prompt you to press the black button on the EPAD2 module. Use a paperclip or thin pencil lead to do that, and the module will be addressed to this slot number, and it will show up here on the Setup screen. Use the SET CH. button on the far right to configure the eight channels of this module.

Now connect the next EPAD2 module and repeat these steps, moving down to the next empty amplifier button, and so on, until all EPAD2 modules have been installed.

Be sure to plug the terminator into the last EPAD2 module (even if there is only one EPAD2 module).

xPAD2 Series Calibration Information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions.

Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

„

„

„

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for

MDAQ series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

16-406 | OWNER’s GUIDE

EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for thermocouple types J, K, T, and U (universal)

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input signals:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

EPAD2-TH8-x and CPAD2-TH8-x

8 isolated thermocouple channels thermocouple types depending on module

J: -210 °C to 1200 °C

K: -270 °C to 1372 °C

T: -270 °C to 400 °C

U: Supports types K, J, T, E, R, S, B, N, C, and U

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded

Type K: yellow

Type J: black

Type T: blue

Type U: white

0.01 °C for all types typically 1.4 MΩ typically 10 nA module indicates fullscale if input is open

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Open thermocouple detection:

Accuracy:

Thermocouple type J

Thermocouple type K

Thermocouple type T

Thermocouple type U

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

±1.0 °C @ -210 to -100 °C ±0.3 °C @ -100 to 760 °C

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C ±0.4 °C @ -25 to 1000 °C

±0.4 °C @ 760 to 1200 °C

±0.5 °C @ 1000 to 1372 °C

±1.0 °C @ -250 to -150 °C ±0.4 °C @ -150 to 400 °C

Varies according to the T/C type and range, but accuracy ±1.4 °C, typ. ±0.7 °C typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

360 g typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-407 xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisychain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

PIN

3

4

1

2

EPAD2

RS485 (A)

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

Use the correct type

Thermocouples are color coded according to international conventions.

Note: Our “universal” thermocouple input is cowwhite, to indicate that it is compatible with multiple thermocouple types.

Connecting sensors

Use thermocouple sensors with standardized “mini” thermocouple connectors. This is a polarized connector with two flat blades, and one blade is wider than the other. Insert the plug correctly, and do not force the plug in the wrong way.

Connecting the thermocouple backwards will result in wrong readings.

LEMO EGG.1B.304

xPAD2-TH8-X Dimensions

Above: typical thermocouple mini connectors, image courtesy of Omega.com

16-408 | OWNER’s GUIDE

EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for voltages

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Linearity:

DC accuracy:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-V8-x and CPAD2-V8-x

8 isolated voltage channels

Physical input range: ±50 V Software selectable: ±100 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded

Type K: yellow

Type J: black

Type T: blue

Type U: white

1µV for all ranges typically 1.4 MΩ typically 10 nA

0.001 %

±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV typically 25 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-409 xPAD2-V8-X Dimensions

Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

8

9

6

7

10

11

12

4

5

2

3

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13 Channel 6 (+)

14

15

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Digital input 1*

Digital input 2*

Digital input 3*

+12 VDC

Reset / Digital input 4*

GND

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

* not supported in Dewesoft software

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisychain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

PIN EPAD2

3

4

1

2

RS485 (A)

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

xPAD2-V8 signal interface connector

Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box, such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-

CB8-BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and there is a convenient mating connector with screw terminals available for purchase.

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

16-410 | OWNER’s GUIDE

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for RTD sensors

Supports 2-wire and 4-wire hook-ups

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Connection type:

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8

8 isolated RTD channels

Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω

RTD: PT100(385); PT200(385); PT500(385); PT1000(385); PT2000(385); PT100(3961)

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

ERA.1S.304

0.01 °C for all types typically >100 MΩ typically 10 nA

2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page)

Pt100 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt100 a = 0.003916

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt200 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Accuracy:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

Pt500 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 250 °C

Pt1000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C typically 25 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

Pt2000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical

xPAD2-RTD8 Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-411

* Shield is on the housing

RTD connections

2-wire hook-up

ERA.1S.304.CLL

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisychain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

PIN EPAD2

3

4

1

2

RS485 (A)

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

4-wire hook-up

xPAD2-RTD8 signal interface connector

Pin

3

4

1

2

Function

Excitation +

Sense +

Sense -

Excitation -

16-412 | OWNER’s GUIDE

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for thermocouples or RTDs via

PAD-CB8 series break-out boxes

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input range:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Supported break-out boxes:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8

8 isolated voltage channels (prepared for thermocouple or RTD interface boxes)

±1.5 V (fixed)

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

SUBD 25-pin connector - please order your choice of PAD-CB8-TH or RTD series break-out boxes

1µV typically 1.4 MΩ

PAD-CB8-x-P2 standard thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)

PAD-CB8-x-M miniature size thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)

PAD-CB8-RTD RTD breakout box typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-413 xPAD2-TH8 Dimensions Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

12

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13 Channel 6 (+)

14

15

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

+12 VDC

Reserved

GND

Reserved / CJC

Reserved / CJC

Reserved / CJC

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisychain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

Mating connector

PAD-OPT1

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

PIN EPAD2

3

4

1

2

RS485 (A)

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

xPAD2-V8 signal interface connector

Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box, such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-

CB8-BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and there is a convenient mating connector with screw terminals available for purchase.

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. CJC chip and metal shell covers included. CJC chip will be preinstalled for you on pins 23-24-25 (not shown in image above).

16-414 | OWNER’s GUIDE

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for current measurements

Supports 0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, and ±30 mA

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Connection type:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-current protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8

8 isolated current input channels

0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA; and ±30 mA

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

LEMO EGB.1B.304

0.3 μA

50 Ω 0.1 %

2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page) typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

70 mA continuous

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

360 g typical

xPAD2-LA8 Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 16-415 xPAD2-LA8 signal interface connector

Pin

3

4

1

2

Function

Power supply +

Current +

Current -

Power supply -

EGB.1B.304

* Shield is on the housing

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisychain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

PIN

3

4

1

2

EPAD2

RS485 (A)

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

16-416 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - ORION A/D CARDs | 17-417

17

ORION series A/D Cards

There are several A/D cards which may be installed into your Dewetron system, depending on how it was ordered from the factory. In the models covered by this manual, the ORION-1616-100 is installed as a standard. However, as mentioned, your card might have been upgraded in terms of its options (the last digit might be changed), or upgraded to a completely different card, with a different model name.

The ORION series are simultaneous sampling, high-end performance, including synchronous counter/encoder inputs on board, and offering options such as CAN BUS interfaces, isolated counters and digital input lines, and more. ORION series cards represent the state of the art within the Dewetron family. They were designed from the ground up to allow 100% synchronization, not just within one system but across multiple systems, whether they are physically connected, or separated by thousands of miles.

This section will present the basic specifications for all commonly installed ORION series A/D cards. Additional information is available in Dewetron manuals specific to these cards, available as separate documents.

ORION series Cross-Reference

Max

SR

ADC type

Dig.

Ins

Dig. I/

Os

Series Voltage ranges Bits Ctr/Enc CAN

ORION-0824-200

ORION-1624-200

ORION-1622-100

ORION-3222-100

ORION-0816-1000

ORION-1616-100

ORION-3216-100

8

16

16

32

8

16

32

±0.1 V, ±0.5 V, ±2 V, ±10 V

IEPE®: 4 mA / 8 mA excitation

±10 V

±10 V

24-bit

24-bit

22-bit

±10 V 22-bit

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V 16-bit

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V 16-bit

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V 16-bit

204.8

204.8

100

100

1000

100

100

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

SAR

SAR

SAR

8 to 40

8 to 40

8 to 40

8 to 24

8 to 40

8 to 40

8 to 24

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

2 to 10 (ADV) 0 or 2

2 to 10 (ADV) 0 or 2

2 to 10 (ADV) 0 or 2

2 to 10 (ADV) 0 or 2

2 to 10 0 or 2

2 to 10

2 to 10

0 or 2

0 or 2

„

„

„

„

„

„

Key Features

Simultaneous sampling

Separate A/D converter channel

Dozens of different models

Synchronized analog, digital, counter and CAN inputs

Clock output for synchronizing external devices, e.g. video cameras

Sync option for synchronizing multiple systems or synchronize to IRIG or GPS

17-418 | OWNER’s GUIDE

ORION Overview

To create instruments with dozens or even hundreds of dynamic channels, multiple ORION cards can be installed within a single unit. All cards are synchronized via the internal sync-bus to ensure absolute simultaneous sampling of all channels.

„

„

„

„

„

„

Key Features

Simultaneous sampling

Separate A/D converter channel

Dozens of different models

Synchronized analog, digital, counter and CAN inputs

Clock output for synchronizing external devices, e.g. video cameras

Sync option for synchronizing multiple systems or synchronize to IRIG or GPS

Multiple Dewetron instruments can be hardwaresynchronized using the ORION-SYNC option. Depending on distance and local preconditions there are several choices how to use this option.

You can connect your instruments via standard

CAT6 cables, over short distances. The maximum length depends on the sampling rate and the A/D technology, and ranges between 30 m to 200 m. This requires that the ORION-SYNC option was factory installed when each system was made.

One card must be set as the master, and the others as slaves. This is done at the driver level.

CLOCK or GPS-CLOCK option installed internally, or connected externally (order IRIG-CLOCK-INT or

GPS-CLOCK-INT for factory-installed internal interfaces, or the IRIG-CLOCK-EXT or GPS-CLOCK-EXT for field-installed external interfaces).

The driver design enables total continuous gap-free disk storing rates of more than 100 MB/s. Today standard computers with a single hard disk reach continuous gap-free storing rates between 50 MB/s and 80

MB/s.

A/D Technologies within the ORION series

Delta-Sigma Converter

This technique is used in the ORION cards with 22 and 24-bit A/D converters. Of course, 24-bit converters offer highest dynamic range (up to 120 dB).

Whenever you choose a sampling rate, the used internal sampling rate is up to 512 times higher. Using this over-sampling technique full anti-aliasing protection is guaranteed. These boards can not be external clocked, but synchronized from board to board and also synchronized to GPS clock using the DEWE-GPS-

CLOCK or to IRIG time using DEWE- IRIG-CLOCK.

OWNER’s GUIDE - ORION A/D CARDs | 17-419

Flash Converter

This technique is used in all ORION cards with 16-bit A/D converters, as well as MI and AD series boards.

Flash converters offer the fastest sampling rates (up to 1 MS/s/ch) as well as the possibility for external clocking. This is required for external clocked applications like distance related A/D conversion, combustion analysis as well as order tracking applications (using hardware order tracking clocked by an encoder).

Combining ORION cards

ORION cards with different bit resolutions, or different max sample rates, cannot be mixed within the same system. In other words, you cannot install an ORION-0816-1000 and an ORION-1616-100 in the same system, because they have different max sample rates. Nor can you mix ORION-1616-100 with ORION-1622-100.

However, there is no problem to mix the ORION-3216-100 with ORION-1616-100 cards, because they have the same bit resolution and the same max sample rate. (The ORION-3216-100 is an ORION-1616-100 card with an add-on of 16 more channels, so they are essentially the same card anyway).

Also there is no problem to mix multiples of the same card, but which have different last digits. Therefore you may install an ORION-1624-200, ORION-1624-202, and ORION-1624-205 in the same system.

Synching ORION cards

If multiple compatible ORION cards are installed in the same system, they must be interconnected with a sync cable. A standard 10-pin connector with 1.27 mm flat ribbon cable is available for easy connection between the boards.

Synching Multiple systems

If multiple systems or PCI expansion systems are used, a sync bus option must be installed. This option decouples the internal sync bus with the external sync I/O connector. By changing the internal TTL sync bus levels from TTL to RS-422 level, the distance between two systems can be increased by up to 50 meters using by using standard CAT5/

CAT6 Ethernet cables (greater distances are possible - please contact

Dewetron to discuss).

17-420 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„ The ORION-DAQ-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 16-bit ORION cards.

„ The ORION-DSA-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 22- and 24-bit ORION cards.

The SYNC option also includes the security circuit if two master systems have to be connected together over the sync bus connection. As soon as the system is configured to a master system the external sync is ignored by disabling the SYNC-IN amplifier. The LED labeled MI (master internal) indicates if the system is configured to a master system. ME (master external) will light up if a valid sync signal is being received on the SYNC-IN connector.

Above: schematic of ORION-XXX-SYNC option

Note - if you plan on adding more compatible Dewetrons and hardware synchronizing them like this, it is highly recommended to have the sync option installed at the factory. It is difficult to add later.

Opto-coupler emitter

Opto-collector

System on

Power +5V

Power GND

SYNC IN

ME/MI LEDs (2)

SYNC OUT

To ORION card sync bus interface

In addition to the synchronization function the ORION-xxx-SYNC allows also the remote power-on of any connected slave system. When the master is powered on, an opto coupler output (PC817) is activated to switch on the power supply of the slave system. The remote power on also can be controlled with an external control voltage (+5 V@Sys-On). Systems with this option typically have a three way power switch labeled ON, OFF, and SLAVE ON. In this third mode, the system can be powered on remotely if connected to a master. This is very convenient for powering on everything at once, and in the correct order.

On-board RS-485 interface

ORION cards are equipped with an RS-485 interfaced as standard. The baud-rate is fixed to 9600, 8 data,

1 stop bit and no parity. This interface is used for configuration of DAQ, MDAQ, and HSI signal conditioning modules. In addition, PAD and EPAD2 series modulescan also be handled. Therefore there is no need for an additional serial interface for module control when ORION cards are used within your system.

OWNER’s GUIDE - ORION A/D CARDs | 17-421

In DS-7 you need to access the HARDWARE SETUP screen, and make sure that “ORION onboard” is selected as the module control interface, as shown in the screen shot at right.

ORION card Windows driver

Every PCI card requires a driver so that Windows knows how to implement it. 99% of the time, ORION cards are factory installed, and thus we install the drivers for you. If you are adding a second compatible ORION card to your system, then the drivers are already installed. However, if you are installing one or more ORION cards into a new computer, please contact Dewetron for the latest Windows driver.

Installing ORION cards

Please see the manual provided with your new ORION card for complete installation instructions. It is beyond the scope of this manual to describe that for all of the different ORION cards that we offer.

17-422 | OWNER’s GUIDE

ORION-0424-200

„ 4 simultaneous sampled channels, BNC connection

„ Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)

„ 4 input ranges (from ±0.1 V to ±10 V)

„ Input coupling DC or AC (0.15 Hz or 3.4 Hz)

„ 204.8 kS/s per channel

„ 24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

„ TEDS (IEEE 1451) sensor support

Model Overview

Model

ORION-0424-200

Analog chs

4

Max kS/s/ ch

204.8

Digital input chs

---

Digital

I/O

Ext clock

--

Ext. trigger

1

Counter/ encoder

TTL

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

1

CAN

BUS

--

Top Level Specifications

Parameter Specification

Number of analog input channels:

Input configuration:

Resolution:

Type of ADC:

4, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential or single ended

24 bit, nominal

Delta-sigma

Sample rate:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

Input signal range: ±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Positive to negative input 1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND

Over-voltage protection: ±30V on both positive and negative inputs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

Dimensions:

Form factor:

17.5 x 10.7 cm (6.9 x 4.2 in.) (not including connectors)

Half length PCI card

Analog input connector:

Counter input connector:

Environmental:

BNC

DSUB 9-pin connector, male

T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

OWNER’s GUIDE - ORION A/D CARDs | 17-423

ORION-0824-200

„ 8 simultaneous sampled channels

„ Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)

„ Synchronous digital inputs

„ 204.8 kS/s per channel

„ 24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

„ 6 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model

ORION-0824-200

ORION-0824-201

ORION-0824-202

ORION-0824-203

ORION-0824-204

ORION-0824-205

Top Level Specifications

8

8

8

8

8

8

Analog chs

Max kS/s/ch

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

Digital input chs

2 (8*)

2 (8*)

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

8

8

Digital

I/O

Ext clock

--

--

--

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

Ext. trigger

8

8

--

--

--

--

Counter/ encoder

TTL

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

2

2

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

--

2

--

2

--

2

CAN

BUS

Parameter Specification

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

8, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential or single ended / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

Input signal range:

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Over-voltage protection:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

Form factor:

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

Analog input connector:

±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak

1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND (Positive to negative input)

±30V on both positive and negative inputs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

17-424 | OWNER’s GUIDE

ORION-1624-200

„ 16 simultaneous sampled channels

„ ±10V input range

„ Synchronous digital inputs

„ 204.8 kS/s per channel

„ 24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

„ 6 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model

ORION-1624-200

ORION-1624-201

ORION-1624-202

ORION-1624-203

ORION-1624-204

ORION-1624-205

Top Level Specifications

Analog chs

16

16

16

16

16

16

Max kS/s/ch

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

Digital input chs

2 (8*)

2 (8*)

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

8

8

Digital

I/O

Ext clock

--

--

--

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

Ext. trigger

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

2

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

--

--

8

8

--

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

2

--

2

--

2

CAN

BUS

Parameter Specification

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

16, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

Input signal range:

Input impedance:

Over-voltage protection:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

Form factor:

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

Analog input connector:

±10 V

10 MΩ in parallel with 60 pF (both positive and negative inputs)

±30V on both positive and negative inputs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

OWNER’s GUIDE - ORION A/D CARDs | 17-425

ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100

„ 16 or 32 simultaneous sampled channels

„ ±10 V inputs

„ Synchronous digital inputs

„ 100 kS/s per channel

„ 22 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

„ 8 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model

ORION-1622-100

ORION-1622-101

ORION-1622-102

ORION-1622-103

ORION-1622-104

ORION-1622-105

ORION-3222-100

ORION-3222-101

Analog chs

16

16

16

16

16

16

32

32

Max kS/s/ch

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

Digital input chs

2 (8*)

2 (8*)

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

8

8

18 (24*) 8

18 (24*) 8

Digital

I/O

Ext clock

--

--

--

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Ext. trigger

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

--

--

8

8

--

--

--

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

2

--

2

--

2

--

2

CAN

BUS

Top Level Specifications

Parameter Specification

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Input signal range:

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Over-voltage protection:

16 or 32, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, single ended w/remote sense / 22 bit nominal / Sigma-delta

102.4 kS/s/ch maximum

±10 V

1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND

±30V

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

Form factor:

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

Half length PCI card

Analog input connector:

Environmental:

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

17-426 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-427

18

DEWETRON Interfaces

There are several key interface cards that are available for your Dewetron instrument. These include time code interfaces based on IRIG or GPS, as well as BUS interface cards for popular data busses such as

ARINC 429, MIL-STD-1553, NTSC/PAL video input, and more.

Please see the next pages for basic information about these interface cards. Additional details can be found in the manuals specific to each card, as provided with your system.

DEWE-CLOCK time code interface card

Device Overview

The DEWE-CLOCK is a synchronized time base generator capable of using either GPS or IRIG as time source. This allows completely synchronized data acquisition of multiple systems whether they are mobile or stationary. Additionally the DEWE-CLOCK can also be used as an IRIG time code generator (output IRIG B/

DC) synchronized to the GPS time.

The time synchronization is supported for the whole DEWE-ORION series as well as for many 3rd party A/D- boards.

The diagram below outlines the basic functionality of the DEWE-CLOCK:

18-428 | OWNER’s GUIDE

GPS Measurement Mode

The base of any GPS receiver is precise time measurement. In addition to the position information a precise

PPS (pulse per second) is generated by the GPS engine. This pulse is used to synchronize a 40 MHz oscillator with software PLL (phase locked loop). The result is an ultra-stable 40 MHz clock source which is completely free of drift over time.

Out of this 40 MHz base clock, the programmable clock divider generates the clock frequency for the standard data acquisition system which is being output on the 9-pin DSUB connector.

For A/D-boards with over-clocked delta sigma converters (e.g. DEWE-ORION-DSA series), a special output clock is required for synchronized sampling. This is available on a RJ45 connector.

The communication to the host is provided over USB interface.

IRIG Based Operation

The IRIG signal contains the binary-coded time (year, day of year, hours, minutes, seconds, fractions of a second) modulated on a sine wave carrier. This signal is decoded to the PPS and the drift-free 40 MHz clock.

The following IRIG time codes are supported:

„

„

IRIG-A (10 Hz)

IRIG-B (1 Hz)

Functionality of the LEDs

Power Green

The power LED is solid green when the DEWE-CLOCK is in normal operation.

Status (red)

Indicates current status of device. At normal operation - when DEWE-CLOCK is locked to the selected time source - it shortly blinks once a second.

When the time source signal is missing (neither GPS or IRIG time code signal), the device automatically goes to flying-wheel operation. This is indicated by inverted blinking.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-429

Mounting the Aerial

The aerial supplied with the DEWE-CLOCK is designed to be mounted with the included mounting kit. The positioning of the aerial is critical to the correct operation of the DEWE-CLOCK.

The aerial picks up the signals from up to 12 satellites which are all in different places in the sky. These satellites are not necessarily directly overhead, and can often be close to the horizon. Therefore it is best to mount the aerial in a way, that the least amount of metal obscures the view of the sky. On a domed roof, place the aerial on the top of the dome. On an open car with a roll-over bar, place the aerial horizontally on the highest point of the roll-over hoop and tape the wire securely to the frame.

Although the DEWE-CLOCK can work with at least three satellites, it’s precision increases the more satellites it finds. If one satellite disappears over the horizon, or behind an object, there are other satellites still in view.

In order to fix your antenna on a tube, use the provided universal mounting adaptor. The image here shows you how to affix the tube with the screws - see call-outs (1) (2).

Important note: The maximum diameter is limited to 43 mm (1.7 Inch). Otherwise the universal mounting adapter will not fit on the tube.

The DEWE-CLOCK is shipped with a 6 m antenna cable (standard). 15 m or 25 m antenna cables are available optionally.

„

„

PC-GPS-CBL15 - 15 m

PC-GPS-CBL15 - 25 m

This is an industry standard BNC connector, female. A mating BNC cable is not included with the IRIG-CLOCK option.

Warm-Up time

When the DEWE-CLOCK is used as GPS based time code generator for the first time, has been moved more than 200 km or not used for 10 hours (since last usage), it is recommended to perform a ‘cold start’. To get the best performance from your GPS in the future, perform this cold start in an open place with a good all round view to the sky. Allow the

GPS to map the satellites for at least 20 to 30 minutes. The GPS builds up the ‘Ephemeris’ data on each satellite which is stored in a non-volatile

18-430 | OWNER’s GUIDE memory, and means future satellite tracking is swift and stable. Once the GPS has carried out a successful cold start, future satellite lock from power up will take between 15 seconds and 1 minute. Before going to test in a shady environment with tall objects or near to trees, allow the GPS to settle in an open space for 5 to 10 minutes.

Scope of Supply

Connection

Connector overview:

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-431

Aerial connector

Connect the GPS antenna to the SMA connector.

IRIG connector

Connect the IRIG signal to the BNC connector.

Multi I/O connector

The 9-pin DSUB 9 (male) connector is configured as output connector for following signals:

18-432 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Mini USB connector

The mini-USB interface connectors meets standard USB pin assignment.

ORION-DSA-SYNC connector

This connector is used for synchronizing any ORION-DSA data acquisition card to the DEWE-CLOCK. For this purpose the DEWE-CLOCK is equipped with a RJ45 connector for connection to the DEWETRON data acquisition system. A standard CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable with up to 30 m can be used for connection.

Multi I/O connector cable

Type of cable: 2x2x0.25 shielded

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-433

18-434 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Connecting the DEWE-CLOCK hardware to the DAQ-System

Synchronization to DEWE-ORION-DAQ series or 3rd party A/D boards

To synchronize standard data acquisition systems a start trigger and the possibility of external clocking is required. Usually DEWETRON data acquisition systems are equipped with a 37-pin DSUB connector. This digital multifunction connector contains the required clock and trigger input for easy connection to the clocking unit.

DEWE-CLOCK with GPS source

DEWE-CLOCK with IRIG source

Synchronization to DEWE-ORION-DSA series

One of the unique features of the DEWE-CLOCK is the possibility to synchronize also data acquisition systems using delta sigma ADC technology like DEWE-ORION-DSA. The main challenge is to produce the

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-435

up to 256 times over sample clock used for these types of analog to digital converters. For this purpose the

DEWE-CLOCK is equipped with a RJ45 connector for connection to the DEWETRON data acquisition system. A standard CAT5e or CAT6 Ethernet cable with up to 30 m can be used for connection.

⇒ Please note: also the data acquisition has to be provided ORION-DsA-syNC option for having access to the synch bus of the board.

Configure of DS-7 Software

To unlock the GPS functionality in DS-7 software, the GPS has to be configured in the Hardware Setup screen (Settings > Hardware Settings > GPS):

Select “DEWESoft USB” from the GPS device dropdown menu.

DS-7 will automatically start searching for a connected device.

There are only a few settings on this screen, as follows:

Update rate

The update rate is fixed at 1 Hz.

18-436 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Maps directories

Select the directories, where you stored your maps. You can copy your maps into this directory, add individual directories or remove unused directories from the box. Convert the maps to .jpg or .bmp format before selecting them.

Timing settings

When you want to use the DEWE-CLOCK as high precision timing device for synchronized data acquisition, you need to enable this in the Timing section (Settings > Hardware Settings > Timing).

Select “DEWESoft USB” from the Timing device dropdown menu.

DS-7 will automatically start searching for a connected device.

Input settings

Time source

Here you can select which input signal (GPS or IRIG) is used for the time source.

Code type

If IRIG mode is selected as time source, this dropdown menu defines the used code type (IRIG-A, IRIG-B or

IRIG-G).

Modulation

This selects the modulation type (AC or DC) of the IRIG input signal

Output settings

The checkbox “IRIG Out” enables the output of the internally generated IRIG signal on the BNC connector of the DEWE-CLOCK.

Please note that only IRIG-B with DC modulation is supported as output signal.

Set to default

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-437

This button defines the current input and output settings as power on default settings. This way the DEWE-

CLOCK will always start up with the predefined settings.

What Happens If the Timinig Source is Lost?

For synchronizing the internal oscillator with the PPS signal at least 4 satellites are required. If the GPS or

IRIG signal is lost during acquisition the DEWE-CLOCK continues sourcing the data acquisition system with a precision clock source. Without synchronising to the GPS or IRIG signal, the oscillator may drift. Therefore the absolute time synchronisation cannot be guaranteed anymore. However, as soon the GPS or IRIG signal is available again, the DEWE-CLOCK recognizes a possible drift and tries to correct this inaccuracy. If the drift during the free-run time is higher than 200 ms, a new data file is automatically generated with exact time stamping.

The graph below gives an idea how the DEWE-CLOCK behaves when the GPS or IRIG signal is lost during data acquisition. In this example the drift of the oscillator is smaller than the allowed 2 ms (fixed).

A) This state shows the normal operation. The internal clock is synchronized to the GPS/IRIG once per second.

B) At this point the time source signal is lost.

C) In the free-run operation the oscillator drift is obvious.

D) After the time source signal is received again, the error during the free run cycle is calculated.

E1) Because the oscillator drift is smaller than 200 ms, the DEWE-CLOCK automatically corrects the drift for getting again time synchronized data. So the data acquisition is not interrupted although the time source signal was lost. The correction is done with the maximum rate of 5

μs/sec.

However if the time source signal is lost for too long, the oscillator drift may be higher than 200 ms. In this case automatically the existing data file is closed and a new file is generated with adding “Lost” of the current filename: “DataFilennameLostX” where X is a running number for each time source signal loss.

18-438 | OWNER’s GUIDE

As soon the timing device is selected, DS-7 automatically sets the data acquisition hardware to external clocking for receiving the sample frequency out of the DEWE-CLOCK. In addition, each measurement starts synchronized with the PPS signal. The time information of the data file is taken out of the GPS-time or IRIGtime and not from the local PC time anymore.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-439

Channel setup

The DS-7 screenshot below shows the channel setup screen of the DEWE-CLOCK when it was selected as

GPS device. In the column ON/OFF you can select the channels for storing during the measurement. The default channel names are displayed in the column NAME. You can change them with a double click on it.

Beside the channel names the actual value is displayed.

„

„

„

„

„

X absolute: Longitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes Y absolute:

Latitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes Z: Altitude in meters above sea level

Velocity: Speed over ground (vector of all 3 dimensions)

Direction: True track over ground

Used sat.: Numbers of satellites used for calculation of position and speed Current sec: Seconds since midnight (UTC + 15 seconds)

NMEA log: The raw NMEA string from the GPS receiver

The circle on the right side of the screen image (above) gives an overview of the satellites in view of the

GPS receiver and which of them are used from the receiver. The color of the shown satellites indicates the signal strength of them. From grey to dark green which is the strongest signal. Satellites shown in the centre of the circle are directly above the GPS aerial. Satellites shown at the border of the circle are near the horizon.

The field <PPS sync> and <Not fixed> change their color from grey to green depending if the appropriate feature is available at the moment (green means available).

The PPS sync is used for hardware synchronization to analog channels. This will eliminate the time shift caused due the calculation time of the GPS receiver and of the data transfer time of the USB interface.

18-440 | OWNER’s GUIDE

The button “NMEA log” shows/hides the raw NMEA data stream from the GPS receiver.

Measurement setup

When the DEWE-CLOCK is used as timing device and you switch to the measurement screen you will see the actual time from the DEWE-CLOCK shown in the top right corner of the screen. A green dot next to this time indicates that the DEWE-CLOCK is locked to the GPS or IRIG time whereas a red dot indicates that the

DEWE-CLOCK is in free-run mode.

As default the local time is stored inside the data file. But if the measurement results from multiple systems located in different time zones should be analyzed it is recommended to set to UTC or GPS time. This can be done in the Global settings of DEWESoft (Settings Global settings Displays). Doing so, the data from all data acquisition systems are containing the same absolute time stamp.

DEWE-CLOCK Specifications

DEWE-CLOCK

IRIG Input Specifications

Supported codes

Compatibility (AM code)

Ratio (AM)

Compatibility (DC code)

Impedance

Isolation

Trigger accuracy

IRIG Input Specifications

Supported codes

Isolation

Accuracy

GPS Specifications

General

PPS accuracy

Refresh rate

Position accuracy

Autonomous

Differential

Trigger accuracy

System Specifications

Clock accuracy locked

Clock accuracy unlocked

Specification

IRIG code A or B;; AM or DC

0.5 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p

3:1 ±10 %

DC Level Shift TTL / CMOS compatible

20 kΩ

150 VDC

1 µs

IRIG code B, DC

None

< 1 µs latency from GPS PPS signal

12 channel, L1 frequency receiver

100 ns

1 Hz

Horizontal CEP 3.0 m

1.0 m

1 µs

Without drift

< 10 ppm

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-441

18-442 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-CLOCK

Input

Output:

Trigger:

Scan clock:

ORION-DSA-SYNC:

Power supply

Temperature

Humidity

Dimensions

Weight

Vibration test

Shape

Frequency

Power spectral density

Duration:

Vibration test

Shape

Frequency range

Power spectral density

Duration

Shock

Shape

Acceleration amplitude

Duration

Shock test type

Specification

SMA for GPS antenna, BNC for IRIG I/O

Clock and Trigger for DAQ-systems on DB9 connector

PPS (pulse per second), rising edge on time, 75 msec high time, TTL level compatible

10 Hz to 10 MHz, rising edge synchronized,

50 % duty cycle, TTL level compatible

LVDS compatible on RJ45

USB powered, max. current 500 mA

Operating: -5 °C to +70 °C Non-operating (storage): -20 °C to +85 °C

10 % to 80 %; non condensing

133 x 104 x 43 mm (5.23 x 4.1 x 1.7 in.)

Approximately 330 g (0.72 lbs.)

EN 600068-2-6

Sine

10 Hz to 150 Hz

1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz

30 Minutes per axis

EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M2

Random

10 - 200 Hz

1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz

30 Minutes per axis

EN 60068-2-27

Half-sine

15 g

11 ms

Test in 3 axis, 3 shocks in each axis and direction

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-443

VIDEO-FG-4 interface card

This is a PCI card with four NTSC/PAL video inputs on it, presented on standard BNC connectors on the side of your Dewetron system. With this option and DEWESoft-PROF level software, you can acquire and display up to four video streams simultaneously in sync with your data.

It accepts standard composite colors (PAL, NTSC) or monochrome video formats (CCIR, EIA).

The supported resolution is programmable and includes square-pixel (640 x 480 or 768 x 576) and broadcast resolution. Before captured images are transferred to the PC’s memory, images can be scaled down using available selectable ratios.

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Image Acquisition

Frame Rate: 30 full-frame images acquired per second for each channel.

Color Image: Color video format is compatible with the following composite video input formats:

NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, PCL-B, PALD, PAL-G, PAL-H, PAL-I, PAM-M, PAL-N and SECAM

Monochrome Image: The monochrome video acquisition is compatible with CCIR and EIA (RS-170).

Optional Scaling: The acquire images or portions of images can be optionally scaled:

Acquisition of a programmable area of interest

Scaling of the image (down to 1:16)

Adjustment of hue (for NTSC signals), contrast (0 to 200%), brightness and saturation (0 to 200% for U and V signals)

Automatic chrominance gain control

It is necessary to install the driver for this card under Windows before it can be used within DEWESoft. Additionally, each of the inputs must be configured as a DirectShow video channel. This must be done for each of the four video inputs by following the instructions in the manual for this product.

The OEM source for this card is Adlink, part number PCI-RTV24. Please refer to that technical information for details.

18-444 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Video interface setup

Once the card is installed and configured for DirectShow under Windows, run DEWESoft and then go to hardware setup under the SETTINGS button. Click the VIDEO button to see the setup for your cameras and video inputs:

You need to enable DIRECTX video via the checkbox. When you do, the VIDEO-FG4 card should show up automatucally, and four video channels should appear in the list. If this does not happen, then the card is not set up properly under Windows, because DEWESoft will always see any properly configured DirectX video sources that are available under Windows.

Be sure that the ENABLED column is set to YES for each of the video streams that you want to be able to display and record.

In the bottom section you can choose the type of video files that will be created, and the compression format.

Once this is done, and you return to the SETUP screens, you will have a new button called VIDEO in the toolbar. Click it to access the video streams, preview them, and activate them for display and recording.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-445

As always, be sure to press in as USED any of the video streams or cameras that you want to be able to display and record with your data files.

Displaying video channels

Video streams are displayed almost like any other channel, except that there is a special video display widget that is used. Enter the design mode and find the icon that looks like a roll of film, and click it to add one video display widget to your screen:

The video widget is shown highlighted in yellow, above. After you click it to add a video window, you can select any USED video streams from the channel list to put them onto your screen. The video widget can be scaled and moved freely into an attractive arrangement on your display:

18-446 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Note: video streams also create a channel which contains the frame count. you can display this count in a digital meter as a convenience.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-447

ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces

ARINC 429 and 1553 bus interfaces are available for your Dewetron system, in both PCI card and external

USB box format. The OEM supplier of these interfaces is Ballard Technologies. Dewetron systems support the Omnibus line of cards and rack-mounting boxes, as well as the so-called “fifth generation” of lower cost

Ballard PCI cards. The software interface into DEWESoft is in the form of a software plugin, which is an option called DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553.

With the Omnibus series you can have a single card with both ARINC 429 and 1553 interfaces on it. In the UsB and 5th generation PCI series, there is one bus type maximum per interface.

The plugin will be installed and configured at the factory, however, if you need to reinstall the plugin, please copy Ballard.dll to the Addons folder of DEWESoft. If you are running Windows 7, plugins need to be registered, and there is a button for that on the plugins page of the DEWESoft hardware setup screen.

When this is done, the Ballard plugin will appear in Hardware setup plugin list.

Refer to Ballard manual for installation of Ballard drivers and connecting Ballard devices.

First checkmark the Ballard plugin to enable it. If any devices will be found they will be shown at Devices panel. If hardware configuration changes, just press the Search button and system will be rescanned.

If you want to use previous recorded data or/and don’t have hardware, you can use a replay mode. Checkmark it and select any csv file with device definition and bus data.

At the top you have save messages check box for saving replay files. Just check it and one csv file for each device (core) will be created along with DEWESoft data file when recording (on the same folder with the same name).

Under it is one button for each bus. Short name on the button is composed of device number, channel num-

18-448 | OWNER’s GUIDE ber and channel type. MIL-STD-1553 buses have two tabs, one for receive and one for transmit.

ARINC 429 receive setup

In addition to standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display options there is a scan check box. If it is checked every unhandled message coming through the bus will be added automatically to the list. On start every message already had standard channels (SDI, SSM and Parity). They can be deleted if you do not need them. Bus speed and Parity check are there for ARINC 429 bus control. Messages that do not have proper parity will be ignored.

In the table you can see all messages and channels and live data. Labels are always in octal notation, and for the message value you can choose between hex and binary (right click on the VALUES column). Messages are always ordered by their labels. Some properties like color and name can be changed directly on the table and for others you must open SETUP. In the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.

There is no problem to have more messages with the same label (and SDI filter) and/or more channels using same bits. When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.

ARINC 429 transmit setup

Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them. Bus speed is for ARINC 429 bus setup.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-449

Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.

Schedule messages will be send automatically in intervals which are defined with MIN INT and MAX INT values. The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by entering some other tab or entering the measure mode.

Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that messages.

MIL-STD-1553 receive setup

As in the ARINC 429 setup there are standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display options. There is also a scan check box. If SCAN is checkmarked, every unhandled message coming through the bus will be added automatically to the list.

18-450 | OWNER’s GUIDE

In the table you can see all messages, channels and live data. Messages are always ordered by their addresses. Some properties like color and name can be change directly on the table and for others you must open SETUP. In the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.

There is no problem to have more messages with the same address and/or more channels using same word/bits. When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.

MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup

Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-451

Every message has the Edit button which opens Transmit message setup form where all message properties and data can be set.

Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.

Schedule messages will be send automatically in the same order they have in the list. After each message there can be wait time which can be defined in Wait time column. After last message is sent the schedule starts will the first message again. The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by entering some other tab or entering the measure mode.

Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that messages.

Storing ARINC/1553 data

ARINC and 1553 channels pressed in as USED on the setup screen will be stored into the data file when you store data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.

Processing ARINC/1553 data in MATH

ARINC and 1553 channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.

18-452 | OWNER’s GUIDE

CAN BUS interfaces

In terms of hardware, Dewetron systems are available with several different CAN BUS interfaces. However,

90% of the systems delivered have the 2 CAN BUS interfaces that are provided as options from a Dewetron

ORION series A/D card. If you look at the model numbering of our ORION cards, you will see that the last digit changes according to which options are installed on the card, like this: model name last digit

ORION-1616-100

ORION-1616-101

ORION-1616-102

ORION-1616-103

ORION-1616-104

ORION-1616-105

0 (even)

1 (odd)

2 (even)

3 (odd)

4 (even)

5 (odd) description the standard card

Adds 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs

The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs

The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

You can see from the table above that basically any ORION card whose model name ends in an odd number has the CAN interfaces on it. In addition to the hardware option, you must have the software option called DEWESoft-OPT-CAN installed.

The actual CAN bus interface connectors installed on your unit are shown in SECTION 4, SIGNAL INPUT

CONNECTORS in this document. That page also shows you how to connect to the CAN BUS, including using termination resistors if needed.

If you want to use either one of the CAN bus interfaces to connect a Dewetron CPAD2 series module, please see SECTION 10, CONDITIONERS, CPAD2 within this document.

Your CAN interfaces should be set up already at the factory, however, if you need to check or reconfigure the settings, please check the HARDWARE SETUP under the SETTINGS menu. Then click the CAN button to see the CAN hardware interface setup:

Use the selector to choose the CAN device that is installed within your system. Here is a basic description of what each entry refers to:

„ Test CAN (replay mode) - for demonstration and training purposes, you may select this even if you do not have the CAN software option, and point the software to a CAN bus data file (CSV), which it will replay through the system for you.

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-453

„

„

„

„

„ National Instruments - select this if your system has a National Instruments brand PCI-CAN/2 interface card.

Softing - select this if you are using a compatible Softing brand CAN BUS interface card

Vector - select this if you are using a compatible Vector brand CAN BUS interface card

Dewetron DAQ - select this option if your system has any 16-bit ORION card with the CAN option

Dewetron DSA - select this option if your system has any 22- or 24-bit ORION card with the CAN option

⇒ Note - if your DEWEsoft license does not include the CAN option, you will not be able to proceed with hardware setup after selecting a real CAN interface card. Please contact Dewetron for a license upgrade.

After doing the hardware setup, please visit the CH SETUP screens and click on the CAN icon, which will appear there in the toolbar.

At first you will have no channels or messages being shown. This is normal.

Notice that there are buttons for CAN0 and CAN1. That is because there are two CAN interfaces in nearly every system. Your system could even have more -- in which case you will have additional buttons for CAN2,

CAN3, etc. The maximum is 8 interfaces in one Dewetron system.

It is essential to select the correct SPEED of the bus, in kBaud. Dewetron CAN hardware supports speeds up to 1 Mb (1,000,000 bits per second). 500 kb is the default.

⇒ selecting a wrong sPEED of the CAN bus can actually interfere with certain systems, so please take care to select the correct one.

Setting up your channels

It is important to know that the CAN data stream does not contain any information about the channels that are being conveyed within the 64-bit messages. Therefore you need to know the configuration. Most car companies are very secretive about the CAN message layout, and do not release this information. Dewetron

18-454 | OWNER’s GUIDE does not have any information about the CAN message layout from any car maker. However, there are third party programs such as CANALYZER which you could use to help in this area. This product is not affiliated with Dewetron in any way.

A great invention of Vector corporation is the DBC file. This is essentially a standardized flat file which contains the information about a given CAN messaging layout. If you have a DBC file, you may import it right here and set up all of your channels instantly. Click the IMPORT button under the label DBC library, and then select the DBC file that you would like to apply.

Scan for messages

Another approach is to checkmark the SCAN button. When you do this, DEWESoft will “listen” on this bus and identify all of the CAN messages that are coming across, and create messages for them here. DEW-

ESoft will show you how many messages it has found above the SCAN button.

sCAN can only find messages that appear during the time the system is scanning. Not all CAN messages are coming across the bus all the time! some messages only report errors, for example, so you might have to scan for days or weeks to see them all this way. yet other messages will only appear based on a specific query, and will thus never appear unless you cause them to report on the bus.

sCAN can only find messages; it cannot identify the channels within the messages

Of course, since each message might contain any number of channels, starting at various bits and running any bit length, and with any scaling factors, it is still impossible to know just from the messages, what the bits represent, but it gives you a starting point. As mentioned, the easiest way is by importing a DBC file, which contains everything already.

But if you need to configure channels manually, the procedure is quite simple.

Configuring message and channels manually

You can add messages manually by clicking the Message + button (or using SCAN as mentioned above).

To configure the channels contained within a message, click the SETUP button for a message, and the CAN

CHANNEL SETUP box will open:

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-455

In the top half of this dialog you set up the message itself, where in the bottom half you can configure the channels contained within this message.

Message setup

Looking at the top half, message configuration, here are the key things to know about:

Name The name of the message

Arb ID#

Type

DLC

Delay

ID number of your message on the CAN bus

Select between CAN standard and CAN extended from drop down list. Those two differs in identifier length. The standard length is 11 bits, and extended is 29 bits.

DLC is the length of the message. It ranges from 1 to 8. As a standard, the DLC is set to 8.

We can also enter the message delay in millisecond which shifts the time stamp of the message back in time. This can be used to perfectly synchronize the analog data with CAN data with compensating the delays in digital data transmission.

Channel setup

Now we need to add the channel(s) contained within this message. Click the ADD button and DEWESoft will create a default channel and color code the first 16 bits of the CAN message. Please enter the name and units of this channel, and the scale factor (multiplier and offset). Also, make sure that the start bit and length

(in bits) are correct. Then click OK. You can see that in the screen shot below, four channels have been set up within this one message. Two of the channels are just one bit long, whereas the other ones are

18-456 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Or, if this message contains multiple channels, repeat the procedure starting with the ADD button mentioned above, and create more channels. Within a message, there can be numerous channels, and each one can be absolutely unique in terms of its bit length, scaling, name, units... CAN is really quite flexible.

Arbitration IDs and CAN message rates

CAN messages are identified via hex IDs known as “Arbitration IDs.” This is what DEWESoft shows on the message list, in the ARB column:

Below the Arbitration ID, the rate at which this message is coming across the bus is also shown in Hz. You will notice that each message can come across at a different rate.

J1939 support

J1939 is used to enable special decoding of arbitration ID which includes the sender, receiver and the message ID itself. Arb ID is always extended in this case. This is most widely used on trucks, busses and certain military vehicles. Please make sure that the bus type is really J1939 before enabling this option.

OBD II support

DEWESoft additionally supports the protocol for reading in data from the OBD II port, required on all US cars. In this case, the messages are standardized, and a DBC file is not needed. This feature requires that an optional plugin be purchased and installed into DEWESoft.

Select messages / channels for storage

Notice the buttons near the top of the CAN setup window labeled VIEW:

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-457

It is important to go to the CHANNELS view, and then press USED for the channels that you want to really record and display next time you store data.

⇒ If you press UsED only on the MEssAGEs view, the actual message ID itself will be stored, but not the channel(s) that it contains!!! Always go to CHANNELs view and press in UsED for all channels that you want to display and store.

After clicking CHANNELS, you will see a list of all of the channels contained within the various CAN messages that you have set up:

Make sure to press USED in on the channels that you want to store and display. We cannot emphasize that enough.

OK, your CAN interface is set up.

When you save this Dewesoft SETUP, all of the CAN parameters are saved into the setup file, of course. But sometimes it is useful to be able to save this CAN setup as a DBC file. This is possible, as described in the next section.

Saving DBC files

Saving your CAN setup to a stand-alone DBC file requires a software option called DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-

OUT. This option is needed because the DBC file format is proprietary to Vector, a company not affiliated with Dewetron. With this software option, we include a license from Vector, which we purchase from them and transfer to you, so that you gain the ability to export your CAN setup to a standard Vector DBC file. This

DEWEsoft-CAN-OUT option also includes the ability to transmit CAN messages onto the bus. Please see

18-458 | OWNER’s GUIDE the separate documentation about these capabilities for further details.

Displaying CAN channels

Whichever CAN channels are pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen, will be displayed on the measure screens, as shown below. We made a simple screen which populates the CAN channels into digital meters. Below that, each of the four wheel speed channels are shown in a recorder graph.

Notice that the CAN channels are shown on the right side of the screen in the CHANNEL LIST. A nice feature is that the channels contained within each message are collapsed into a group whose name is the same as the message name:

OWNER’s GUIDE - INTERFACE CARDs | 18-459

So you can see that the message called SteeingWheel has four channels within it.

The CAN messages and channels will disappear from this list if you click on a display type which is incompatible. For example, CAN is too slow to show in a SCOPE or FFT graph. So if you click on a SCOPE or

FFT graph, the CAN channels will disappear from the channel list. This is the same with other very slow data, like from PAD, EPAD2 or CPAD2 modules, for example.

Storing CAN data

Any CAN channels pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen will be stored into the data file when you store data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.

Processing CAN data in MATH

CAN channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.

18-460 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-461

19

DEWETRON sensors

Dewetron offers a handful of specialty sensors for our systems, primarily DEWE-CAM series CAM-

ERAs that are made to work with our hardware and software. This section will show the sensors that we make and provide the details that you require about their specifications, capabilities, and applications.

We also offer GPs speed / distance and position sensors, with extremely high performance.

We also offer intertial sensors for movement applications.

19-462 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-CAMS

DEWE-CAM-USB

This camera is a USB 2.0 compatible DirectX camera that is compatible with all DEWETRON systems.

For use within the software, the Windows driver must be installed. In addition, the camera must be attached to the DEWETRON system before the software is started. Further operational guidelines are presented at the end of this section.

The DEWE-CAM-USB has an integral USB 2.0 cable which connects to your DEWETRON system. The camera is also powered via the 500 mA available on the USB port, and there is no separate power input possible on the camera. As a result, you should always connect the camera to a USB port on the DEWETRON system - and never via a USB hub or other in between device (such as the MOB-

DISP-17, as one example).

Outline Drawing

Operating System Drivers

„

„

Windows 32-bit: SFT-04040, driver and stand-alone video viewer

Windows 64-bit SFT-10028, driver only (please download SFT-04040 for a viewer)

Please see the DEWE-CAM-USB web page at www.dewamerica.com to download the latest drivers.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-463

DEWE-CAM-USB Specifications

DEWE-CAM-USB

Image sensor

Active pixels

Viewer display

Sensitivity

Signal To Noise Ratio

Gamma

Gain control

Scan mode

Synchronization

Back Light Compensation

White Balance Mode

Contour enhancement

Iris control

Shutter speed

Video output

Power supply

Power consumption

Environmental

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

Operating humidity

Storage humidity

Lifetime

Mechanical

Dimensions

Weight

Cable

Specs

1/4” IL CCD

768 x 494 (NTSC) / 752 x 582 (PAL)

(USB 2.0, 30fps) / 720 x 480 pixels max (NTSC / 720 x 576 pixels max (PAL)

< 0.5 Lux

> 48 dB (AGC off)

0.45 default (1.0 via Software)

Automatic 36 dB (AGC default) or Fixed options via software

Interlaced / Non Interlaced (selectable via Software)

Internal

On by default

AWB auto white mode, Fixed modes selectable via software

On by default

CCD Iris default

Automatic

USB 2.0

5 VDC via USB bus

< 1.3 W

-15°C to + 55°C (5°F to + 131°F)

-25°C to + 70°C (-13°F to + 158°F)

20% up to 93% RH

Up to 98% RH

MTBF > 150000

50mm x 50mm x 49.6mm (without lens mount) (1.97” x 1.97” x 1.95”)

154g (0.34 lb)

Integrated 8.2 ft. USB cable

19-464 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Using the DEWE-CAM-USB within DS-7 software

As mentioned earlier, the drivers must be installed within the Windows operating system.

Step 1

Connect the camera to your DEWE system.

Step 2

Start the DS-7 software.

First Time Setup Steps

You need to turn on DirectX VIDEO support within DS-7. To do this, select SETTINGS then HARDWARE

SETUP. This will open the hardware settings dialog box. Click on the VIDEO tab and then place a checkmark on the DirectX box. If the WIndows driver has been properly installed, the camera will show up in the list.

The name in the screen capture shown above is figurative - yours will be different. Make sure that your camera is enabled.

Adjusting for Camera Delay

Since USB camera video frames have to be processed by the CPU, there is always a small latency or delay, between when the camera “sees” the image and when the frame is processed. This latency can be offset automatically at the time of recording. But in order to know how many milliseconds the delay is, we need to measure it first. Here are the steps:

First, connect a sensor by which you can create a sharp spike which can be seen within the camera image. A perfect example would be tapping on an accelerometer, or microphone. In the same way that film crews use a “slate” clapper in order to later align the video with the audio: the precise moment that the clapper comes together creates an audio spike which makes it easy to align the two media. Do a short recording using your video camera and sensor. Click ANALYSIS to replay the data. Use the cursors on the recorder graph to measure the number of ms that the video lags behind the data.

Now go back to the Hardware Settings screen, video tab, and enter that number into the DELAY field. In future recordings, the video will be aligned better with the data.

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-465

Recording with your DEWE-CAM-USB

In the previous steps we turned on the camera in general within the software. This is analogous to turning on your A/D card at the hardware setup level. But in order to record video from the camera we need to configure it on the Channel Setup screen (just like we do analog and digital channels).

On the Channel Setup screen, click the VIDEO icon.

Note - if you don’t see a VIDEO icon here, then either DirectX video is not enabled or your camera is not enabled on the HARDWARE sETTINGs screen, or the camera was not plugged in when the software was launched. Check those settings and then come back to this point when you have gotten a VIDEO icon here.

In the CAMERA OPTIONS area you will see your camera. Enable the USED button. This will activate the camera and allow it to be viewed and recorded. You can click the SETUP button to configure the detailed settings of the camera. Now go to the MEASURE screens and add your camera to any screen of your choosing. When you STORE data, video will be recorded automatically.

19-466 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-CAM-FW-70

This camera has a HARD SYNC to the ORION

A/D card within your DEWETRON system, allowing the video frames to be precisely time synchronized with the analog and digital data

(and CAN data, if this option is installed).

The data and control interface is Firewire. It is required that a PCI or PCIe Firewire (IEEE-

1394) interface be added to your DEWETRON system, otherwise the specified maximum frame rates cannot be guaranteed. (The

Firewire interfaces built into the mainboards on certain DEWETRON models are not as fast as a separate PCI / PCIe card.)

In addition, the SYNC cable must be connected to the Digital I/O (Accessory) connector on your

DEWETRON system, and properly configured to be controlled by the ORION card within your system.

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Main Features

VGA 640 x 480 progressive CCD

Up to 70 fps @ full resolution

Super compact size

Ready for C-Mount lenses

Wide-range manual / auto gain

Manual / auto exposure (shutter)

Gamma on / off

Real time shading correction

External trigger input for synchronization including frame index

Lockable IEEE1394 connector

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-467

Specifications

DEWE-CAM-FW-70 Specifications

Image device

Picture size

Cell size

Resolution depth

Lens mount

Digital interface

Transfer rates

Frame rates type 1/2” (diag. 8 mm) progressive scan, SONY

640 x 480 px

9.9 μm x 9.9 μm

12 bit (ADC)

C-Mount

IEEE 1394 IIDC v. 1.3

Gain control

Shutter speed

External trigger

Shutter trigger

100 Mbit/s, 200 Mbit/s and 400 Mbit/s

Up to 74 Hz in full resolution, higher rates with AOI

Manual: 0 to 24 dB (0.035 dB/step); Auto gain (selectable

AOI)

20 to 67.108.864 μs (67 s); auto shutter (selectable AOI)

Yes

Yes

Smart features

Real time shading correction; built-in FIFO memory up to 17 frames

Power requirements 8 to 36 VDC via IEEE 1394 cable or 12-pin HIROSE

Power consumption

Dimensions (L x W x H)

Less than 3 W (@ 12 VDC)

72 x 44 x 29 mm (2.8 x 1.7x 1.1 in.) w/o tripod and lense

Weight

Temperature

Regulations

<120 g (without lens)

Operating: +5 to +45 °C; Storage: -10 to +60 °C

EN 55022, EN 61000, EN 55024, FCC Class B; DIN ISO

9022

Package information

Each DEWE-CAM-FW-70 package consists of

1 x DEWE-CAM-FW-70 camera

1 x IEEE 1394 cable (4.5 m)

1 x Trigger calbe (4.5 m)

1 x Mounting plate (for tripod or suction cup mounting)

1 x Suction cup

1 x Protection bag

Options

C-MOUNT lens 6 mm, F 1.2, Iris 1.2 to 16, screw fixing for focus and iris, 42 x 46 mm / 125 g

19-468 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-120

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-469

19-470 | OWNER’s GUIDE

GPS Sensors

DEWE-VGPS-200C

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWETRON sENsORs | 19-471

19-472 | OWNER’s GUIDE

DEWE-VGPS-HS High Speed GPS Sensor

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-473

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

20

Using the iPad as a Wireless Display

There are a few important things that you need to do in order to use remote desktop applications, such as the iTap RDP on the new iPad, to control your Dewetron system. In a nutshell, you must have these things set properly:

Create a passworded USER account on the DEWE computer

Allow Remote Desktop in Windows

Connect your USER account(s) to remote desktop

Set the DEWE Computer’s WIFI adapter to a fixed IP address

Allow Remote Desktop through the DEWE Computer firewall

Create a private WIFI network with your Wirless Router

Connect the computer to your private WIFI network

Connect the new iPad to your private WIFI network

The new iPad should be running iTap RDP app, and pointed to the fixed IP of the Dewetron, and to the passworded login that you created on the computer.

„

„

„

„

System Requirements

A Dewetron computer system with a wireless adapter installed and working

A wireless router compatible with your Dewetron adapter and the new iPad WIFI

The new iPad from Apple Computer

The RDP app from the company called iTap (downloadable on the app store; moderately priced)

Now, please follow these steps...

20-474 | OWNER’s GUIDE

1. Create a Passworded USER account

To be able to connect to your Computer using Remote Desktop you have to have a password set for your

User account. If you do not have a password set you have to create one. This also applies for any user who should be able to connect to your computer via Remote Desktop.

Open Control Panel

„

„

Click on the Windows start button.

Select “Control Panel”.

Open User Accounts

„ Click on the User Accounts and Family Safety.

Select Change password

„ Click on the Change your Windows password.

Create a password for your account.

„ Select Create a password for your account.

„

„

„

Enter your password and confirm.

Type in your password.

Type a password hint to recall if you forgot it.

Click on Create password.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-475

20-476 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

2. Allow Remote Desktop in Windows

Navigate to system settings

Click on the Windows start button.

Click with the right mouse button on the “Computer” button.

Select “Properties”.

Select Remote settings

„ On the left pane click on Remote settings.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-477

Allow Remote Desktop connections

„

„

„

From the top five tabs select the Remote tab.

In the lower “Remote Desktop” section select the middle one. (“Allow connections from computers running any version of Remote Desktop [..]”).

Click on Select Users.

20-478 | OWNER’s GUIDE

3. Connect your USER account to RDP

Continuing from the previous step, please select Users

„

„

Add any User you want to be able to access your Computer.

Click OK to finalize this step.

Note - the UsER ACCOUNT that you created in sTEP 1 must be showing in the screen above! Make sure that this user account is listed or granted access to remote desktop.

4. Set the DEWE Computer’s WIFI adapter to a fixed IP Address

We set the computer’s WIFI interface to a fixed, non-routable IP address of:

192.168.1.100

subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

This is done here:

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-479

Then click on CHANGE ADAPTER SETTINGS in the left toolbar:

Then RIGHT CLICK on the wireless network connection that you want to use to connect to the private WIFI network we will create in the next step, then select PROPERTIES from the context menu that will appear:

20-480 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

Uncheck Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)

Make sure that Internet Protocol Version 4 is checked, and selected, as shown above.

Click PROPERTIES to configure your fixed IP address:

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-481

Click the radio button called “Use the following IP address:”

Then enter the fixed IP and subnet mask as shown above.

Note - if you are configuring MULTIPLE Dewetron instruments, please change the last IP number set of each one to something unique. For example, if you want to control four different Dewetrons from one iPad, you would set these Dewetron IPs to something like this:

Dewetron instrument #1: 192.168.1.101

Dewetron instrument #2: 192.168.1.102

Dewetron instrument #3: 192.168.1.103

Dewetron instrument #4: 192.168.1.104

…

Dewetron instrument #10: 192.168.1.110

Now click OK on any open dialogs to set these changes and put them into effect. If your Dewetron computer asks to you restart, please do so. Shut down the instrument (computer), and then restart it in the normal way.

20-482 | OWNER’s GUIDE

5. Allowing Remote Desktop through the DEWE Computer’s Firewall

In certain circumstances you might need to manually create the exception in the firewall to allow Remote

Desktop to be used.

Please be aware that a 3rd party firewall (e.g., Symantec, Kaspersky) might also affect Remote Desktop.

Check those settings to be sure that Remote Desktop is allowed!

Open Control Panel

„

„

Click on the Windows start button.

Select “Control Panel”.

Go to System and Security

„ Click on System and Security.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-483

Open Firewall settings

„ Click on “Allow a program through Windows Firewall”.

„

„

„

„

Allow Remote Desktop exception

Click on the Change settings button.

Scroll down to “Remote Desktop”.

Check Remote Desktop, Home/Work and Public.

Click OK.

20-484 | OWNER’s GUIDE

6. Create a Private WIFI network with your Wireless Router

Most of our customers purchase a simple wireless router and simply connect it to power. They do NOT connect it to the internet or to their company network.

Run the configuration program that comes with the wireless router (most of them have a web browser based interface) and set up the name (SSID) of the wireless LAN, and set the security method that you prefer to use (WEP, WPA...) and the password.

„

„

„

„

„

These settings are completely up to you, according to your company’s requirements.

In our example, we will set the SSID to DEWE-INSTRUMENTS and set up WEP security and a password. We set the base IP address of the wireless router to 192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of

255.255.255.0.

By not connecting the router to the company network or the internet, only a local computer with WIFI can access it. This is what we want in our example: to create a local private network.

Notice that the IP address is routable from our DEWE computer, which was set to 192.168.1.100 (the last three digits might be different according to your configuration).

Just be sure NOT to use the same last three digits on your router that you have used on the DEWE computers! It must be unique.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-485

7. Connect the DEWE computer to your private network

Make sure that the DEWE computer is within range of your WIFI network and that the wireless router is turned on and working.

„

„

In the tray, find your WIRELESS CONNECTION icon and click it to pop up the list of available networks.

Select the DEWE-INSTRUMENTS network and CONNECT to it.

Click CONNECT to join this network

20-486 | OWNER’s GUIDE

„

„

„

„

8. Connect the new iPad to your private network

Make sure that the DEWE computer is within range of your WIFI network and that the wireless router is turned on and working.

Click the SETUP icon on the iPad and then make sure that WIFI is turned on.

When the network that you created appears in the list, CLICK IT to select it.

If you have set up a password, you will need to enter it on the iPad.

Follow the normal iPad procedures to put your iPad onto this network.

You can check the settings by clicking the blue forward arrow on this connection. It should look something like this:

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-487

Notice how the IP address is set to 100, and the Router has the “1” as the last three digits.

Everything looks correct.

Now we can run the iTap RDP application and configure it to remotely control any DEWE instrument that is on this network.

20-488 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Open the iTap app and then create a configuration that points to your DEWE computer instrument. Here is what the screen looks like:

Use the (>) control within the list of bookmarks to edit the settings. Input the user name and password as well as the IP address of the DEWE instrument that you want to remotely control.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-489

Then touch once on the name from the bookmarks, then click CONNECT in the middle of the screen to start.

If you have a local screen plugged into the DEWE computer, it will go back to the login screen as long as the iPad RDP is logged in and operating the computer. At this moment, the iPad will serve as the screen and virtual keyboard of the system.

The iTap app has numerous controls and gestures for operating the computer, opening the on-screen keyboard, pinching and zooming, and more. Please see the iTap documentation for a complete list. There is an index presented at the end of this document with the main gestures, as a convenience to you.

Note - if you possess a bluetooth keyboard for your iPad, you can use it as a real keyboard with your DEWE computer, as long as the iTap RDP application is serving as the display of this system. Sometimes a real keyboard is more convenient than the on-screen version. You have the option of using it or not - it makes no difference to the iTap application that we have seen.

Note also that you can create multiple bookmarks for various DEWE computer instruments, and log into any of them from a single iPad.

You can also store your login credentials within the app, and link them to each DEWE computer, so that you don’t need to enter the password each time.

Important note - you need to configure the DEWE computer so that the WIFI adapter is ON and set to automatically connect to the DEWE-INsTRUMENTs wireless router. If you don’t do that, then you will need to connect a monitor to the DEWE computer and make those settings manually before you will be able to connect wirelessly.

These are standard Windows settings that are easily made within the configuration of your wireless adapter.

20-490 | OWNER’s GUIDE

9. Gestures

iTap mobile RDP uses gestures to control all input actions except keyboard input. This frees up your screen, because it doesn’t need to display any buttons.

This is a quick reference - please see the HELP built into the iTap app itself for more details, or visit the company on the internet from your computer.

Note: 3 finger gestures will not work if you have Apple’s “Zoom” accessibility feature enabled! In that case you might use the corresponding buttons within the iTap Utility Bar instead. Make sure that the “Utility Bar” is set to

“Initally On” in your bookmark’s advanced settings.

You can use the following gestures:

Basic Gestures

Tap three fingers to show or hide the utility bar.

Swipe three fingers from left to right to disconnect and return to the main menu.

Swipe three fingers from top to bottom to show/hide the keyboard.

Scope Mode and Pointer Mode Gestures

A single tap will produce a mouse click on the location where you tapped.

Zoom in if you need very precise control over the click location.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-491

A simple drag will pan the display. This is a clientside operation, no mouse movement is generated on the server.

Perform a pinch gesture with two fingers to zoom in or out. Like panning this does not produce any mouse input on the server.

Drag two fingers up or down the display to emulate a mousewheel.

Tap with two fingers to produce a right click.

Tapping with one finger two times in quick succession will produce a doubleclick. Tap three times for a tripple click, and so on.

The same can be done with two fingers to do a right mouse button doubleclick.

Tap with a single finger and then quickly touch the screen again but do not release the finger to initiate a mouse drag. the mouse will be released once you remove the finger from the display.

The same can be done with two fingers for a right mouse button drag.

20-492 | OWNER’s GUIDE

Scope Mode Gestures

Touch the screen and hold the finger for a short while to begin scope mode.

Scope mode is in effect as long as the scope is visible.

Move the finger to move the scope. As you approach the screen borders the screen will scroll in that direction. The closer you are to the border, the faster is scrolls.

Touch the screen with a single additional finger to press the left mouse button, release the additional finger to release the left mouse button. Repeat for double- or multi-clicks.

Touch the screen with two additional finger simultaneously to press the right mouse button, release the additional fingers to release the left mouse button.

Repeat for double- or multi-clicks.

You can move the original finger to perform mouse drags while holding down an additional finger to drag the left mouse button. The additional finger does not have to move.

You can move the original finger to perform mouse drags while holding down two additional fingers to drag the right mouse button. The additional fingers do not have to move.

Draw Mode Gestures

A single tap will produce a mouse click on the location where you tapped.

Zoom in if you need very precise control over the click location.

OWNER’s GUIDE - IPAD WIRELEss DIsPLAy | 20-493

Drag a single finger to drag the left mouse button (paint).

A drag with two fingers will pan the display. This is a clientside operation, no mouse movement is generated on the server.

Perform a pinch gesture with two fingers to zoom in or out. Like panning this does not produce any mouse input on the server.

20-494 | OWNER’s GUIDE

OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIX | A-495

Appendix

Index

Symbols

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-4 6-110 ,

7-134

0.5U-AMFLEX-POWER-8 6-111 ,

7-135

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-4

6-111 , 7-135

0.5U-CLAMP-DC-POWER-8

6-111 , 7-135

0.5U-DA2-BNC 6-110 , 7-134

0.5U-DA4-BNC 6-110 , 7-134

0.5U-DA8-BNC 6-110 , 7-134

1.5U-ORION-DIO-PANEL-1

6-111 , 7-135

1.5U-TC-PANEL-32 6-111 , 7-135

1U-DA8-BNC 6-111 , 7-135

1U-DA16-BNC 6-111 , 7-135

2D array 9-172

2-point scaling method 9-183

3D array 9-172

22-bit A/D converter 5-102 , 9-193 ,

274 , 13-297 , 13-344 , 13-345 ,

14-353 , 14-362 , 14-366 , 14-

368 , 15-370 , 16-392 , 16-399 ,

16-403 , 17-407 , 17-408 , 17-

412 , 17-413 , 17-414 , 17-415

310-UPS 3-19 , 3-21 , 3-24 , 3-25 ,

3-45 , 3-47 , 10-243 , 10-247

1553 5-101 , 9-174 , 18-417 , 18-437 ,

18-438 , 18-439 , 18-440

A

Accessory connector 3-38 , 4-70 ,

5-94 , 6-120 , 7-144

Accuracy 8-162

AC power cord 3-45 , 5-95

Acquisition Mode 5-103 , 9-173

Acquisition Screens 9-194

Activate the Channels 9-178

ADAP-BAN-BNC 11-264

ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT 11-

263

ADAP-BR-1/4-120, using it 11-

265 , 11-271

ADAP-BR-1/4-350 11-265

ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO 11-263

ADAP-DAQ-BNC 11-264

ADAP-MDAQ-BNC 11-264

ADAP-MIC-BNC-CBL 11-265

ADC 8-150 address, Dewetron Inc. ii , 3-37 , 5-93 ,

276 , 278 , 13-299 , 13-301 ,

14-357 , 14-359 , 14-360 addressing module 278 , 13-301

Adlink 18-433

AD series 5-99 , 5-100 , 13-351 ,

17-409 amplifier column 277 , 279 , 13-300 ,

13-302 , 14-358 , 14-360

ANALOG INPUT connector 3-37 ,

5-93

Analog input connectors 3-36 , 4-68 ,

5-91 , 6-119 , 7-143

Analog output 13-296

Analog Output module 14-367

ANALOG setup screen 9-176 ,

9-193

Analysis Mode 9-173 , 9-175 , 9-201 ,

9-207 anti-aliasing 17-408 , 17-412 , 17-

413 , 17-414 , 17-415 antivirus/security software 2-15

Arbitration ID 18-446

ARINC 3-23 , 3-48 , 4-55 , 4-75 ,

5-81 , 5-101 , 6-107 , 6-113 ,

6-127 , 7-137 , 7-147 , 9-171 ,

9-174 , 18-417 , 18-437 , 18-

438 , 18-439 , 18-441

ARINC 429 9-174

ARINC 429 receive setup 18-438

ARINC 429 transmit setup 18-438

Audio 3-29 , 3-35 , 4-61 , 4-67 , 5-84 ,

5-89 , 5-102 , 6-118 , 7-142 ,

11-265

Automatic File Numbering 9-190

Automatic file SWITCHING function 9-192

Automatic Recording STOP function 9-190

B

Background image 9-172

Ballard 18-437

BAT-CHARGER-1 5-96 , 6-123 ,

10-247 , 10-251 , 10-252 , 10-

A-496 | Appendix

253 , 10-254

BATT-95WH 3-45 , 5-96 , 10-247

Battery appears damaged 3-45 , 5-95 ,

6-122 battery door 5-95 , 6-122

Battery handling 3-45 , 5-95 , 6-122

BATTERY STATUS LCD 5-95 ,

6-122

BIOS 2-14 , 3-46 , 5-97 , 6-124 break-out box 14-364

BUS interfaces 3-37 , 4-69 , 5-92 ,

6-119 , 7-143 , 9-174 , 9-194

C calibration 1-12 , 5-101

Calibration 1-12

CANALYZER 18-444

CAN bus interfaces 5-100

CAN channels, displaying 18-448

CAN data, performing MATH

18-449

CAN data, storing 18-449

CAN message rates 18-446

CAN output 5-100 , 9-174

Carrying bag 5-101

CAT5e 3-32 , 4-64 , 5-87 , 6-116 ,

7-140

CAT6 3-32 , 4-64 , 5-87 , 6-116 ,

7-140 , 17-408

CD 5-98 certificate of compliance 1-12 channel name, units, color 9-181 ,

9-185

Channel Setup 9-179 channel setup dialog 9-178 coefficients 5-103

CONN-DSUB-9 11-264

Connectors 3-30 , 3-32 , 3-35 , 3-36 ,

3-37 , 4-61 , 4-62 , 4-64 , 4-67 ,

4-68 , 4-69 , 5-85 , 5-87 , 5-89 ,

5-91 , 5-92 , 6-116 , 6-118 ,

6-119 , 7-140 , 7-142 , 7-143

Copying Channel Settings 9-187

Copy/Paste menu 9-187

Core2Duo® 5-102 , 5-103

Counter 3-36 , 4-69 , 5-91 , 5-100 ,

5-103 , 6-119 , 6-126 , 7-143 ,

7-146 , 8-151 , 8-154 , 8-155 ,

8-156 , 8-157 , 8-162

Counter/Encoder 6-126 , 7-146

Counter Filters 8-164

CPAD2 5-99 , 16-391

CPAD2 modules, adding new modules 16-393

CPAD2-RTD8 16-393 , 16-396

CPAD2-TH8 16-393 , 16-396

CPAD2-TH8-x 16-393 , 16-396

CPAD2-V8 16-393 , 16-396

CPU 5-102 , 5-103

Current sensors, using 11-269

Cursor 9-173 cursors 9-173 , 9-201 , 9-203 , 9-204

D

D3PC-8 4-51 , 4-53 , 4-56 , 4-57 ,

4-58 , 4-59 , 4-71 , 4-74

D310 i , 1-12 , 3-17 , 3-18 , 3-19 , 3-20 ,

3-21 , 3-22 , 3-23 , 3-24 , 3-25 ,

3-26 , 3-27 , 3-28 , 3-33 , 3-37 ,

3-38 , 3-40 , 3-41 , 3-42 , 3-43 ,

3-44 , 3-45 , 3-46 , 3-47 , 3-48 ,

4-55 , 4-60 , 4-65 , 4-75 , 10-

243 , 10-247 , 10-251

DAQ Module Connectors 13-293

DAQ modules, Addressing 276 ,

13-299

DAQN-V-OUT 13-296

DAQP-ACC-A 13-295

DAQP-BRIDGE-A 13-295 , 13-

323

DAQP-BRIDGE-B 13-331 , 13-

335 , 13-337 , 13-339 , 13-341 ,

13-343 , 13-349 , 13-351 ,

14-361 , 14-363 , 14-364 , 14-

365 , 14-367 , 15-372 , 15-377 ,

15-381 , 15-385 , 15-387 , 15-

389 , 15-390 , 16-396 , 16-398 ,

16-400 , 16-402 , 16-404

DAQP-CFB 13-295

DAQP-CHARGE-A 13-295

DAQP-CHARGE-B 13-295

DAQP-DMM 13-294 , 13-305

DAQP-FREQ-A 13-296

DAQP-HV 13-294 , 13-303

DAQP-HV-S3 13-294 , 13-303

DAQP-LA-B 13-294 , 13-313

DAQP-LA-SC 13-294 , 13-313

DAQP-LV 9-180 , 13-294 , 13-307

DAQP-MULTI 13-296

DAQP-STG 13-295 , 13-315

DAQP-THERM 13-296

DAQP-V 13-294 , 13-311

DAQ-SHUNT-1 11-264 , 282 , 285 ,

13-307 , 13-310

DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter, using it

11-266

DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC 11-264

DAQ-SHUNT-3 11-264 , 282 , 285 ,

13-307 , 13-310

DAQ-SHUNT-4 11-264 , 282 , 285 ,

13-307 , 13-310

DAQ-SHUNT-5 11-264 , 282 , 285 ,

13-307 , 13-310

Data export 9-173

Data file format 9-172

Data replay 9-173

Data throughput 3-47 , 4-74 , 6-126 ,

7-146

DBC file 18-444 , 18-447

DBC files, saving 18-447

DC power cord 3-45 , 5-95

DC power input 3-45 , 4-60 , 5-83 ,

5-95 , 6-114 , 7-138

Default Display Range 9-185

Delay 18-445

Design mode 9-207

DEWE-30-8 expansion rack 275 ,

13-298

DEWE-30-16 rack 275 , 13-298

DEWE-3040-RM i , 1-12 , 7-129 ,

7-131 , 7-132 , 7-133 , 7-136 ,

7-137 , 7-140 , 7-145 , 7-146 ,

10-243

DEWE-3050 i , 1-12 , 3-48 , 4-75 ,

6-105 , 6-107 , 6-108 , 6-109 ,

6-110 , 6-112 , 6-113 , 6-117 ,

6-119 , 6-122 , 6-123 , 6-124 ,

6-125 , 6-126 , 6-127 , 7-134 ,

7-141 , 7-143 , 7-147 , 10-243 ,

10-247 , 10-251

DEWE-3210 3-36 , 3-37 , 4-68 ,

5-77 , 5-91 , 5-93 , 5-101 ,

6-105 , 6-119 , 7-129 , 7-143 ,

14-354 , 16-392

DEWE-3211 1-12 , 3-22 , 3-36 ,

4-51 , 4-68 , 5-77 , 5-80 , 5-91 ,

5-101 , 6-105 , 7-129 , 14-354 ,

16-392

DEWE-CAM-FW 3-23 , 3-31 ,

3-47 , 4-55 , 4-63 , 4-74 , 5-81 ,

6-107 , 6-113 , 6-126 , 7-131 ,

7-137 , 7-146 , 19-456

DEWE-CAM-GIG-E 3-23 , 4-55 ,

5-81 , 6-107 , 6-113 , 7-131 ,

7-137 , 9-174 , 19-458

DEWE-CAM-USB 3-23 , 4-55 ,

5-81 , 6-107 , 6-113 , 7-131 ,

7-137 , 19-452 , 19-453 , 19-

454 , 19-455

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO 10-

255 , 11-271

DEWESoft 7 5-103 , 9-167 , 9-211 ,

9-236

DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

18-437

Dewetron ii , 1-11 , 1-12 , 2-13 , 2-15 ,

3-31 , 3-34 , 3-45 , 4-63 , 4-66 ,

5-86 , 5-89 , 5-96 , 5-101 ,

6-118 , 6-123 , 7-142 , 8-149 ,

9-174 , 9-175 , 9-182 , 9-194 ,

9-199 , 10-243 , 10-247 ,

11-265 , 273 , 276 , 279 , 285 ,

13-293 , 13-299 , 13-302 , 13-

308 , 13-310 , 13-336 , 13-338 ,

13-340 , 13-344 , 14-354 ,

14-356 , 14-357 , 14-360 , 15-

369 , 15-370 , 16-391 , 16-392 ,

16-393 , 16-397 , 16-399 , 16-

401 , 16-403 , 16-405 , 17-407 ,

A-493

DEWE-VGPS-200C 9-174 digital filter 8-164

Digital inputs 9-174

Digital I/O connector 3-38 , 5-94 ,

6-120 , 7-144

DirectShow 9-174 , 18-433 , 18-434

DIRECTX 18-434

Display Range 9-185

Display Range, Setting the Default

9-185

Display Scale 9-184

DLC 18-445

DPS-2410 3-45 , 3-46 , 5-83 , 5-95 ,

5-96 , 5-97 , 5-101 , 5-102 ,

6-122 , 6-123 , 6-124 , 7-145 ,

10-243

DS-7 3-47 , 4-74 , 4-75 , 6-126 ,

7-146 , 9-167 , 9-171 , 9-172 ,

9-175 , 11-261 , 11-263 , 11-

265 , 276 , 13-299 , 14-356 , 16-

394 , 16-395 , 17-411 , 19-454

DSUB 37-pin connector, 3-39 , 4-70 ,

5-94 , 6-121 , 7-144

DVD 5-98 , 5-101

DVD / CD drive 5-98

Dynamic acquisition rate 9-193

E

Encoder 8-150 , 8-151 , 8-158 , 8-159 ,

8-160 , 8-161 encoders 8-158 , 9-174 , 9-194

End-of-Life Handling 2-15

EPAD2 5-99 , 5-101 , 16-391

EPAD2 modules, installing new ones

16-394

EPAD2-RTD8 16-393 , 16-396

EPAD2-TH8 16-393 , 16-396

EPAD2-TH8-x 16-393 , 16-396

EPAD2-V8 16-393 , 16-396

Ethernet 3-29 , 3-32 , 4-61 , 4-64 ,

5-84 , 5-86 , 5-87 , 6-116 ,

7-138 , 7-140

Event Counting 8-151 , 8-153

EVENTS 9-199

Export file formats 9-173

Export Your Data 9-207

F

FFT 9-172 , 9-173 , 9-194 , 9-196

FFT graph, 9-172 file conversion 9-207

File export button 9-207

File Name 9-190

File Numbering, automatic 9-190

FILL ONE MODULE PROCE-

DURE 276 , 13-299 , 14-357

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module

Procedure 277 , 13-300 ,

14-358

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

276 , 13-299 , 14-357

FILL RACK PROCEDURE 276 ,

13-299 , 14-357 firewire 3-29 , 3-31 , 4-61 , 4-63 , 5-84 ,

5-86

Flexpro 9-173 , 9-207

Fluke 1-12

Frequency Measurement 8-151 ,

8-162

Frequency to voltage 13-296 function scaling method 9-183

Fuse 4-60 , 5-83 , 6-114 , 7-138

G

Gated Event Counting 8-151 , 8-153

GPS 9-172 , 9-174

GPS-CLOCK 17-408

GPS track 9-172 graph 9-172 , 9-173 , 9-180 , 9-183 ,

9-184 , 9-185 , 9-186 , 9-187 ,

9-197 , 9-198 , 9-199 , 9-202 ,

9-203 , 9-204

Ground (earth) Connector 4-60 ,

5-83 , 6-114 , 7-138

H hard drive 3-46 , 4-73 , 5-97 , 6-124 ,

7-145 , 9-176

Hazardous Substances 2-15

HDD 4-72 , 5-97 , 5-98 , 5-103 ,

6-124 hot-swappable batteries 3-45 , 5-95 ,

6-122

A-498 | Appendix i

HSI 5-99

HSI-HV Isolated High Voltage module 280

HSI-HV Specifications 280

HSI-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module 282

HSI-LV Shunt Options 285

HSI-LV Specifications 282

HSI Series Signal Conditioners 273

HSI-STG Isolated Universal Input

Module 286

HSI-STG Pin-outs 287

HSI-STG specifications 286 humidity 2-13 , 5-102 i7 6-126 , 7-146

IEEE-1394 3-29 , 3-31 , 4-61 , 4-63 ,

5-84 , 5-86 , 5-102

IEPE 9-174 , 282 , 286 , 13-294 , 13-

295 , 13-307 , 13-315 , 13-335 ,

13-337 , 13-339

Inductive 13-295

Inertial sensors 9-174

Input scaling 5-103

Installing the Smart Batteries 3-44 ,

4-72 , 5-95 , 6-122

Intel 3-47 , 4-74 , 6-126 , 7-146 iPad 20-476

IRIG-CLOCK 17-408 , 18-419

Isolation 5-100

J

J1939 5-100 , 9-174 , 18-446

K

Keyboard 5-102

L

LabVIEW 3-47 , 4-74 , 6-126 , 7-146 ,

9-167 , 9-168 , 9-169 , 9-170

LCD 5-95 , 5-97 , 5-102 , 6-122 ,

6-124 , 10-247

LCD screen, battery indicator 5-95 ,

6-122

LEMO 3-28 , 3-36 , 4-60 , 4-69 , 5-83 ,

5-91 , 6-119 , 7-143

LVDT 13-295

M

Math channel 9-173

Matlab ii , 9-172 , 9-173

Max value 9-181 , 9-185

MDAQ 5-99 , 9-180

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1 15-390

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU 15-390

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1 15-390

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2 15-390

MDAQ-BASE-5 5-99 , 15-370

MDAQ-FILT-5-BE 15-389 , 16-

396 , 16-398 , 16-400 , 16-402 ,

16-404

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU 15-389

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1 15-389

MDAQ-SUB-ACC 15-385 , 15-

387 , 15-389 , 15-390 , 16-396 ,

16-398 , 16-400 , 16-402 ,

16-404

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 15-377

MDAQ-SUB-STG 15-372 , 15-377

MDAQ-SUB-V200 15-381

Met/CAL® 1-12 , 5-101

MIL-STD-1553 5-101 , 9-174 , 18-

417 , 18-437 , 18-438 , 18-439 ,

18-440

MIL-STD-1553 receive setup 18-

439

MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup

18-440

Min value 9-181 , 9-185

MOB-DISP-17 3-43 , 4-58 , 10-256 ,

10-257 , 10-259 , 10-260 ,

19-452

Module Installation Trouble-shooting 278 , 13-301 , 14-359 modules are showing up in RED letters 278 , 13-301 , 14-359

MSI-V-ACC 11-262 , 283 , 286 , 13-

294 , 13-307 , 13-308 , 13-315

MSI-V-CH-50 11-262 , 283 , 286 ,

13-294 , 13-307 , 13-308 ,

13-315

MSI-V-RTD 11-262 , 283 , 286 , 13-

294 , 13-307 , 13-308 , 13-315

Multifile 9-190 , 9-191

N

National Instruments 18-443 nCode ii network stacks 2-15

Neutrino-4 5-96 , 10-247 , 10-255

NIST ii

NIST traceable 1-12 , 5-101

Notice event 9-199

NTSC/PAL video inputs 18-433

O

OBDII 5-100

OBD II support 18-446

On-board RS-485 interface 17-410 operating system 3-46 , 4-73 , 5-97 ,

5-98 , 6-124 optical drive 5-98

Optical read/write drive 5-98

ORION 3-39 , 4-70 , 5-94 , 5-99 ,

5-100 , 6-121 , 7-144 , 8-165 ,

17-407

ORION-0424-200 17-412

ORION-0816-1000 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0816-1001 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0816-1002 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0816-1003 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0816-1004 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0816-1005 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-200 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-201 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-202 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-203 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-204 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-0824-205 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-100 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-101 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-102 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-103 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-104 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1616-105 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-100 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-101 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-102 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-103 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-104 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-1622-105 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-3216-100 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-3216-101 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-3222-100 17-407 , 17-413

ORION-3222-101 17-407 , 17-413

ORION cards, Combining various

17-409

ORION cards installation 17-411

ORION cards, synchronizing them

17-409

ORION card Windows driver 17-

411

ORION-DAQ-SYNC 17-410

ORION-DSA-SYNC 17-410

ORION series 17-407

ORION-SYNC 17-408

Outline Drawings 3-18 , 4-52 , 5-78 ,

6-106 , 7-130

Overview 1-12 , 9-172 , 9-194 , 9-195

P

PAD-AO1 14-355 , 14-367

PAD-CB8-B 14-361 , 16-399 ,

16-403

PAD-CB8-BNC 14-361

PAD-CB8-RTD 14-355 , 14-363 ,

14-364

PAD-DO7 14-355 , 14-365

PAD module, old type without buttons 278 , 13-301 , 14-359 ,

14-360

PAD modules, adding new ones

14-356

PAD Modules Table 14-355

PAD-TH8-P 14-355 , 14-363

PAD-V8-P 14-355 , 14-361

Paste special 9-188

Paste special… 9-188

Paste to all 9-188

PCM data 9-174

Period Time Measurement 8-151 ,

8-155 polynomial 5-103

Pot/Ohmic sensors 13-295

Power 5-102 , 9-172 , 10-243 power cord 2-13 , 3-45 , 5-95

Project 9-211 , 9-212 , 9-215 , 9-216 ,

9-217 , 9-218 , 9-220 , 9-233 ,

9-234

PROPERTIES BAR 9-196

PS/2 3-29 , 3-30 , 3-31 , 4-61 , 4-62 ,

4-63 , 5-84 , 5-85 , 5-86

Pulse Width Measurement 8-151 ,

8-156

Q

Quadrature Encoder 8-151 , 8-158 ,

8-159 , 8-160

Quick start guide 1-12 , 9-167

R

RAM 5-102 , 5-103 , 9-198

Recorder 9-172 , 9-173 , 9-194 ,

9-196 , 9-197 recorder graph 9-173 , 9-198 , 9-199 ,

9-202 , 9-203 , 9-204

Recording modes 5-103

Recording setup 5-103

Recycling 2-15

Reference Check 9-183

Relay Output module 14-365

Reloading your Data Files 9-199 remote power-on 17-410 removable 3-46 , 3-47 , 4-73 , 4-74 ,

5-97 , 5-98 , 5-102 , 6-105 ,

6-107 , 6-108 , 6-124 , 6-126 ,

7-145 , 7-146 removable hard disk drive 3-46 ,

4-73 , 5-97 , 6-124 , 7-145

Replay speed 9-173

Resistance 282 , 286 , 13-295 , 13-296 ,

13-307 , 13-315

RIBBON 9-196

RS-232/485 interface 14-354

RS232C 3-29 , 3-30 , 4-61 , 4-62 ,

5-84 , 5-85 , 5-102 , 6-116 ,

7-138

S safety 2-13 , 2-14

Safety precautions 1-12 , 2-13

Sample rate 9-181

Sample Rate 9-193

Sample rate divider 9-181

Sample Rate, setting it 9-193

Save Your Setup 9-194

SBS 10-254

Scale/CAL 9-182

Scope 9-172 , 9-173 , 9-194 , 9-196

Screen design 9-172 sensors 1-12 , 2-13 , 3-34 , 3-37 , 4-66 ,

4-69 , 5-89 , 5-92 , 5-103 ,

6-118 , 6-119 , 7-142 , 7-143 ,

9-174

Setup files 9-172

Setup file, saving 9-194

Set Up Your Channels 9-178

Shock and vibration 5-102

Shunt resistors, using custom 11-268

SideHAND ii

Sigma-delta 17-413 , 17-414 , 17-415 signal conditioner hardware control

9-180

Signal Input Connectors 3-35 , 4-68 ,

5-91 , 6-119 , 7-143

Simultaneous sampling 17-407 ,

17-408 slope 9-182 , 14-367 , 15-389 , 15-390 smart batteries 3-45 , 5-96 , 5-102 ,

6-123

SMBus 10-253 , 10-254

Softing 18-443

Software 3-47 , 4-74 , 5-103 , 6-126 ,

7-146 , 8-152 , 8-153 , 8-154 ,

8-155 , 8-156 , 8-157 , 8-160 ,

8-161 , 8-163 , 9-167 , 9-172 ,

9-173 , 281 , 283 , 13-304 ,

13-308 , 13-314 , 13-332 , 13-

337 , 13-342 , 15-372 , 15-377 ,

16-393 , 16-398 , 19-453

Software licensing 9-173

A-500 | Appendix

Sound sensors 9-174

Specifications 5-103

Specifications, Analog Input 3-18 ,

3-28 , 4-52 , 5-78 , 5-83 , 6-106 ,

6-114 , 7-130 , 7-138

STOP, Automatically 9-190

Stop storing. 9-199

Stop storing after 9-190 , 9-192

STORE and STOP buttons 9-208

STORING data 9-198

Strain gage 9-173

Support 1-11 , 1-12

SYNC 5-93

Synching Multiple systems 17-409 synchronizing external devices 17-

407 , 17-408 synchronizing multiple systems 17-

407 , 17-408

System restore DVD 5-101

System Startup 3-44 , 4-72 , 5-95 ,

6-122 , 7-145

T

TEDS 5-103

Temperature 5-102 , 282 , 286 , 13-

295 , 13-307 , 13-315 , 13-343 ,

14-355 , 14-363

Text event 9-199

Thermocouple 13-295 , 13-296 time constant 13-295

TOOLBAR 9-196 touchpad 5-102 training 1-11 , 2-14 turn on (or off) all channels at once

9-178

Two Pulse Edge Separation 8-151 ,

8-157

U

Unused (channels) 9-178 unzoom, how to 9-202

Up/Down Counter 8-151 , 8-154

USB 3-29 , 3-30 , 3-34 , 4-61 , 4-62 ,

4-66 , 5-84 , 5-85 , 5-88 , 5-89 ,

5-102 , 6-117 , 6-118 , 7-141 ,

7-142 , 9-174

Used (channels) 9-178 v

Vector 18-443

VGA 3-33 , 4-65 , 5-87 , 5-88 , 5-102 video 3-29 , 3-31 , 3-33 , 3-34 , 4-61 ,

4-63 , 4-65 , 4-66 , 5-84 , 5-86 ,

5-87 , 5-88 , 5-89 , 5-102 ,

6-117 , 6-118 , 7-141 , 7-142 ,

9-174 , 9-194 video channels, displaying 18-435

VIDEO-FG-4 9-174

Voice event 9-199

Voltage/current input configurations

8-149

W

Weight 5-102

Windows 7 ii , 5-98 , 5-102

Windows updates 2-15

Windows XP ii

Wireless Display 4-59 , 20-463 x

XLR 11-265

X-Y graph 9-172

X-YYY 9-172

Y y = mx + b 9-182 y/t 9-172

Z zoom 9-173 , 9-194 , 9-201 , 9-202 ,

9-203 , 9-207

Zooming in 9-200 zooming out 9-200 zoom in/out 9-173

Dewetron, Inc. 10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA ¤ Tel: +1 401-284-3750 ¤ Fax: +1 401-284-3755 ¤ www.dewamerica.com